Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Distance and Line Differ- Basic Structure of the Function 2
ential Protection, Breaker
Management for 1-Pole System Functions 3
and 3-Pole Tripping Applications 4
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87,
Function-Group Types 5
7VK87
Protection and Automation Functions 6
V7.80 and higher Control Functions 7
Supervision Functions 8
Manual Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C011-A
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 3
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engi-
neering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive) and with the
product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Other Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see certified.ul.com
Select Online Certifications Directory and enter E194016 as UL File Number.
[ul_listed_c_us, 1, --_--]
4 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 5
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Preface
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given particular attention.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
6 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Open Source Software
The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS. These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those
license conditions will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the
event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the
Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the soft-
ware. The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your
Siemens sales contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years
since purchase of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in
it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for the Open Source Software
beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability for defects
resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We do not
provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show open
source software information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text
and copyright information.
To do this, the following steps are necessary:
• Switch to online mode.
• Select the device.
NOTE
i To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.
In order to operate SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 7
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
8 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................41
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................42
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 44
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 63
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 64
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 64
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 64
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 66
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 67
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 69
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................69
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 71
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................72
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log................................................................................................... 73
3.1.5.5 User Log................................................................................................................ 75
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................77
3.1.5.7 Communication Log............................................................................................... 79
3.1.5.8 Security Log........................................................................................................... 80
3.1.5.9 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 81
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 82
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................84
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................84
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................86
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 87
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ............87
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 88
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................90
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................90
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 90
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups..........................................................................................93
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 9
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
10 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions.............................184
3.10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................184
3.10.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5.............................................................. 184
3.10.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device....................... 191
3.11 Device Settings............................................................................................................... 193
3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching.......................................................................................... 193
3.11.1.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................193
3.11.1.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 193
3.11.1.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 193
3.11.1.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 194
3.11.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 195
3.11.1.6 Information List................................................................................................... 195
3.11.2 General Device Settings............................................................................................. 195
3.11.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 195
3.11.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 197
3.11.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 198
3.11.2.4 Information List................................................................................................... 198
4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 201
4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 202
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87........................................ 203
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87........................................ 208
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87.........................................212
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87........................................ 215
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 11
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
12 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
5.5.7 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)......................................... 289
5.5.7.1 Function Description............................................................................................ 289
5.5.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 290
5.5.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 291
5.5.7.4 Information List................................................................................................... 291
5.5.8 Settings.....................................................................................................................291
5.5.9 Information List......................................................................................................... 292
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 293
5.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................293
5.6.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 293
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................295
5.6.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 295
5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 295
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet .......................................................... 296
5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 297
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel.................................................................................................... 297
5.6.3.6 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 300
5.6.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 301
5.6.3.8 Information List................................................................................................... 302
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 302
5.6.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 302
5.6.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 302
5.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 304
5.6.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 305
5.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit...............................................................................305
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit........................................................................ 305
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................................................................308
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs..........................................................310
5.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 310
5.6.6.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 311
5.6.6.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 311
5.6.6.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 312
5.6.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 316
5.6.6.6 Information List................................................................................................... 318
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 318
5.6.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 318
5.6.7.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 318
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ........................................................................ 319
5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 320
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor.............................................................................................321
5.6.7.6 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 321
5.6.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 322
5.6.7.8 Information List................................................................................................... 322
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial..........................................................................................................323
5.6.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 323
5.6.8.2 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 323
5.6.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 324
5.6.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 324
5.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 324
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)..................................................... 324
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)................................................... 327
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors ............................................................ 329
5.6.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols........................................................................329
5.6.10.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 329
5.6.10.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 329
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 13
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
14 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
6.2.11.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic........................................ 409
6.2.11.4 Information List................................................................................................... 409
6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection.......................................................409
6.2.13 Transformer in Protection Range................................................................................ 412
6.2.13.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 412
6.2.13.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 412
6.2.13.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 414
6.2.14 Charging-Current Compensation Ic-Compensation..................................................... 415
6.2.14.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 415
6.2.14.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 416
6.2.14.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 418
6.2.14.4 Information List................................................................................................... 418
6.3 Stub Differential Protection............................................................................................. 419
6.3.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 419
6.3.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 419
6.3.3 Function Description..................................................................................................421
6.3.4 Stage S-DIFF.............................................................................................................. 423
6.3.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 423
6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 424
6.3.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 425
6.3.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 425
6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2.................................................................................................... 426
6.3.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 426
6.3.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 428
6.3.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 428
6.3.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 429
6.3.6 Stage S-DIFF Fast....................................................................................................... 430
6.3.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 430
6.3.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 431
6.3.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 431
6.3.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 431
6.3.7 Stage Description of the Output Logic........................................................................ 432
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection.................................................................................. 433
6.4.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 433
6.4.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 433
6.4.3 Function Description..................................................................................................434
6.4.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................439
6.4.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................449
6.4.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 451
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)..........................................................452
6.5.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 452
6.5.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 452
6.5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 454
6.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................458
6.5.5 Information List......................................................................................................... 458
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection............................................................................................ 459
6.5.7 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 460
6.5.8 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve..............................................................465
6.5.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 465
6.5.8.2 Impedance Calculation......................................................................................... 467
6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 471
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 15
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
16 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 17
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
18 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 19
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification.......................... 748
6.13.1 Function Overview.................................................................................................... 748
6.13.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 748
6.13.3 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection................................................................................ 749
6.13.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 749
6.13.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 750
6.13.4 Instantaneous Stage.................................................................................................. 751
6.13.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 751
6.13.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 751
6.13.5 Delayed Stage........................................................................................................... 753
6.13.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 753
6.13.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 754
6.13.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................755
6.13.7 Information List......................................................................................................... 755
6.14 External Trip Initiation..................................................................................................... 757
6.14.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 757
6.14.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 757
6.14.3 Stage Description ......................................................................................................758
6.14.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 759
6.14.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................759
6.14.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 759
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function......................................................................................... 760
6.15.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 760
6.15.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 760
6.15.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions .............. 762
6.15.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.......................................................................... 764
6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ................................... 764
6.15.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ........................................... 767
6.15.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping .................................................... 769
6.15.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup ....................................................... 770
6.15.4.5 Start.................................................................................................................... 770
6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time .................772
6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time ....................773
6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time ........... 775
6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time .............. 776
6.15.4.10 Stage Release ...................................................................................................... 777
6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping...................................................... 778
6.15.4.12 Dead time for Operating Modes with Pickup ........................................................ 780
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.................................................... 782
6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command ............................................................... 784
6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time .......................................................................................................786
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition ....................................... 787
6.15.4.17 Blockings............................................................................................................. 789
6.15.4.18 1-/3-pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker ...............................................................792
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) ......................................... 793
6.15.4.20 Settings............................................................................................................... 795
6.15.4.21 Information List................................................................................................... 797
6.15.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)................................... 799
6.15.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 799
6.15.5.2 Settings .............................................................................................................. 800
6.15.5.3 Information List................................................................................................... 800
6.15.6 Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function...............................................802
6.15.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 802
20 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 21
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
22 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 23
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
24 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 25
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
26 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 27
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
28 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 29
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
30 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 31
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
32 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 33
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
34 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System........................................... 1603
9.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 1604
9.2 Structure of the Function.............................................................................................. 1605
9.3 Operational Measured Values........................................................................................ 1607
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 35
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
36 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
10 Functional Tests......................................................................................................................................1667
10.1 General Notes............................................................................................................... 1668
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) ...................... 1669
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication....................................................................1670
10.3.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication......................................................... 1670
10.3.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................1671
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection..........................................................1672
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displace-
ment Voltage ............................................................................................................... 1676
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection............................ 1677
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test....................................................................................................... 1680
10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test ............................................................................ 1684
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ............................................................ 1685
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision .............................................................. 1686
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test .......................................................................... 1687
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 1688
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 1689
10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems..................................... 1691
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 1692
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control...................................................................... 1696
10.16.1 Secondary Tests.......................................................................................................1696
10.16.1.1 General..............................................................................................................1696
10.16.1.2 Checking the Transformer Tap Position...............................................................1696
10.16.1.3 Check of the Voltage-Control Function............................................................... 1699
10.16.1.4 Further Tests......................................................................................................1700
10.16.1.5 Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers............................................. 1703
10.16.2 Primary Tests........................................................................................................... 1708
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 37
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
38 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 39
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 1885
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................1886
A.2 Ordering Accessories.....................................................................................................1887
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 1889
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87 ..................................................... 1892
A.5 Phase Current-Transformer Requirements......................................................................1901
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 1910
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices............................... 1917
A.8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices........................1922
A.9 Connection Examples for Special Applications ...............................................................1924
A.10 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis) ........................................................................................1925
A.11 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers) ............................................................... 1927
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 1931
Index.......................................................................................................................................................1951
40 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1 Introduction
1.1 General 42
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 44
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 41
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with a
powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has a current transformer and,
depending on the device type, a voltage transformer. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detec-
tion of phase currents and ground current. The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core
balance current transformer. In addition, phase currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly
precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current
and voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide informa-
tion on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC display,
the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting parame-
ters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters changed. In
addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
42 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.1 General
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally
bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 43
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
44 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
2 Basic Structure of the Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 45
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
• Distance protection (21)
• Overcurrent protection, phases (51)
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application
Templates/Functional Scope).
46 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
• Protection function group Line 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 1
[dweifkfg-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups
Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object – for example, to the
line. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protection
function groups (line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, generator, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches – for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection, automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You
can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed information on
this can be found in the DIGSI 5 Online help.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 47
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2 and V-3ph 1. The
function group therefore receives the measured values from current transformers 1 and 2 and from
voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are added geometrically for
feeder-related processing.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 2.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following Figure, does not
correspond to the example).
48 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included
later in the section. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible
assignments in detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
EXAMPLE
The linkage of the function group in the example shown in Figure 2-1 is as follows:
The protection function group Line is linked to both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2.
This means that an operate indication in the Distance protection function generates a trip command in both
circuit-breaker function groups and thus controls both circuit breakers. The function Circuit-breaker failure
protection of both Circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2 is also started if these are configured.
The user can change this linkage as needed, that is, protection function groups can be freely assigned to any
Circuit-breaker function groups.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device (see following
figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 49
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area (see following figure).
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Line 1 (see the
following figure).
50 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]
• The window for detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and the
Circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 51
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device
[scdetail-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Group(s)
EXAMPLE
In Figure 2-1 you can see that the function Overcurrent protection, phases (51) has 3 stages. The number of
zones of the function Distance protection is not shown.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).
52 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func-
tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also
copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or level from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions
for your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one or
more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
No function points are required to add additional stages in functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 53
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope
Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.
• Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.
54 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
NOTE
i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not (Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = Test).
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[losteurg-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off, and Test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 55
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state is shown in the
following table.
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Linkage of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State)
56 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case the
functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter 8 Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is gener-
ated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 57
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• The function is in the health state Alarm
• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.
58 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follow the hierarchy already shown in Figure 2-1..
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter
The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the func-
tion groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created multiple
times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite time-overcurrent protec-
tion stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one func-
tion group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lostuumz-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite time-overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 59
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.
60 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Basic Structure of the Function
2.5 Information Lists
EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 61
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
62 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 64
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 88
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 90
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 98
3.5 Fault Recording 114
3.6 Protection Communication 121
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization 158
3.8 User-Defined Objects 166
3.9 Other Functions 172
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 184
3.11 Device Settings 193
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 63
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.
64 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-1
On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 65
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Procedure
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You access the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
66 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 67
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
68 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Message text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.
Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether
the value is up to date.
Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity
Number DIGSI address of the signal
Motor startup time Time of motor starting
Starting current Current needed by the motor to start up
Starting voltage Voltage needed by the motor to start up
Start duration Time needed by the motor to start up
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow catego-
rization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based on
fields of application.
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 69
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Log Logging
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup
Management of Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log is
reached, the number of the last fault is generated via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in
the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are
also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
• Open the information routing.
Project → Device → Information routing
[scinfpuf-191012-01, 2, en_US]
70 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter
3.1.5.3 Fault Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).
[scbetrmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 71
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
[scoperlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is pref-
erably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process is
logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
72 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
Figure 3-6
Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However,
this can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The
recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 73
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication:
• Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)
• To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Ground-fault log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-7 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
• To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
74 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-8
Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device
Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-9 a)).
[scanwnmd-030211-01, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 75
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
[scuserrlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
76 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scdiu1u2-280415-01, 1, en_US]
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-12).
[scparamd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 77
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
Figure 3-13
Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device
78 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
[sccompuf-140912-01, 2, en_US]
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Communication log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 79
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-15
Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
• To access the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window . The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Log tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
[scsecmld-180816-01, 1, en_US]
80 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To access the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security indications
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
Figure 3-17
Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 81
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scdevdia-180816-01, 1, en_US]
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
Figure 3-19
Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device
NOTE
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of
the system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
82 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with rele-
vance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault-record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example, after an update of the device software, the following
logs are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log
• Ground-fault log
• Setting-history log
• User log
• Motor-startup log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
Figure 3-20
Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 83
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example, opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
[scspnmld-230211-01, 2, en_US]
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects (for example, lines) and even
circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances). In
DIGSI 5, several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each indi-
vidual one being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they are
manually confirmed or reset by LED reset.
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
84 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be displayed for each pickup or only pickups with
the trip command.
[sckonstf-230211-01, 1, en_US]
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
Figure 3-23
Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 85
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
86 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.1 Indications
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 87
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-24 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the
bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude,
phase, as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dwmeserf-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For
numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz:
sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate compro-
mise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
88 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz)
Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in chapter 6.1 Power-
System Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 89
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
3.3.1 Overview
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The device operates with a maximum of 6 Frequency tracking groups..
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in the chapter
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating
range (10 Hz to 80 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency (sampling frequency =
20 ⋅ tracking frequency) is adapted. The method is implemented in such a way that the number of samplings
per actual power frequency or the frequency of the system is always constant. The number of samplings is 20
per cycle, as per chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition .
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.
NOTE
i The 1-phase measuring points, however, should only be used in exceptional cases.
Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence currents must not be used for
frequency tracking.
The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.
Figure 3-25 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency
90 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current meas-
uring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.
• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.
• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example in
switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.
• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-26 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 80 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 80 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 80 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 80 Hz), frequency tracking generates the
indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an over-
function can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in the chapter 11 Tech-
nical Data.
[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 1, en_US]
Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 91
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-28 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the calcu-
lated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the deter-
mined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.
Figure 3-28 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable
92 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example a 3-phase voltage measuring point, deter-
mines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these prob-
lematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited time.
Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a result,
measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation and
different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.
NOTE
i In the measured-value acquisition chain in Figure 3-24 in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ,
only the data stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its
sampling frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency. In this case, the constant sampling frequency
of 1 kHz at frated = 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz at frated = 60 Hz is used. This applies to every measuring point, regard-
less of the frequency tracking group to which it is assigned.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-29 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the gener-
ator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then, the
voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open and
the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from the
other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from the
power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller inter-
venes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.
NOTE
i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 93
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]
To strike a balance between application flexibility and the required computing power, the number of addi-
tional frequency tracking groups was limited to 5. Together with the basic functionality, a total of 6 frequency
tracking groups are possible.
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.
94 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.
NOTE
i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.
You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-27).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor. As
soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the addi-
tional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.
Figure 3-32 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 95
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
NOTE
i Keep the following in mind when assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups:
• The function groups (FGs) can operate only with 1 frequency tracking group.
• This applies also to interconnections between the function groups as for the Transformer differential
protection.
In the case of the Transformer differential protection, the Transformer side FG is interconnected
with the Transformer FG and all Transformer side FGs of one transformer must operate in the same
frequency tracking group.
The same applies when the neutral-point current is measured using a 1-phase function group.
There are also exceptions such as the FG Circuit breaker (see chapter 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit
Breaker). The voltage measured values are processed by the Synchronization function which operates
only with a fixed sampling frequency. In this way, voltage measuring points from different frequency
tracking groups can be connected.
The cited rules are checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.
Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in the chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at
least 1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.
NOTE
i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.
To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-33).
Figure 3-33 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group
In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-34). Here, you can also check the consistency.
96 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
Figure 3-34 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 97
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
3.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli-
cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects on the basis of
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 2, en_US]
98 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 99
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of the function.
This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several func-
tions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can find
information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User
for Received GOOSE Values, Page 104.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.
You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 101
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_1, 2, en_US]
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.
102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_3, 2, en_US]
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not appli-
cable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 103
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Figure 3-39 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good without change.
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 105
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 107
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
[sccfcran-220415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 109
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
Figure 3-42 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.
[loquali3-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[loquali2-230212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-42.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 111
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Figure 3-44 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)
112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 113
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording docu-
ments operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them. You can
read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
In devices with line differential protection (7SD, 7SL), the time management feature synchronizes the fault
records of all line ends via the protection interfaces. This means that all fault recordings function on the same
real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred to
the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica-
tion connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using appro-
priate programs.
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the inter-
nally calculated measured values and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.
NOTE
i You can find detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records in the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz,
4 kHz, and 8 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or
calculated measured values.
114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time. You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
[dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US]
With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start, you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).
• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.
• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
NOTE
i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 115
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number of
measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 200 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the maximum
storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.
Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording with an external binary signal,
for example, by the trip command of an external
protection device. The set pre- and post-trigger
time are taken into account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording of fixed duration (parameter
Manual record time ) by way of an
external binary signal, for example, manually via
the function key or by an external binary signal.
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
General: Mode ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according
General: State ENS to chapter 2.3 Function Control
General: Standby ENS
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 117
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Parameter: Storage
118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of fault records that you
want to download via DIGSI 5. Possible setting values are 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
3.5.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 119
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.1 Overview
Protection communication includes all functionalities required to exchange data via the protection interface
(PI). It manages one or a maximum of 2 protection interfaces. The Protection communication is generated
with the configuration of the channels as a protocol.
You can find detailed information in the section Protection interface in chapter 3.6.3.1 Overview of Func-
tions.
[dwstrufg-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 121
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If the teleprotection scheme is to work via a protection interface, the receive block Rec. PI# must be
instantiated. Proceed as follows:
• Open the Global DIGSI 5 library and instantiate, for example, the 85-21Perm.overr. function. You can
find the function under FG Line → Teleprotection scheme → 85-21Perm.overr..
• Use drag and drop to add the receive block Rec. PI# from the Global DIGSI 5 library in Information
routing under Line → 85-21Perm.overr.. If a receive block Rec. bin.sig.# is already available
besides Rec. PI# delete the receive block Rec. bin.sig.# from the Information routing.
It's not necessary to route the send and receive signals separately.
Remote Data
The Remote data functionality is applied if you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
interfaces. The protection interface then attends to the transmitting and receiving of such signals. The
maximum amount of remote data is defined by the available bandwidth.
• Protection data, for example differential protection data or teleprotection scheme binary data, are trans-
ferred for distance protection and ground-fault protection.
• The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection, whereby a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of the timing master.
The connection is continuously monitored for data faults and outage, and the time delay of the data is meas-
ured.
The protection interfaces are typically used for differential protection and with the teleprotection scheme for
distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure protection interfaces in all
devices and then use them for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices.
122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The protection topology is used for administration of that topology data relevant to the respective interfaces
and containing data from other devices in the protection topology.
[dwstruct-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The protection communication runs physically via a serial optical communication module. This module can
have 1 or 2 channels. The protection communication can take place via various modules. This depends on the
type of interface and the application. DIGSI 5 is used to configure 1 or 2 channels of a serial optical module as
a protection interface. This enables communication with the values set at the protection interface via this
channel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 123
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwintert-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communications of Type 1 or Type 2 in a
Protection Topology
[dwinterf-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-49 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having Protection Communication
NOTE
i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a protection topology (see parameter
Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection communications can be integrated in one device (see next figure). If 2 protection
communications of the same type are connected to one another, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding
the transmission route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest band-
width (for example, optical fiber). If this connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd
connection until the 1st connection is available again. As the connection with lower bandwidth defines the
maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged via both connections. One
application of this is differential protection routed via a redundant communication connection. Both protec-
tion communications in the device are then of type 1.
124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwintera-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-50 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Communications/Redundant Transmis-
sion Route
[dwchaint-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 125
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The communication ring has the advantage over the communication chain that the entire communications
system and, for example, the differential protection function also work if one of the communication connec-
tions fails or if a device in the topology is taken out of operation.
You can find more information in chapter 3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.
The devices detect failure or logging off, and switch over automatically to the remaining communication
routes.
The following figure shows, for example, a four-line-end differential-protection application if all protection
communications are of type 1. A typical application with protection communications of type 2 is the exchange
of indications and measured values between 4 devices (for example, between switchgears), whereby the
connection can occur via different communication routes. This is the application for a protection-data trans-
mission device.
[dwringto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i If a connection fails in the ring topology, this configuration continues to function as a chain topology. In
addition, a device in the constellation can be logged off from the topology.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. The remaining bandwidth is lower than with all other protection functions (type 2) when using a differ-
ential protection (type 1). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point
indications.
126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire
copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers the highest transmis-
sion rate of 2 MBit/s and is immune to failures in the communication route while offering the shortest trans-
mission time. This also enables the transmission of a large amount of additional information on differential
protection routes and the remote control of devices at the remote end with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths available determine the settings of the protection inter-
face. External communication converters are used for the connection to communication networks via
G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores also takes place via a communica-
tion converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a direct fiber-optic connection to a
multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Table 3-10 to Table 3-11 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the transmission distance depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is possible.
In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO with 2 channels, 2 protection interfaces can be oper-
ated on one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.
Table 3-10 Plug-In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface
Plug-In Modules
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers, 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers, 4 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km via ●
9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1550 nm, duplex LC plug, 100 km ●
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fibers
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 127
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Plug-In Modules
Plug-In module
NOTE
i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P
in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion module.
128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwmultim-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Connection over Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dwmultim-070611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwsingle-070611-03.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber
NOTE
i In order to prevent optical overload of the receiver, a 7XV5107-0AA00 attenuator must be used on one side
in the fiber-optic modules USART-AF, USART-AG, USART-AU, USART-AK, and USART-AV for distances of less
than 25 km/50 km.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 129
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwsingle-020513-04.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwmultim-070611-05.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64
kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s). You can set the bit rate for the KU-XG-512 (for X21), KU-
XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connection
via.
You can find more detailed information in Table 3-12.
[dwmultim-070611-06.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting an additional protection interface.
Make the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 with 512 kBit/s in accordance with Table 3-12 with the
parameter Connection via.
130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwmulti7-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The connection to a communication converter with an integrated 5-kV isolation voltage is established with
128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-12). A 20 kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dwrepeat-070611-10.tif, 1, en_US]
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3-12).
[dwmutip8-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
NOTE
i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different communication routes via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 131
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwtimesy-130212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-62 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with the devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection
interface. Device 1 is synchronized externally from 2 sources (IRIG-B and SNTP via Ethernet).
132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy
The measured values of the line differential protection for the various line ends are synchronized with each
other with microsecond accuracy via the mechanisms of the protection interface. The protection interface
displays this state with the RAISING indication Protection interface synchronized.
If communications problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the CLEARED indication Protection interface
synchronized. The line differential protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only by manual inter-
vention.
NOTE
i You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset synchron.
• The circuit breaker must be open and current must not be flowing.
NOTE
i If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.9.4 Device Logoff.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 133
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scconfcp-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of constellations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
The number of devices is an order option with regard to differential protection.
[scconfws-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You have the option of changing the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication
devices) depending on the product code any way you like via the Select constellation text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Select constellation text box, all activated constellation
settings are lost.
134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
• Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled Protec-
tion interface will then appear (see Figure 3-63).
• Then use the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (for example 2 devices
protection com.) (see Figure 3-64).
[scconfig-181013-01, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 135
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Changes in 1 channel are always visible on the other channel as well. All further parameters can be set sepa-
rately for individual channels.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a topology with 2 devices.
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device.
The addresses must be configured identically for all devices involved in the constellation. A functional protec-
tion communication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of a constellation for a device
with a unique address.
• Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s
The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
group. Set the lowest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 fiber-optic connections (2
MBit/s) and a 64 kBit/s connection with the lowest value (64 kBit/s). This value determines the maximum
signals and measured values within a constellation.
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for the connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
If you wish to operate, for example, a 3-device protection communication as a 2-device protection communi-
cation, you must set the Number of devices parameter = 2.
If you expand the system later, change the Number of devices parameter to the number of devices
actually present.
You can find more detailed information regarding the configuration of the protection interface in chapter
3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 .
NOTE
i Set the same number of devices used in all devices that are part of the constellation.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the Teleprotection schemes require a minimum bandwidth for communication via a
protection interface.
If the Line differential protection function is available in the device, the bit rate must not be less than 512
kBit/s!
The minimum bit rate of 512 kBit/s is important for the Teleprotection with distance protection and Tele-
protection with ground-fault protection functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 137
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If the setting values of the parameters Disturbance alarm after and Transm. fail. alarm
after are exceeded, then an indication is generated.
NOTE
i Only if the Line differential protection function is instantiated, the Difference Tx and Rx time
parameter is displayed.
NOTE
i If the user employs a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recom-
mends a setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i The PPS measurement is used to consider the time delay in the send and receive directions. If PPS fails due
to a reception fault or due to a short-term unfavorable satellite position, synchronization via conventional
communication media remains active.
NOTE
i The synchronization mode can be set separately for both protection interfaces.
If no further PPS pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out supervision responds. If no new 2nd pulse occurs
after the expiry of the supervision time, the indication PPS pulse loss is issued.
[loppssyn-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 139
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The binary input >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal an externally detected failure in the PPS signal (for
example, error message from the receiver). Setting this binary input also leads to the indication PPS pulse
loss.
If you are using a second pulse from a GPS receiver, you must ensure that a loss of reception or reception
disturbances do not generate a second pulse. The GPS receivers recommended by Siemens are set by default
so that a loss of reception or reception disturbances do not generate a second pulse. In the event of problems,
check the setting value for the second pulse.
Siemens recommends the Meinberg 164 GPS receiver. Check the default setting for the second pulse using
the GPSMON32 program. The program is available in the SIPROTEC download area. You can find the setting
value under Outputs →Enable Flags. The second pulse must be set to the value if Sync.
[scGPS_1, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-67 Checking the Setting Value for the 2nd Pulse Using the GPSMON32 Program, Step 1
[scGPS_2, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-68 Checking the Setting Value for the 2nd Pulse Using the GPSMON32 Program, Step 2
140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dwdatenl-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
The following basic principle applies for all messages: Only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality (for
example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for example,
by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for example),
all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all received signals
are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a secure state after a selectable
dropout time, or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be configured separately for
each received signal (see Table 3-16).
NOTE
Indications that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used
for the transmission of rapid signals, for example, release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly determin-
istic, rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbit/s, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 information is transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured
and metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for trans-
mission. Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a prop-
erty of the measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for
example, also for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Indications which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement of each signal
type, refer to Table 3-15.
Table 3-13 and Table 3-14 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
NOTE
i The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter, which has to be set in each device for the protection
interfaces of a topology, defines the number of data areas as well as the topology type.
If, for example, in a three-end constellation with a type 2 chain topology two devices are connected via direct
optical fibers and 2 devices via the 64-kbit/s weakest line, the 64-kbit/s section is the limiting factor for the
entire constellation.
Table 3-13 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kbit/s
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 141
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Table 3-14 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kbit/s
NOTE
i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected with differential protection via a 64-kbits channel. This is a type 1 topology. 8 bits are
freely available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 bit + 2 x 2 bits = 8 bits
NOTE
EXAMPLE
Remote Data Transmission: Routing of the Indications and Measured Values to the Protection Interface
The transmission is organized in the form of a data bar which is continuously exchanged between the devices.
For this, see Figure 3-69.
A device indication or measured value is allocated to a definite data area of the bar.
142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Figure 3-70 to Figure 3-73 show the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 1.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to position 1 and position 2
of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 kbit/s, for example, only 8 of these data areas
are available for type 1; they are exchanged between the transmission routes with each telegram. Signals 3
and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), for example, a switch position that is transmitted by a device 1. A
double-point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar. In addition, a measured and metered value are
communicated via priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at position 33. DIGSI 5 indicates the next available
position.
[scransps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrangmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 143
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scrangzw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This device also receives information (in the matrix under Receive). This must have been routed as a target for
other devices (see next figure). The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive their information via the protec-
tion interface. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in another device to position 3 and 4 of
the data bar. The secure state is defined in the Fallback value column. If the data connection fails, the single-
point indication is reset to coming or going or its value is retained (hold). For data of the various priorities,
you can also set a dropout time after which the reset (see Figure 3-72) to the fallback value occurs, in order to
retain the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout times apply for all
data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.
[scspsemp-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 1
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-70). If you also route
the signals to positions 1 and 2, the signals of the devices are then connected to the corresponding position
with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas, this results in
implausible values for the receivers that read the data. As a user, you are therefore responsible for the correct
routing.
144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scbaspsr-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-74 Routing of Single-Point Indications to be Sent to the Protection Interface in Device 2
The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from the
1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the state of
the indications. Other devices can also read this information and link it to their internal signals. Here, too, the
secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This state depends
on the information. In the case of single-point indications, the state is 0 or 1. In the case of double-point indi-
cations, the bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible, in order to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the data connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state.
[scbausps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Routing of Received Single-Point Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 2
[scbausmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 Routing of Received Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 2
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 145
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scbauszw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device
You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure (see Figure 3-78):
[sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräteadresse, 2, en_US]
146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i You can use the following procedure to reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in
the device:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 147
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Indication Description
(_:5161:302) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 3 and 4 3 and 4 (3: Network Layer, 4: Transport Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
• no error:
The protection interface is operating correctly.
• Software version incompatible:
The firmware versions of the connected devices are incompatible. Update
the firmware.
• System mirroring:
The protection interface is receiving its own data. Check the wiring.
• Dev. add. incorrect:
The device address of the partner device is incorrect. Check the settings for
parameters Address of device 1 to address of device n
(_:5131:102 and following).
• Constell. incorrect:
The constellation settings of the devices are different. Check that the setting
for the parameter Select constellation is identical in all devices.
• Const. param. incorrect:
Check that the same setting has been made for parameter (_:5131:122)
Lowest appearing bit rate in all devices.
• Diff. Param. Error:
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are incom-
patible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or without line
differential protection.
The rated values of the line (parameters (_:9001:101) Rated current
and (_:9001:102) Rated voltage) must be adjusted at both ends of
the line such that the internally calculated (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power at both ends is equal.
If a transformer is installed in the line, (_:9001:102) Rated voltage
and (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power must be adjusted at both ends such
that the internally calculated value of the parameter (_:9001:101)
Rated current at both ends is equal.
You can find further information in this regard in the description of the func-
tion 6.2 Line Differential Protection.
In order to clarify faults, each individual protection interface provides the following binary signals:
Binary Output Signal Description
(_:5161:303) Signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized time (param-
Connection broken eter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after) faulty or missing tele-
grams were continuously received. If the 'Connection interrupted' indication
occurs, the affected protection interface link will be terminated. This can cause
the blocking of an active differential protection or a ring topology can change to
a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error Signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate per
rate / min exc. minute (Parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min) has been
exceeded.
(_:5161:317) Error Signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate
rate / hour exc. per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour) has
been exceeded.
(_:5161:318) Time Signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value for the set
delay exceeded signal-transit time (Parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold) has
been exceeded.
148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 149
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
NOTE
i The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the device. The overview of
DIGSI 5 does not offer this option, however.
[scdiapin-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-79 Diagnostic Data of a Channel Configured with the Protection Interface
150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scdiamed-140912-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 151
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scdiacom-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-81 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
Table 3-19 Description of Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[scdiahdl-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-82 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface
Between Module and Mainboard)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 153
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Table 3-20 Description of Diagnostic Data of the COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface Between
Module and Mainboard)
Table 3-21 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface
3.6.3.11 Settings
154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 155
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 157
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time
Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings
Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is indi-
cated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 159
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi-
cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to
an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second has
Leap second occurred during time synchronization using an
external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG-B
005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
[sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US]
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 161
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
[sctimezo-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-84 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 163
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
3.7.5 Settings
164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.7 Date and Time Synchronization
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 165
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
3.8.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-86 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications
166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 167
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-88 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 169
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function Descrip-
tion of Pulse-Metered Values.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-89) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instantia-
tion in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850 system
tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding procedure
specified in IEC 61850-6).
170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.8 User-Defined Objects
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 171
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i For the circuit breaker or the disconnector, the settings of the software filter for spontaneous position
changes are available only in the Control/Command with feedback function block. These settings are not
available in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function blocks since these function blocks contain the
actual unfiltered position of the switch in the bay.
[sclposi-260116, 1, en_US]
The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms
(1 day) in ms increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software
filter should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back. When activated, the Indication timestamp
before filtering check box back dates the time stamp by the set software filtering time and the fixed
hardware filtering time. In this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If
you activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed
for the duration of this software filter time.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by: , you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the Circuit breaker or
Disconnector function block.
[scflatte-180315, 1, en_US]
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 173
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[scparafl-291110-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-93 and Figure 3-94 in the exam-
ples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes
This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-93 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 175
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-94 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
[scerfass-310816-01, 1, en_US]
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-96) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be updated manually using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-97).
[scstatus-310816-01, 1, en_US]
[scstatu2-310816-01, 1, en_US]
[scstatu3-310816-01, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 177
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can also set acquisition blocking via a binary input. If you want to put the feeder or the switching device
in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking for an individual or several switching devices with an external
toggle switch. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or discon-
nector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the CFC.
[scbeerfa-190215, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-99 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.
178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
[scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.9.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica-
tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant
and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions, for example, the local line differential protection
The Device logoff functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 179
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Device funct.logoff on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logoff off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the
device→Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logoff have been met. If the condi-
tions for the log off have not been met, the logoff is rejected.
The logoff is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
• The Line differential protection function is operating in the device and the local circuit breaker is still
switched on.
In this case, you must switch off the local circuit breaker and repeat the log-off process for the device.
After the logoff, the local Line differential protection function is removed from the summation of the
currents for the Line differential protection of the other devices. The Line differential protection func-
tion remains active in the other devices.
NOTE
i The option used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logoff, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logoff. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Device funct.logoff on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logoff off
(_:508)
180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
The conditions for a successful logoff of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol, for example, in the case of substation
interlocking, you can set in the receiver device for each received data point the value of this data point when
the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the logoff is canceled
by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the meantime.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise, the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices that are not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged
off.
EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the Line differential protection with 3 devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 181
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Figure 3-102 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder
In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the Line differential protection can no longer
function and sends an ineffective indication.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in Device 3.
NOTE
i Before logging off, you must switch off the feeder protected by the local Line differential protection.
The Line differential protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder.
During the log-off process, device 3 checks whether the circuit breaker 3 is really switched off.
The Circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-
breaker position using the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker position function block performs linking of the individual CB condi-
tions for the protected object.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object internal signal assumes the
Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
• The binary input signal >Disconnector open is active.
You can find more information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object.
If the Line differential protection is logged off in device 3, the remaining devices 1 and 2 save this state and
calculate the total current using Kirchhoff's current law with the currents in devices 1 and 2 only.
If device 3 is successfully logged off, you can switch it off. The logoff of device 3 is saved in the remaining
devices also after it is switched off. If you switch device 3 on again, you must log it on again in the device
combination.
182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.9 Other Functions
Figure 3-103 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Device funct.logoff on as H (active
with voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logoff off as L (active without voltage).
If the switch S is closed, the device is logged off.
Figure 3-104 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and the cause of the logoff.
If you have logged off the device via binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI is issued.
If you have logged off the device via on-site operation, via DIGSI 5, or via the protection interface, the indica-
tion (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 183
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.10.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A
The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 185
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]
In the function group Line, you set the line data (see following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the
reference variables for the percent setting.
[scproref_4, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at
1500 A.
186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-109 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 187
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-110 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A
188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-111 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 189
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-112 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.
190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-113 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In
the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A * 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the reply to your question (see Figure 3-112).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery. Only secondary values can be set directly
on the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 191
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.10 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-112). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.
192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 193
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
Table 3-22 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
3.11.1.5 Settings
3.11.2.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 195
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
[scDeSeDe2-310715-01, 1, en_US]
[scDeSeAl-310715-01, 3, en_US]
[scDeSeall-260815-01, 1, en_US]
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in chapter 3.9.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Control in chapter 7.4 Control Functionality.
• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User
in CFC Charts.
196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit, if
this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated in a
test and whether all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions
that are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive
these indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for
test purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.
Parameter: Fault-display
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 197
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every startup until you intentionally set the device back into
process mode. You set process mode by switching the parameterActivate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark).
3.11.2.3 Settings
198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
System Functions
3.11 Device Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 199
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
4 Applications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 201
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
• Contains the basic configuration for the use case
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems
• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-
breaker layout
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIS Res./Isol. Systems, with AREC
Template 3 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 4 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems, 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
Circuit-Breaker Layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SA87
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 203
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SA87
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠(V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x x
systems with resonant or isolated W0p,tr>, G0>,
neutral systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt x x x
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection x x x x
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x x x x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground- x x x x
fault protection
86 Lockout x
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault ΔIN x
protection
204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SA87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x x x x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
status
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 150 225 400
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 205
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection, Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems with 3-pole AREC (7SA87)
The Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-pole AREC application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
(7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point
• The main protection is distance protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection MHO for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured
for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• For systems with grounded neutral point
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with
1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 207
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
• Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:
Table 4-2 Functional Scope of the Application Template for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SD87
208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SD87
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x x
protection
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection INs> x
for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protec- I>, ∠ (V,I) x
tion, phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x
systems with resonant or isolated W0p,tr>, G0>,
neutral systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: ΔI x x
Transformer in protection range
Option for differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low-impedance restricted ground- ΔIN x
fault protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 209
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
7SD87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
status
27Q Directional reactive power under- Q>/V< x
voltage protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 175 275 350
210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Transformer in the Protection Range (7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping with transformer in the protection range
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection with transformer option
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-breaker Layout ( 7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• The main protection is phase-selective differential protection
• Stub-fault protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 211
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
• Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 3 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:
Table 4-3 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI x x x
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ΔI x x x
ends (dependent on significant proper-
ties)
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x 2
Impedance protection x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
tion with direction
212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50 HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x
protection
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠ (V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral W0p,tr>, G0>,
systems, incl. B0>, IN-pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Fleeting contact
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN-pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: Trans- ΔI x
former in protection range
Option for differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for x x
1 1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault ΔIN x
protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 213
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access
Control
Function-point class: 0 225 400
214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the Basis application
template:
Table 4-4 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7VK87
Template 1
7VK87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx< x
Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
with direction
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protec- I>>> x
tion
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
59 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx> x
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, ∠ (V,I) x
phases
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 215
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87
Template 1
7VK87
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x
90V Two-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Three-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Grid coupling transformer voltage controller x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Measured values, standard x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x
Monitoring and supervision x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x
Circuit-breaker control x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
37 Undercurrent I< x
Circuit-breaker supervision ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Frequency Tracking Groups x x
Cyber Security: Role-based Access Control
Function-point class: 0
216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
5 Function-Group Types
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 217
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.1 Overview
In the Line function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a line can be
used. The Line function group also contains the measuring functions (for more information, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Line function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Line func-
tion group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use for this device type. The
functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation Functions. The following figure shows the
functional scope of the Line function group using the example of a device.
218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[scbibofg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Line Function Group - Functional Scope for Device Type 7SL86
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, please refer to chapter 2 Basic
Structure of the Function. For information about the overall functional scope of the application templates for
the various device types, please refer to chapter 4 Applications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 219
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• Operational measurement
• Process monitor
[dwfgline-160812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Protection communication
220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The Line function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage:
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Various transformer
connection types are possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided
via this interface. The Line function group must always be connected to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to use the Distance-protection function in the Line function group for your use case, you
must connect the 3 phase-to-ground voltages to the V-3ph measuring point. If you want to test or
change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point, double-click Measuring
point routing (connection type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage) in the DIGSI 5 project tree → 7SL86 (name
of the device).
For more information, please refer to the description of the power-system data starting from chapter
6.1.1 Overview.
NOTE
i You can connect the 3-phase phase current interface to at most two 3-phase current measuring
points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts).
The other interfaces can only be connected to one measuring point each!
• Start of the Automatic reclosing function (AREC if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 221
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Besides the general allocation of the Line protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups,
you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using
the Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the Line function group.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
Line Data
The line data characterizes the line that is to be protected. The line data applies for all of the functions in the
Line function group.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Line function group and cannot be removed. The process
monitor provides the following information in the Line function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/closed line based on the flow of minimum current
• Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the line
222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• Energy
• Mean values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
You can find more information in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pick up and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the
function group separately, in either a pickup logic or an output logic. The pickup and output logic generate the
overreaching indications (group signals) of the function group. These group indications are transferred via the
Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed further there.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 223
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The pickup indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Line function group are combined
phase-segregated and output as a group indication.
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
The operate indications of the protection functions are combined on a phase-selective basis (see the following
figure).
[loauspha-100511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is capable of a 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set in a
function (for example, distance protection), a 1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication.
If at least the following conditions have been met, the connected Circuit-breaker function group generates a
1-pole operate command:
• Automatic reclosing function (AREC) is present
• Circuit breaker can switch to 1-pole
224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Line Data
The following application and setting instructions apply for the line data. The line data are configured in the
Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.
NOTE
NOTE
i If the optional function block Transformer has been instantiated in the Line Differential Protection
function, the parameter Rated apparent power can be set. The parameter Rated current is then
calculated internally and is displayed as a write-protected parameter.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
NOTE
i The parameter Rated apparent power is only configurable if the optional function block Trans-
former has been instantiated in the Line Differential Protection function.
If the function block Transformer has not been instantiated, the Rated apparent power is calculated
internally from parameters Rated current and Rated voltage and is displayed as a write-protected
parameter.
With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power of the
protected transformer. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection function
of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 225
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
EXAMPLE
[folwinkl-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
[folwibsp-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The visibility of the Kr and Kx parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual compen-
sation factors. The parameters Kr and Kx only become visible after you have set the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for the device.
The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
specific parameters for each zone.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 227
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
EXAMPLE
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[forerlx1-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) only become visible after you have set the
parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex residual compensation factor. The K0 and
Angle (K0) parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
local parameters for each zone.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex residual compensation factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex residual compensation factor from the line data as
follows:
where:
Z0 (complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (complex) positive-sequence impedance
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-phase liquid filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
[fofork02-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofork03-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofork04-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
Part
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 229
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected (Ignd) is greater
than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends retaining the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)= 85 %. In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may be
advisable.
230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[fo1isaet-041210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
NOTE
i The parameter CT saturation threshold only becomes visible when you have set the parameter CT
saturation detection = yes.
[foforcse-060509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is only relevant for the Directional ground-fault protection
function.
Parameter: P, Q sign
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 231
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Current-flow criterion
[dwpro1p1-050612-01.tif, 3, en_US]
You can switch the voltage criterion and the cold-load pickup detection as necessary. The circuit-breaker posi-
tion recognition and the current-flow criterion run permanently in the background and are not displayed in
DIGSI.
232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro1p1-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 233
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproire-181111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit-breakers, the
Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit-breaker. The smallest setting value of
the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.5 Settings
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-9 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 235
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
[loproein-121012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from function block Manual close), the indication Closure is
always active. The indication Closure can also be activated via the measurand. In addition, the protected
object must be switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
This time is started as follows depending on the Operating mode parameter:
• For parameter Operating mode = Iopen,Vopen,ManCl:
If the current-flow criterion and the voltage criterion are detected open-circuited.
236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 237
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.9 Settings
238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproopd-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Logic Diagram of the 1-Pole Open Detector Function Block
The 1-pole open indication is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• Internal trip command
The source protection device has issued a 1-phase tripping command (after 30 ms).
After issuing a 1-phase tripping command, only the corresponding phase current drops below the setting
value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. At the same time, the ground current exceeds
this value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 239
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• V and I
The 1-pole open detector function block unambiguously detects a 1-pole open circuit breaker. Current
and voltage of the other phases must be present.
The corresponding 1-pole open indication disappears if one of the following conditions is met:
• The value in both activated phases falls below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter 300 ms.
• The current in the deactivated phase exceeds the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter again after 150 ms.
Additionally, the 1-pole open indication is also generated in the following application cases:
• The following applies to applications on an unloaded line: The 1-pole open indication is generated if
current and voltage are missing in one phase and a voltage is applied in the other phases. The 1-pole
open indication disappears immediately if these criteria are no longer fulfilled. As a result, a 1-phase
automatic reclosing function on an unloaded line can be detected.
• The following applies to applications with voltage transformers at the busbar end: If a phase-selective
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals a 1-pole open circuit-breaker and the current of this phase falls
below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter, the 1-pole open indication is gener-
ated.
Detection of a 1-pole open circuit-breaker is stabilized by 10 ms. This avoids incorrect response in the
transition states of 3-phase switching operations.
240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproure-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you want to test closure detection or an open-pole detector via a voltage, you need a voltage transformer
installed on the line side and electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point. In this case, add the
Voltage criterion function block to the process monitor.
If the voltage transformers are installed on the busbar side or if there is no voltage connected, you must not
use the voltage criterion to detect a deactivated phase.
With the (_:101) Threshold U open parameter, you define the residual voltage as the criterion for a
deactivated line. If the phase-to-ground voltage falls below the value of the Threshold U open parameter,
the V open signal is generated. The function stabilizes the signal with a hysteresis and a delay of the rising
edge of the signal. The falling edge of the signal is forwarded without delay.
NOTE
i The Threshold U open parameter is available only when the optional Voltage criterion function block
is used. Use this parameter only with a voltage transformer installed on the line side and in electrical power
systems with a grounded neutral point.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 241
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.14 Settings
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 243
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.17 Settings
5.1.4.19 Settings
244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 245
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.2.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in the func-
tion group Voltage-current 3-phase. The functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation
Functions.
You can find more information on the embedding of the functions in the device in chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function. You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device types in
chapter 4 Applications.
• Process monitor
[dwfgui3p-301112-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 247
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.
248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
Table 5-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 249
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values.
• Energy
• Average values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.
250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-15 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 251
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: P, Q sign
NOTE
i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power
NOTE
i You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5.2.7 Process Monitor.
5.2.5 Settings
252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 253
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
[dwpro3pt-061212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run perma-
nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[loproire-181111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit-breakers, the
Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit-breaker. The smallest setting value of
the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 255
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-20 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
Logic
[loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
For an applied binary input signal (_:4681:500) >Disconnector openDetected (from function block
Manual close), the indication (_:4681:300) ClosureClosure is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 257
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 259
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.2.7.10 Settings
260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protection object or equipment that allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via the 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values,
and Supervision of the Primary System).
The Voltage-current 1-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[dw1spstr-040117-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 261
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group
If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring
point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage VN at the broken-delta
winding. The residual voltage is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. This
converted voltage is used as the voltage input for all functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase function
group.
[scvnopen, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Selection of the VN broken-delta Voltage Type for the 1-Phase Voltage Measuring Point
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is
available via the voltage interface (see figure below).
[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the 1-Phase Voltage-
Current Function Group
You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with precisely one 3-
phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-phase voltage measuring-point connection are supported. With
the different connection types, the type of voltage input for the functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase
function group also changes.
262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the Voltage-current 1-phase function group
depending on the connection types.
Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input
Phase Voltage Measuring
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and used as a voltage input for all functions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN sequence voltage. This converted voltage is used as a voltage input for func-
tions.
[sc1stspc-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-27 Connecting Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group:
You can find the parameters Rated operating current and Rated operating voltage in the
General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group.
7 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.
8 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-ground
voltage connection type.
9 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase phase-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 263
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
[scui1pom, 1, en_US]
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group
You can find the parameters Rated operating current, Rated operating voltage, and Rated
apparent power in the General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You can
find the parameter Rated frequency in the General function block of the Device settings.
NOTE
i The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value.
The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1-phase current are connected to
the function group. If the connected voltage is a phase-to-ground voltage (VA, VB , VC) or any voltage Vx,
the specific power values are displayed. Otherwise the power is displayed as not available.
NOTE
i Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be
connected to the appropriateCircuit-breaker function group.
264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
• With the connection type VA, VB, VC, or VN (broken-delta winding), you set the Rated voltage parameter as the
phase-to-ground voltage.
• With the connection type VX, you set the Rated voltage parameter as either the phase-to-phase
voltage or the phase-to-ground voltage
Parameter: P, Q sign
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph
5.3.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 265
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.4.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for
example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw3spann-300913, 1, en_US]
[sc3span1-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-30 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in chapter
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 267
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree → Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc3span2-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-31 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Table 5-5 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should first connect hese functions to
the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.
5.4.4 Settings
268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 269
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[scbicb1p-241013, 1, en_US]
These functions are described in the chapters Protection and automation functions and Control functionali-
ties.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-Breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
[dwfgalle-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 271
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
• Voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system or 1-phase voltage are supplied via this interface.
Depending on the connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are for
example, VA, VB, VC of the line or feeder.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if a user function that needs the
measurand of the 3-phase voltage system is used, for example, to make use of the Synchronization or
Automatic reclosing function.
• Sync voltage
A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or a 3-
phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is supplied
via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current which serves as a reference for all
current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 273
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.5.5.1 Overview). The command output time is also effective here. In the trip logic, the decision is made
whether to trigger 1-pole tripping or not (3-pole coupling) (see Figure 5-34).
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-35).
[loausl1p-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
• The Automatic reclosing function is active and generates the 79 permits 1-pole trip signal. The
function thus indicates that it is healthy for 1-pole reclosing after 1-pole operate.
274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
3-Pole Coupling
3-pole coupling describes the situation when the trip logic decides to execute 3-pole tripping despite the pres-
ence of a 1-pole operate indication.
This may be the case under the following circumstances:
• The Automatic reclosing function cannot execute a 1-pole cycle. This is expressed by the cleared signal
79 permits 1-pole trip.
• If an upstream device has caused 1-pole tripping and the device in question detects this pole as open (via
the process monitor in the Line protection function group) and the device in question detects a fault in
another phase.
• If 1-pole tripping reoccurs within 50 ms after an instance of 1-pole tripping has been cleared
• If the permission for 1-pole tripping is canceled by the AR (internal or external) after a cleared 1-pole trip
(during the 1-pole pause)
By default, 3-pole coupling is carried out based on the cumulative operate indication. Optionally, the group
pickup indication can also be taken into account (parameter 3-pole coupling). In this case, every multi-
phase pickup results in a 3-pole coupling, including pickups of different phases from different stages/func-
tions.
2-Phase Short-Circuits
For 2-pole faults, you set the behavior with the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit.
• 3-pole
Tripping is executed in the event of 2-pole faults.
Coupling Table
The following table shows the coupling table for Figure 5-34. This table also explains its impact on 2-phase
faults.
Input Output
Impact of the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit
3-pole 1-pole, leading phase 1-pole, lagging phase
A B C Groun A B C A B C A B C
d
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 275
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Input Output
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
[loauslbe-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• with I<
276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
EXAMPLE
If two 1-phase ground faults occur on different lines - for example, including parallel lines - (see Figure 5-36),
the protection devices will detect fault types A-B-E at all 4 line ends, that is, with a pickup characteristic corre-
sponding to a 2-phase ground fault. However, since there is only one 1-phase short circuit on each of the 2
lines, it is desirable to have a short 1-pole interruption on each of these 2 lines. This is possible with a setting
with trip command. Each of the 4 devices detects an internal 1-phase short circuit and can therefore cause 1-
pole tripping.
[dwfehler-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 277
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
In some cases, 3-pole disconnection works better for this fault type: If the double line is situated close to a
large generator block (see Figure 5-37). For the generator, both 1-phase ground faults are manifested as
double ground faults with a correspondingly high dynamic load of the turbine shaft. For a setting with pickup,
both lines are deactivated since each device detects A-B-E – that is, a multiphase short circuit – upon pickup.
[dwgenfeh-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line Close to the Generator
• Default setting (_:5341:101) Trip at 2ph short circuit = 1-pole, leading phase
With the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit, you determine whether the short-circuit protection
functions only result in 1-pole tripping in the event of an isolated 2-phase fault (without ground contact),
provided 1-pole tripping is possible and allowed. This enables a 1-phase interrupt cycle for this fault type. In
this case, you determine which of the 2 phases – the leading (1-pole, leading phase) or the lagging
phase (1-pole, lagging phase) – is tripped.
NOTE
i If you want to use this option, bear in mind that phase selection is the same throughout the power system
and at the ends of a line.
If 3-pole tripping is to be executed in the event of this fault type, select the 3-pole setting.
278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.4.3 Settings
5.5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical circuit breaker in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker (CB)
• Detection of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 279
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loaussch-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loerfass-091210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 281
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
The signal or signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The open and closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of
parallel routing is that it can be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one
signal (open or closed), you cannot determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker position is open.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in intermediate position.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.
[lounterd-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 283
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loausloe-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
• Number of closings by the automatic reclosing function, broken down according to 1-pole and 3-pole as
well as 1st cycle and other cycles
284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loansteu-071210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i Note that you must route the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal for 3-pole tripping/opening to all 3 binary
inputs.
By routing the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1, 1.5, and
2‑pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in chapter 7.2.2.3 Connec-
tion Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 285
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loauswer-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-44 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
Device
Perform the routing to the binary input as C_ (closed). The following figure shows the recommended routing,
in which H stands for active with voltage.
[scpolges-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-45 Pole Closed: Routing for the Acquisition of Pole Closed Information
[loausw3p-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection and
Control Device
286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Execute the routing of the Position 3-pole signal as O_ (open). The following figure shows the recom-
mended routing, in which H stands for active with voltage.
[scpoloff-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Routing for Detection of the Information: Circuit Breaker 3-Pole Open
Depending on the design of the circuit breaker, other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system. In this
case, the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically. Since all
routing options are possible on the device, there is no need for auxiliary contacts to be connected in series.
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 287
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loschalt-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
5.5.6.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow. The determination is performed phase-segregated.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.5.4.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.5.7.1 Function Description)
288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
The specified chapters describe how the protection-related additional functions process the information of this
function block.
The control does not use this information. It evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lozust1p-170611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow shown in
Figure 5-49, the circuit-breaker position can assume the following positions separately for each phase: The
following table shows the possible circuit-breaker positions:
Circuit-Breaker Position, Description
Phase-Segregated
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.
Possibly open, possibly These positions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the position can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain positions are evaluated differently by
certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring position that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current falling
below the threshold value is detected because the current-flow criterion
takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact can open.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 289
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loghande-091210-01.tif, 3, en_US]
[losteuer-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-51 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed automatically
in the event of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.
290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
assured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
5.5.7.3 Settings
5.5.8 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 291
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, analog plug-in modules, or measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc20maee-250816-01, 2, en_US]
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 293
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwstrthe, 3, en_US]
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function
group provides for example measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20-mA unit serial is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..
294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.
5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 295
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
Logic
[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 297
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such as
temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-mA
channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values are
available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 299
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.3.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 301
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
Parameter: Port
302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number setting, you specify
the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication module inputs
are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 303
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.4.3 Settings
304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 305
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 307
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-66 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-67 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 309
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
5.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz for
all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault-
recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.
310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas pres-
sure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 311
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scmuio212, 1, en_US]
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA-channels (see chapter 5.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel).
Parameter: Unit
312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 313
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below 4 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken wire. A sensor detecting a
temperature is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to
-100 °C. This results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the func-
tion calculates the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient
and foot point) are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied current
of 9.333 mA corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.
314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 315
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-76 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V
5.6.6.5 Settings
316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 317
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 319
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 321
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
5.6.7.7 Settings
322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
Parameter: Port
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 323
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.8.3 Settings
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 325
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
RTD box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-86 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-87 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 327
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.
328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scautcp5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
5.6.10.1 Overview
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols:
• Obtains the temperature from a power-plant control system or from another protection device
• Processes the temperature, for example, supervises the temperature in the CFC
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 329
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_structure_TmpviaProt, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
The stage processes the transmitted temperature via PROFINET IO or via IEC 61850.
• Via PROFINET IO, only the analog value of the temperature is transmitted.
• Via IEC 61850, the analog value of the temperature, the quality of the temperature, and the time stamp
are transmitted.
Temperature-Failure Indication
If the received temperature is invalid, the failure indication Temperature failure is issued.
Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the power-plant control system. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection
device, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the
330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
power-plant control system and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Tempera-
ture acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.
[dw_AppEXP_IEC, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 331
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Configuration Example
To acquire the temperature with the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, proceed
in DIGSI as follows:
• Via PROFINET IO
– In the project tree, select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select an Ethernet port of the device.
If the device has no Ethernet port, select Hardware catalog → SIRPOTEC 5 → Communication to
add one to the device.
– In the Properties view of the Ethernet port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.
[sc_PROFINET_IO, 1, en_US]
332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_PROFI_Filter, 1, en_US]
[sc_PROFI_Setting, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 333
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]
[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]
334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]
[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 335
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Ctl 1 respectively.
[sc_IEC61850_3, 1, en_US]
[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]
336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the SIPROTEC 5 device 2. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection device
1, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the
SIPROTEC 5 device 2 and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Temperature
acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 337
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_AppEXP_GOOSE, 1, en_US]
338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Configuration Example
[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]
[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 339
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]
[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]
340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]
[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 341
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]
[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]
342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_Station10, 1, en_US]
Signal Configuration
– In the project tree, select Device → Settings.
– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Goose 1 respectively.
[sc_GOOSE_CGT, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 343
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_StationConfirmation, 1, en_US]
[sc_IECStation, 1, en_US]
344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_DeviceAssign, 1, en_US]
[sc_ExportIEC, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 345
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_IECConfim, 1, en_US]
[sc_Station1, 1, en_US]
346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_Station2, 1, en_US]
[sc_Station3, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 347
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
You can see the assigned source data in the GOOSE messages view.
[sc_Station4, 1, en_US]
[sc_Station6, 1, en_US]
[sc_Station11, 1, en_US]
348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_Station8, 1, en_US]
If the following dialog shows up, the source device and the destination device are successfully
connected.
[sc_End, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 349
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-129 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for all Devices
[sc_SITmp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-130 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for 1 Device
350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
NOTE
i If the parameter Unit system is set to ANSI, only the unit of the measuring values and parameters
changes to °F. The unit of the data used in the device and the thresholds in DCF is still °C.
Parameter: Unit
5.6.10.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 351
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
5.7.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-132 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications
352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.8.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 353
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-134 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 355
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Function Descrip-
tion of Pulse-Metered Values.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
6 Protection and Automation Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 357
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dwandata-180912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
NOTE
i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in chapter 8.3 Supervision of the Secon-
dary System.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 359
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)
The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in chapter 8 Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
Parameter: Tracking
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in chapter 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking
Groups.
[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 361
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: CT error A
Parameter: CT error B
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 1-Phase (I-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
Parameter: Tracking
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 363
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in chapter Supervision Functions.
364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.
[fo_bsp1, 2, en_US]
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 365
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
EXAMPLE 2:
[fo_bsp2, 1, en_US]
[fo_umrechnung2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
Parameter: VT connection
366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in the chapters
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide
assistance when selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 367
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1-Phase (V-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-points routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• VA
• V B
• V C
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN13
• Vx
• VN broken-delta14
13 If
you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.
14 If
you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.
368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
NOTE
i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V 1‑ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.
Parameter: Tracking
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 369
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line Differential Protection Settings
NOTE
i The following parameters are only important for the Line differential protection function. These parame-
ters can be found in DIGSI 5 project tree under Device name (for example, 7SL86) → Settings → Power-
system data under Measuring point I-3ph.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[fofueber-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
n' Operational overcurrent factor (effective overcurrent factor)
n Rated overcurrent factor of the current transformer (index following the letter "P")
PN Rated burden of the current transformer at rated current in [VA]
Pi Inherent current transformer burden at rated current in [VA]
P' Actually connected burden (devices and secondary line) at rated current in [VA]
The rated overcurrent factor n and the rated power PN of the current transformer can be found on the name
plate of the current transformer. These values refer to the specified conditions (rated current, rated burden).
370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
EXAMPLE:
The operational overcurrent factor n' is the result of the rated data and the actual secondary burden P'.
Under normal circumstances, the inherent burden of the current transformer is documented in the test
protocol. If this value is unknown, the inherent burden Pi can be approximated and determined from the DC
resistance Ri of the secondary winding:
[foeigbue-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: CT error A
Example:
Parameter: CT error B
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 371
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Error changeover15
Transformer
Standard
Class
CT error A15
CT error B15
5P IEC 60044-1 1.0 % ± 60 min ≤ 5 % 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
10P 3.0 % _ ≤ 10 % 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %
TPX 0.5 % ± 30 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 1.0 % 15.0 %
TPY 1.0 % ± 30 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 3.0 % 15.0 %
TPZ 1.0 % 180 min ε ≤ 10 % 1.50 6.0 % 20.0 %
± 18 min (I ≈ only)
PX IEC 60044-1 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
BS: Class X
C100 to C800 ANSI 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %
EXAMPLE:
[fo_rl, 1, en_US]
The worst-case scenario has been assumed for the calculation, whereby during a 1-pole error the current
flows back and forth across the secondary lines (factor 2). This follows that the power at a rated current of
Irated = 5 A can be calculated as:
[fo_pi, 1, en_US]
The entire connected burden comprises the burden of the supply lines and the burden of the device, and is
calculated as follows:
[fo_pges, 1, en_US]
372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
[fo_fehlerueb, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
For the controlled side of the transformer, the following mean current is determined:
[foimittl-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fodelmax-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Add this max. deviation to the transformer errors CT error A and CT error B determined as described
above. Ensure that this deviation due to voltage control relates to the mean current at rated apparent power
and not to the rated current at the rated voltage.
6.1.9 Settings
General
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 373
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 375
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 377
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 379
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
General
380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 381
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The Line differential protection function is used in the Line function group.
The Line differential protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB)
General, the stage I-DIFF and the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
As an alternative to the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the I-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5
library.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the same stage type must be instantiated in all devices of the device combination. The
devices of the device combination operate either with the I-DIFF fast 2 stage or with the I-DIFF
fast stage.
When commissioning communication via the protection interface, it is checked whether the same stage
types are instantiated in all devices of the device combination. If different stage types are instantiated in
the devices, communication via the protection interface is not possible. In this case, the protection inter-
face issues the diagnostic indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 = Diff. Param.
Err..
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection
Interface.
The function blocks Ic-compensat. and Transformer are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library for special
applications and can be instantiated into the function.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all stages.
[dwdifstr_LP, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 383
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Overall Logic
[loges13p-310512-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-6 General Logic for Differential Protection Functions with 1-/3-Pole Tripping
Mode of Operation
The Line differential protection function is composed of several subfunctions.
The core of differential protection consists of the 2 stages I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2. Both work in
parallel and ensure high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. The output signals
384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
of these stages are pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the pickup logic and the trip logic, resulting in
the corresponding protection indications.
The Remote tripping functionality transmits the internally generated trip group indication to the remote
devices in the device combination. In addition, the Remote tripping functionality receives the trip group indi-
cations of the remote devices and transmits these indications to the trip logic. You can find more detailed
information in chapter 6.2.10 Remote Tripping.
The optional FB Ic-compensat. contains the charging-current compensation. The FB Ic-compensat. is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage I-DIFF and ensures maximum sensitivity even with high capacitive
charging currents.
The optional FB Transformer is required to protect a transformer in the protection range. The additional FB
Transformer guarantees that amplitudes and phase angle of the measured currents at the line ends will be
evaluated correctly.
Line differential protection is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. operates on the basis of
current comparison (Kirchhoff's current law). For this a device has to be installed at each end of the area to be
protected. The devices exchange their measurands via communication connections. Each device performs the
current comparison with these measurands and trips the assigned circuit breaker, if there is a short circuit in
the protection range. The current transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
Apart from normal lines, the Line differential protection can also protect lines with a transformer in block
connection. By using the Inrush-current detection function and the adaptive method of measurement for the
Line differential protection, the stages can be stabilized to prevent tripping that may be caused by transformer
inrush currents.
Measured-Value Transmission
If the protected object is spatially connected – as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars – the
measurands can be processed directly. The processing is different for lines where the protection range extends
from one station to another. To enable the measurands from all line ends to be processed at each line end,
these measurands must be transferred in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping condition can be checked at
each line end, and the respective local circuit breaker can be tripped in case of a fault.
The measurands are encrypted and transmitted in digital telegrams via communication channels. For this
purpose, each device features at least one interface for protection-data communication, called the protection
interface in the following.
Figure 6-7 shows this principle for a line with 2 ends. Each device detects the local current and sends informa-
tion on its magnitude and phase relation to the opposite end. Thus, each device can add the currents from all
ends and further process them.
[dwdiff2e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If there are more than 2 ends, a communication chain is established so that each device is informed of the
sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-8 shows an example with 3 ends. The under-
lying principle in this regard is partial current summation. In this process, each device measures the respective
local currents. Device 1 detects the current i1 and transmits its data in the form of a complex phasor I1 to
device 2. This device adds the component I2 from measuring current i2 and transmits this subtotal to device 3.
The subtotal I1 + I2 reaches device 3 which adds its component I3. In the reverse direction, a corresponding
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 385
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
chain runs from device 3 via device 2 to device 1. In this way, all 3 devices have the sum of all 3 currents
measured at the measuring points.
If ends 1 and 2 are close together (within about 500 m), currents I1 and I2 can also be detected by 1 protec-
tion device. The number of analog current inputs (8I) at the protection device must be sufficient for this. Thus,
the topology shown in Figure 6-8 can also be protected with just 2 physical devices (see Figure 6-9).
The order of the devices in the communication chain does not have to correspond to their indexing. The
assignment is made in the course of parameterization for the topology.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.6.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.
[dwdiff3e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Differential Protection for a Line with 3 Ends with 2 Devices
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown with dashed lines in Figure 6-8. This
enables a redundant transmission. Even if there is an outage of the communication connection, the differen-
tial-protection system remains operational without any restrictions. The devices recognize a failure in the
communication and automatically switch over to a different communication route. It is also possible to discon-
nect one line end (for example for tests or modification) and shut down the local protection.
You can find more information on this in chapter 6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection.
386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Measured-Value Synchronization
The devices detect the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device detects, digitizes, and
preprocesses the associated currents from the current transformers at its own random processor clock. If the
currents of 2 or more line ends are to be compared, all currents must be processed with the same time base.
All devices in the device combination exchange their time status with each telegram. The device whose
address is entered first in the device-combination configuration in the protection interface functions as timing
master, meaning it specifies the time frame. Each device can thus calculate the time offset due to the trans-
mission and processing times relative to the timing master.
To achieve a sufficiently exact synchronization of the measured values, the current values are additionally
provided with a time stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the others in digital telegrams.
The time stamp allows a statement on the time at which the transmitted current values were valid. The
receiving devices can thus carry out a fine synchronization based on the time stamp and their own time
management. This means that currents detected at the same time (< 5 μs tolerance) are compared with each
other.
The devices use the time stamp in the measured-data telegram to monitor the transfer times in real time and
take each of these into account at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measurands is decisive
for the exact calculation of the complex phasors. So that the phasor comparison is synchronous, the devices
also measure the frequency of the measurands constantly and feed these into the calculation when needed. If
the device is connected to voltage transformers and if at least one voltage is available in sufficient magnitude,
the frequency is determined from this voltage. Otherwise, the measured currents are used as the basis for
frequency determination. The devices exchange the determined frequencies with one another via the commu-
nication routes. Under these conditions, all devices operate with the updated frequency.
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of the differential protection is based on the precondition that, during uninterrupted opera-
tion, the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equals 0. This applies to the primary system and
only there if the shunt components of current, which occur from the capacitance of the lines or the magneti-
zation currents of the transformers and shunt reactors, are negligible. In contrast, the secondary currents
offered to the devices via the current transformers contain measuring fault originating from the measuring
fault of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices themselves. Even transmission faults
such as signal jitter can cause measurand deviations.
All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the currents processed in the devices is
not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. A special method of Adaptive
self-stabilization is applied in this context to ensure the highest possible sensitivity of the differential protec-
tion. The function calculates a restraint current Irest for this purpose.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 387
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, each device calculates the current-
transformer error on an adaptive basis. This value results from an estimated calculation of the possible local
transformer errors based on the data of the local current transformers and the magnitude of the locally meas-
ured currents.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The basis for this are the transformer data of the connected current transformers that must be entered individ-
ually for each device. Since each device transmits its estimated faults to the other devices in the device combi-
nation, each device is able to determine the sum of possible faults and use them for stabilization.
388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
uses the rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the
permissible range (±20 %), the stabilization is automatically increased correspondingly. As soon as the
frequency has been determined (100 ms max. after applying a usable measurand), the stabilization is
decreased again. In practice, this has an effect if no measurand is available in the range to be protected before
the occurrence of a short-circuit, for example when switching a line with line-side voltage transformers onto a
fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at that time, the stabilization is increased at first until the actual
frequency is determined. This can lead to a tripping delay, but only at the pickup threshold, for example, in the
case of very low-current faults.
• The I-DIFF fast 2 stage works in parallel with the I-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.
• The I-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the I-DIFF fast
2 stage. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If the I-DIFF fast stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the current measuring point.
The I-DIFF fast stage also works in parallel with the I-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
Inrush-Current Detection
If the protection range extends beyond a transformer, a high inrush current, which flows into the protection
range but does not leave it again, has to be expected when connecting the transformer. The inrush current
can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content of 2. harmonic
(twice the rated frequency), which is missing almost completely in the case of a short circuit.
The algorithm of the Line differential protection recognizes the inrush currents. Temporarily, the adaptive
stabilization function provides an elevated restraint current, preventing any false tripping.
If the Inrush-current detection function is present in the device, inrush currents are detected correctly. For
this, the function block Inrush detect. from the DIGSI 5 function library must be instantiated and enabled.
High inrush currents can lead to an overfunction. The inrush-current detection prevents overfunction by
blocking the affected phases or all phases using the crossblock function.
Charging-Current Compensation
Distributed line or phase capacities cause a permanently capacitive charging current. This charging current has
to be taken into account by the pickup values of the differential-protection stages. In cables, this charging
current can reach considerable values. The charging-current compensation serves to improve the sensitivity so
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 389
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
that maximum sensitivity can be protected even at high charging currents. For this, the function block Ic-
compensat. from the function library must be instantiated and enabled.
Remote Tripping
Additionally to the measured values, the Line differential protection function transfers the locally generated
operate indication to the Line differential protection functions of the remote devices in the device combina-
tion. The remote devices also generate an operate indication if the local Line differential protection has not
yet generated an operate indication. This can occur under pickup conditions at the pickup threshold (see
6.2.2 Structure of the Function ).
Emergency Mode
NOTE
i When the protection device is in emergency mode, the Line differential protection function does not
work.
If the Line differential protection is the main protection function in the protection device, the Line differen-
tial protection can activate the emergency mode of the device. The emergency mode is activated if one of the
following conditions is met:
• Protection-interface communication is disturbed
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.
If emergency mode is active, the Overcurrent protection function can work as an emergency function, for
example.
If the Line differential protection and Distance protection are instantiated simultaneously, you can set the
distance protection zones in such a way that the blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled in case
of a line differential protection outage. The blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled if one of the
following conditions is met:
• Protection-interface communication is disturbed
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.
390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
• Line differential protection is in the test operating mode (_:2311:308) Test all devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 391
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
NOTE
i Keep the following hints in mind so that the line differential protection operates correctly on all line ends:
• Set the rated current of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current) to the same value at
both ends of the line.
The rated apparent power is internally calculated for both ends of the line and is displayed as the
write-protected parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power.
• If you have instantiated the Transformer function block in the line differential protection, set the
parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power to the same value at both ends. The rated
current is internally calculated for both ends of the line and is displayed as the write-protected param-
eter (_:9001:101) Rated current.
If the parameters Rated current and Rated apparent power are set in a different way in the devices
of the device combination, the Line differential protection does not operate correctly and the indication
Diff. Param. Err. is issued. You can find more information on this in chapter 3.6.3.9 Diagnostic
Measured Values of the Protection Interface.
NOTE
i To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer errors, the corresponding parame-
ters (_:8881:107) CT error changeover, (_:8881:108) CT error A, and (_:8881:109) CT
error B for the current measuring points must be taken into account in the power-system data. These
parameters are used exclusively by the Line differential protection function.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.
When using the parameter Supervision Idiff, you specify whether the line differential protection func-
tion operates with or without differential-current supervision.
Parameter Value Description
no The differential current is not monitored.
yes: reporting only The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
supervision threshold and a current jump is not present, the indication
Alarm: Idiff too high is issued after 1 s.
yes: block diff. prot. The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
supervision threshold and there is no current jump, the line differential
protection is blocked after 1 s and the indication Alarm: Idiff too
high is issued.
392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 393
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.7.1 Description
[loijump, 1, en_US]
394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo13idif-250512-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The I-DIFF stage is the sensitive stage of differential protection. The principle of the I-DIFF stage is comparison
of the current phasor. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occurrence
of a fault event. The I-DIFF fast 2 stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping in the
event of high-current faults.
The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Each device calculates an Idiff differential current from
the sum of the current phasors which are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 395
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current which the differential-protection system sees, ideally
that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging
current in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is
achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of the
protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults. This means
that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the differential-protec-
tion system.
Optional functions such as charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential and stabilization currents are calculated.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
In addition, for the switching of transformers and shunt reactors, the device features an Inrush-current detec-
tion function via which blocking of the affected phase of the differential protection is possible. You can find
more detailed information in chapter 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection.
Inrush-Current Detection
You can find the Inrush-current detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Line FG → Inrush
detect.. Add this functionality to the Line function group (under DIGSI 5 project tree →Name of the device
→ Settings →Line).
The parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. now also appears in the I-DIFF stage of the Line differ-
ential protection.
Fault Behavior
The Health indication is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection inter-
face are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is
set to Yes.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only I diff. and I
restr. . In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu → Measurements → Line x
→ Functional measured values → Line differential protection.
Detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating Manual.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 397
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
With the Threshold parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the I-DIFF stage. The total current flowing
into the protection range during a short circuit is decisive, that is, the total fault current, regardless of how it
divides among the ends of the protected object.
NOTE
6.2.7.3 Settings
398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 399
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.8.1 Description
[loijump, 1, en_US]
400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
NOTE
i If you want to use the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.
The differential-protection procedure of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage has been improved compared to the
procedure of the I-DIFF fast stage.
The new differential-protection procedure has the following properties:
• The lower limit of the setting range was reduced. As a result, the pickup threshold can be set with more
sensitivity.
• Improved behavior during faults with a change from external to internal faults
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 401
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Mode of Operation
The I-DIFF fast 2 stage is the differential-protection stage that is optimized for fast tripping times when
high-current faults occur. It is superimposed on the I-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed separately
for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instanta-
neous values. During this procedure, stabilization to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-trans-
former saturation), which can occur during external high-current faults, is not possible. For this reason, a deci-
sion for internal or external faults must be made before the potential saturation appears. It is assumed that
the current transformers do not yet go into saturation at least for 5 ms after fault inception.
If you use the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible in the measuring point Current 3-
phase with the CT saturation threshold parameter. For this, the CT saturation threshold must
be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers that limit the protection range, the I-DIFF fast 2
stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup due to transformer saturation is avoided. Normally, the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. In this way, the influence of charging currents and cross-
flow currents of transformers (fixed and transient) is suppressed.
Otherwise, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage works in the same way as the sensitive I-DIFF stage. Each device
calculates an Idiff differential current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which
are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. Its amount corresponds
to the fault current calculated by the differential-protection system, ideally that is the short-circuit current. In
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults. This
means that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the differential-
protection system.
The option of a transformer in the protection range is automatically considered when the differential and
stabilization currents are calculated. An activated charging-current compensation has no effect on the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage.
402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
The Health indication is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions ( broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection inter-
face are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is
set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 403
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
tion the arc-suppression coil. Since the arc-suppression coil has to compensate for approximately the total
capacitive ground-fault current, its approximate rated current can be taken as a basis. For transformers, set
Irated transf./Vk transf.
A final dynamic check of the pickup thresholds is performed during commissioning.
NOTE
6.2.8.3 Settings
404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.9.1 Description
[loijump, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 405
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo13idfs-250511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
NOTE
i Siemens recommends:
Use the I-DIFF fast stage only if you want to expand an existing line differential protection device
combination and you want to retain the existing protection procedure.
NOTE
i If you load an application template starting from the V07.50 platform into a device with the CP200 CPU
printed circuit board assembly, keep the following in mind:
• Starting with the V07.50 platform, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is preinstantiated in the Line differen-
tial protection function.
• The consistency check in DIGSI 5 reports an error for devices with the CP200 CPU printed circuit board
assembly.
• Replace the I-DIFF fast 2 stage with the I-DIFF fast stage.
406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The I-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the I-DIFF fast 2 stage.
In contrast to the differential-protection procedure of the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the procedure of the I-
DIFF fast stage requires a time of at least 5 ms free of saturation from the current transformer. Starting at a
certain current flow (> 2.5 · Irated, local measurement), the system immediately determines an external fault
and the I-DIFF fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the
protection range, the I-DIFF fast stage is blocked and unwanted tripping due to transformer saturation is
avoided.
6.2.9.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 407
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.10.1 Description
The Line differential protection function contains the remote tripping functionality.
Remote tripping forms an internal, phase-segregated operate indication through the OR operation of the
operate indications in the I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2 stages. This internal, phase-segregated operate indica-
tion is not available in the information routing in DIGSI 5, but instead, it is sent to the line differential protec-
tion functions in the remote devices in the device combination.
If a device receives a remote operate indication from a remote device, the remote tripping functionality
generates the (_:5551:57) Operate indication.
You can find the remote tripping indications in the DIGSI 5 information routing under Line →Line differen-
tial protection→ Remote tripping.
[loanregu-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[loausl13-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
6.2.11.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic
For some applications, it may be necessary to remove and log off the local Line differential protection from the
device combination of the line differential protection. These applications include, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System expansion
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 409
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the line differential protection with 3 devices.
Figure 6-23 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder
In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the line differential protection will no longer
function and will send an indication that it is ineffective.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in device 3. The Line differen-
tial protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder. During the log-off
process, device 3 checks whether the circuit breaker 3 is really open. If the Line differential protection is
logged off in device 3, this is saved in the remaining devices 1 and 2 and Kirchhoff's current law will then be
calculated only with the currents of the devices 1 and 2.
If device 3 is successfully logged off, you can switch it off. The logoff of device 3 is saved in the remaining
devices after it is switched off. If you switch device 3 back on, log on to the device combination again.
NOTE
i Before logging off, you must switch off the feeder protected by the local line differential protection.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Function logoff on (_:2311:507) or >Function logoff off
(_:2311:508)
410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The following conditions must be fulfilled before the function is logged off:
• The current flow at the circuit breaker must be stopped. You must switch off the feeder protected by the
local line differential protection.
The locally measured current of the logged-off line end no longer flows into the sum of the currents. The
function then only sums up the currents from the line ends that have not been logged off.
• The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker function group (CB) provides the circuit-
breaker condition via the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example, in case of a breaker-and-a-half
layout, then the CB state of the protected object must be determined with both circuit breakers. In this
case, the Circuit-breaker condition for the protected object function block performs the connection of
the individual CB conditions.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB state protected obj. internal signal is in the
Open state:
– All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
– The >Disconnector open input is active.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected
Object.
• Monitoring the communication topology in the device combination is only important if more than 2
devices are communicating via the protection interface. A function can only be logged off if this does not
disturb the communication between the remaining devices in the device combination.
The logged-off local line differential protection can also be activated for test purposes (see 10.4 Functional
Test of the Line Differential Protection). This has no influence or impact on the running protection interface
communication.
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you would like to use push-
buttons, switch on these push-buttons as shown in the following figure. With the push-button Key2, you log
off the function using; with the push-button Key1, you log the function on again.
[loexttx3-140311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-25 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 411
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Function logoff on as H (active with voltage)
and the binary input >Function logoff off as L (active without voltage). If the switch S is
closed, the function is logged off.
[loextsx4-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
Indications
The logged-off function reports the status (Function logged off) and the cause of the logoff.
If you have logged off the function via binary inputs, the indication Logged off via BI is issued.
If you have logged off the function via on-site operation, DIGSI 5, or the protection interface, the indication
Logged off via control is issued.
6.2.13.1 Description
If you would like any transformer (two-winding transformer or multi-winding transformer) to be taken into
account in the line formation, you must instantiate the optional function block Transformer from the Global
DIGSI 5 library in the Line differential protection function. You can find the Transformer function block in
the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG Line→ Line differential protection→ Function extensions.
Enter the rated data of the transformer under FG Line→ General→ Rated values. The rated values affect the
magnitude and phase of the differential current to be calculated. All measurands can be based on the rated
data for the power transformer.
Additionally, the respective vector groups for current and voltage and the type of grounding of the trans-
former neutral point have to be entered.
NOTE
i Make sure that you enter the same value for the rated apparent power in each device on a transformer
side. If the values are different, the Line differential protection function does not work.
In general, select the rated voltage of the winding facing the respective device. However, if a winding has a
voltage regulating range, do not use the rated voltage of the winding, but rather the voltage which corre-
sponds to the average current of the control area. This minimizes fault currents resulting from control.
412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
EXAMPLE:
Transformer with the data
Vector group YNd5
Rated apparent power Srated 35 MVA
Ratio TV 110 kV/25 kV
Control Y-side regulated ±10 %
Protection Settings
For verification purposes, the internally calculated rated current will be displayed as a write-protected param-
eter.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
EXAMPLE:
For a transformer with the vector group Yy6d5, set the Current vector group nb. parameter as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 413
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[logfpaus-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i If the elimination of the residual current is active, and in case of ground faults, the differential protection
becomes less sensitive by a factor of 1/3:
You achieve a higher degree of sensitivity only by measuring the current that flows through the neutral-
point grounding of the transformer. This requires the installation of a current transformer in the neutral-
point supply of the transformer, whereby its measured current can be captured by a 1-phase current input
configured on the device.
6.2.13.3 Settings
414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.14.1 Description
[loladeko-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The optional FB Ic-compensat. is available for charging-current compensation. The FB lc-compensat. is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage I-DIFF and increases the sensitivity of the I-DIFF stage even with
high capacitive charging currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 415
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The charging current is caused by the capacitances of the overhead line or the cable and flows through the
ground capacitance of the line. Due to the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase capacitances, charging
currents are flowing even in correct operation, which cause a difference of the currents at the ends of the
protection range. In cables or long lines, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable values. If the
feeder-side transformer voltages are connected to the devices, the influence of the capacitive charging
currents can be compensated for by calculation. The charging-current compensation specifies the actual
charging current. If there are lines with 2 ends, each device performs half the charging-current compensation.
When using M devices, each device assumes the M-th part .
[dwladko2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Charging-Current Compensation for a Line with 2 Ends (1-Phase System)
For correct operation, stationary charging currents can be regarded as almost constant since they only depend
on the voltage and line capacitances. If you are working without charging-current compensation, take into
account the charging currents in the pickup value of the I-DIFF stage. With charging-current compensation,
this does not have to be taken into account here. With charging-current compensation, the stationary magnet-
izing currents are considered before quadrature-axis reactances. For transient inrush currents, the devices are
provided with separate inrush-current detection.
NOTE
i If you wish to work with the charging-current compensation, consider the following:
• The local voltage transformers must be connected!
• Monitor the voltage with the Measuring-voltage failure detection function. If the Measuring-
voltage failure detection is not present in the Line function group, add the function to the Line func-
tion group from the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You can find the Measuring-voltage failure detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG
Line → Supervision of secondary system → Mes.v.fail.det.
If a transformer or common-mode reactors are located in the line section to be protected, charging-current
compensation must not be activated!
416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Parameters Description
(_:9001:102) Rated Rated voltage of the line
voltage Capacitance per unit length of the line
(_:9001:112) C1 per
length unit Reactance per unit length of the line
(_:9001:148) C0 per Residual compensation factors
length unit
(_:9001:113) X per
length unit
(_:9001:104) Kr
You can find the parameters in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line →
(_:9001:105) Kx
General.
(_:9001:118) K0
(_:9001:150) Angle (K0)
(_:102) Total line Overall length of the line as a parameter of the charging-current compensa-
length tion
You can find the parameter in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line → Line
diff. prot. in the FB Ic-compensat..
For verification purposes, the rated charging current is displayed as a write-protected parameter in the func-
tion block Ic-compensat. ((_:110) Rated charging current).
In the following cases, no charging current can be calculated:
• The voltages are not connected.
• The voltages are connected, but the internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
or Measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
If one of the 2 cases occurs, the charging-current compensation remains responsible for the line; however, it
must return to the conventional stabilization method (see parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated).
NOTE
i Before switching off the charging-current compensation with the parameter Mode, you must increase the
Threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2 to 3 times Ic-rated of the line distance portion. Otherwise, undesired
tripping might occur.
NOTE
i You must enter additional line parameters for charging-current compensation. These include the following
parameters:
• The Rated frequency
• The Rated voltage of the line
• Capacitance per unit length of the line (C1 per length unit, C0 per length unit)
Parameter: Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 417
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
With the Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated parameter, you set the stabilization charging current/rated current
ratio. The setting value of the parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated increases the stabilization of the I-
DIFF stage by an additional component (stabilization charging current).
EXAMPLE:
In case of an outage or lack of voltages, the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage is to be increased to 2.5 times Ic-
rated. The threshold of the I-DIFF stage is set to 1 ⋅ Ic-rated.
If you want to increase the threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2.5 times, set the parameter Ic-stabiliza-
tion/Ic-rated = 1.5.
In case of an outage of lack of voltages, both setting values are added to 2.5.
Since the charging current of the device must only be considered for the respective portion of the line, each
device will in fact increase its normal stabilization by a value of Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated divided by
the number of devices.
6.2.14.3 Settings
418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
• Detects short circuits that lie between the current transformers and the feeder disconnector switch QB.
[dwstubap-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 419
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwstubeb-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The Stub-differential protection function is composed of the stages S-DIFF and S-DIFF fast 2. Both will
also be referred to in the following sections as function blocks. Both stages work in parallel and ensure high
sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. A release binary input (>Release func-
tion) switches the stub-differential protection to active. This binary input reports the position as open to the
feeder disconnector switch. The output signals of these stages are pickup and operate signals, which are
routed to the output logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.
Overall Logic
420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of differential protection rests on the precondition that, during an uninterrupted operation,
the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equal 0. Secondary currents detected by the device
are tainted with measuring errors that are caused by the transmission behavior of the current transformer and
the input circuits of the device. All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the
currents processed in the devices is not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influ-
ences. A special method of adaptive self-stabilization is used in this context to ensure the highest possible
sensitivity of the differential protection.
The stabilization variable Irest is calculated from the sum of the potential faults:
Irest = Threshold + Σ(current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal fault (shaded area in Figure 6-33). With the adaptive approach it is no longer necessary to
assign parameters for a characteristic curve.
[dwanstub-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, an adaptive self-stabilization value
Ifault is calculated for each measuring point. This is the result of the sum of all current-transformer errors,
which in turn are the result of the current-transformer data and the degree of currents measured on the trans-
former.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 421
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The set parameters of the transformer data apply to the configured current inputs on the device.
• The S-DIFF fast 2 stage works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.
• The S-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the S-DIFF fast
2 stage. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If the S-DIFF fast stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the current measuring point.
The S-DIFF fast stage also works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables trip-
ping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.4.1 Description
Mode of Operation
The S-DIFF stage is the sensitive stage of the stub-differential protection. It is based on the principle of
current phasor calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occur-
rence of a fault event. The S-DIFF fast 2 stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping
in the event of high-current errors.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 423
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
All measurands are evaluated separately for each phase. The device calculates a differential current from the
sum of the current phasors on the measuring inputs. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault
current, which is detected by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents of the current
transformer of the protected object.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions (broken-wire detection , fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object (_:8401:53) Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is
constantly monitored. If persistent faults are detected, (_:8401:53) Health is set to Alarm and (_:
8401:54) Inactive is set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 425
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.5.1 Description
NOTE
i If you want to use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.
426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Method of Operation
The S-DIFF fast 2 stage is optimized for fast operate times during high-current faults. It is superimposed
on the S-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current
faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabilization
to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-transformer saturation), which may occur during high-
current external faults, is not possible. For this reason, a decision for internal or external faults must be made
before the potential saturation occurs. It is assumed that the current transformers do not yet go into satura-
tion at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault inception.
If you use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible with the CT saturation
threshold parameter in the measuring point Current 3-phase. With this, the CT saturation
threshold must be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting
value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the protection range, the S-DIFF fast 2
stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup due to transformer saturation is avoided.
Normally, the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. Otherwise, the S-DIFF fast 2
stage works in the same way as the sensitive S-DIFF stage. Each device calculates a differential current for
each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at each end of the
protected object. The value of the differential current corresponds to the fault current, which the differential-
protection system sees. Ideally, that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corre-
sponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the presently flowing currents on each end
of the protected object.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 427
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection ,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault. The validity of the used currents is monitored continuously.
If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
6.3.5.3 Settings
428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 429
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.6.1 Description
[lostubi2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The S-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If you want to use the S-DIFF fast stage, you must delete the preinstantiated S-DIFF fast 2 stage first.
After this, you can instantiate S-DIFF fast.
If you use the S-DIFF fast stage, the Saturat. det. block is not available in the measuring point
Current.
You can find the description of the S-DIFF fast 2 in chapter 6.3.5 Stage S-DIFF Fast 2.
430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Parameter: Threshold
6.3.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 431
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Output Logic
[lostubag-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
• Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.
• Adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in
the event of external ground faults.
The Restricted ground-fault protection function is used in the Transformer side or Auto transformer
protection function group. Furthermore, you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto trans-
former or also in the Standard UI function. The function depends upon application in the corresponding appli-
cation template preconfigured by the manufacturer or can be copied during the engineering into the corre-
sponding function group.
The Restricted ground-fault protection function is stepless.
[dwstrupt-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 433
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[loreffkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The protection function processes the neutral-point current I0* (exactly 3I0) and the calculated zero-sequence
current I0** (exactly 3I0) from the phase currents (see following figure). The protection range extends exclu-
sively over the transformer winding, including current transformer. The amount-adapted (compensated)
currents are described by the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side.
In case of an internal ground fault, the residual currents flow to the fault location. With an external ground
fault, the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of current flow
serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.
434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In accordance with the logic diagram, Figure 6-42 the protection function consists of 3 parts:
NOTE
i The following calculation applies to the configurations with a current transformer for the side. In a special
case of several current transformers per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be performed in
greater detail.
I0* = km · 3I0'
I0** = km · 3I0'' → 3I0'' = IA + IB + IC
with km = IN,transformer/IN,side
IDiff,REF = |I0* + I0**|
IRest,REF = |I0*| + |IA| + |IB| + |IC|
where:
3I0' Measured zero-sequence current at neutral point
3I0'' Zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents
km Factor for magnitude adaptation
Irated,transformer Primary transformer rated current
Irated,side Primary rated current of the transformer side
IDiff,REF Differential current
IRest,REF Restraint current
Using the calculated restraint current, a current Ichar. curve which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve (Figure 6-44). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in the
event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the protec-
tion function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here, the set Threshold of the operate curve is delivered independent of the restraint
current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 435
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dwstabke-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwautraf-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this case, the neutral-point current calculates as sum of the phase currents of the ground side:
I0* = km · 3I0' → 3I0' = Ignd,A + Ignd,B + Ignd, C
with km = IN,transformer/IN,side
436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i If both 1-phase neutral point and 3-phase ground side are connected, only the 1-phase neutral point is
used by the restricted ground-fault protection. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.
Pickup
If the IDiff,REF calculated differential current exceeds the calculated current Ichar. (see Figure 6-42), pickup occurs
and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.
Operate Curve
The operate curve represented in the following figure consists of 2 parts. In the right part of the characteristic
curve, you will find a case of an internal ground fault. Under ideal conditions, the angle between the two
residual currents (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 0. With current-transformer saturation, angle errors can result. The right
part of the characteristic curve is valid for angles ≤ 90°. The tripping current is the current flowing at the
neutral point (I0*). It is compared to the set or increased threshold value.
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle between l0* and I0** at |I0*| = |I0**| (180° =
External Fault)
In case of an external ground fault, the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents reverses by
180°. The phase angle between the residual currents thus (∠(I0*, I0**)) equals 180°. They are located in the
left part of the operate curve and recognize a clearly increased pickup value. Angle deviations of 180° are
caused by transformer saturation in conjunction with external short-circuits.
The current IAngle,REF for the Angle Decision is determined from the following subtraction and summation:
IAngle,REF = |I0* - I0**| - |I0* + I0**|
The resulting current IAngle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle = 0°), a current results that has a negative sign. If angle errors occur, the
sign remains negative. The amount of the current decreases.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 437
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
In an external short circuit (180°), the current becomes positive. At a smaller angle (<180°) due to transformer
saturation, the angle remains positive. The amount also decreases.
[dwwinken-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current I0* must reach the value IREF,off. The characteristic curve in the
left part of the figure can be determined from the following relationship:
IREF,off = Ichar + k · IAngle,REF
where:
Ichar. curve Pickup value resulting from the pickup value increase
k Factor (permanently set to 4.05657. With this value, the limit angle at |I0*| = |I0**| is
precisely 100°. No tripping is possible from this angle on.)
NOTE
The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (IRest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents of
the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is necessary.
This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted residual currents. The residual currents
of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are meant here.
438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dwfehler-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You will find the measured values for the Restricted ground-fault protection under the following device
menu entries:
• Main menu → Measurements → function → Function values → 87N REF
NOTE
i The following conditions must be observed when setting the threshold values:
Threshold value ≥ max {0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
Threshold value ≤ min {2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current. 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
If otherwise, it could happen that there is chattering of the pickup indication, the minimum threshold limit
is lifted. The maximum limit on the other hand is corrected downward, if the exceeding current otherwise
through the magnitude scaling must be so large, that it would already be outside of the measuring range
of the transformer.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition, a setting is prevented outside of
these limits.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 439
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
In the following, typical applications are described for the restricted ground-fault protection.
[dwanster-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure show the structural division of the function. The restricted ground-fault protection gets
its measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group.
The neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer
side function group. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of the restricted
ground-fault protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a rotation of the
polarity (phase rotation by 180°) is also done in the Transformer neutral point function group.
NOTE
i The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason, the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180° in comparison to SIPROTEC 4.
[dw2wtyde-201112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
or
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-53. The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (IDiff,REF = |IY + IA + IB + IC| = | -I4 - I3|) results, according to the refer-
ence arrow definition for the restricted ground-fault protection (positive to the protected object) with an
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 441
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = |I4 – I3| = 0.
NOTE
i If the neutral-point current is included in the protection function (zero-sequence current correction), this
rotation also has an effect for the differential protection.
[dwstwnas-281112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is done as follows:
[scedsall-200214-01, 1, en_US]
The point in Figure 6-53 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time, the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-53, the setting must be yes.
• Default setting (_:115) terminal 1,3,5,7 in dir.obj.= yes
442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via the
delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.
NOTE
i For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and linearly with the voltage.
The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault location. The fault
current curve IF1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has
sensitivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current IF2 is sufficiently
large. There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to
sensitive.
[dwf1pole-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault
[foschwe1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-49:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 443
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[foschwe2-041012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fostbref-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwsteiga-221012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-48), Siemens recommends using the
value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum trans-
former rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, breaker-and-a-half layout), Siemens
recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong a stabili-
zation. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold value. The
slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).
444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dwsptran-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-57 Activation and Application Example of an Auto Transformer (500 MVA: 400 kV, 230 kV;
125 MVA: 34.5 kV)
Use the highest side rated current with the auto transformer for normalization. In the example (Figure 6-57),
the measuring point is M2 (230 kV side). For this side, a rated current of 500 MVA/(√(3) · 230 kV) = 1255 A
results. The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A. With this, you can estimate the minimum permissible
pickup value.
[foscwe01-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 445
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
To determine the Slope, the restraint current of both sides (400 kV and 230 kV) must be used. The rated
current is used as starting value for the gradient. Since side 2 (230 kV) is the reference side for the normaliza-
tion, the value of the 400 kV side must be adapted to this rated current. The adaptation factor results from the
inverse ratio (230 kV/400 kV). The following restraint current goes into the calculation:
[fostbrst-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwrefspa-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
To also capture faults in the resistance to ground, a current transformer must be installed at the neutral point
of the protected object (see Figure 6-58). The pickup values can be derived from the data in the example. As
side rated value, the following results:
140 MVA/(√3 · 20 kV) = 4042 A
The following threshold value results as lower limit:
446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[foschwe3-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fosteig1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe4-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The attainable protection range amounts to approx. 66.4 %. In order to capture ground faults near the neutral
point, it is also recommended to connect a sensitive ground current protection to the neutral point trans-
former. You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection.
NOTE
i Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral-point resistances, or the restricted
ground-fault protection can no longer be used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 447
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dwstrpkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe5-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault is in the middle of the winding, the minimum ground current will arise, as shown in Figure 6-59.
The driving voltage is:
VGnd min = Vrated,S2/(2 √3) = 34.5 kV/(2 √3) = 9.96 kV
The following minimum ground current results:
IGnd min = VGnd min/RGnd = 9.96 kV/19.05 Ω = 523 A
With reference to the side rated current, the relationship is:
IGnd min/Irated,S = 523 A/2343 A = 0.223
With a safety margin of 2, 0.223/2 = 0.1115 results. Select this value as threshold value (rounded: 0.12 I/
Irated,S).
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.12 I/Irated,S
As gradient, the following results:
448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[fosteig2-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwanquer-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foschwe6-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.4.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 449
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 451
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) function (ANSI 21/21 N):
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more ends in radial,
looped, or meshed systems,
The RMD function can be placed in function groups that provide voltage and current measured values as well
as line parameters.
The RMD function consists of the following blocks:
• General
• Ground-fault detection
• Direction determination
• Output logic
The RMD function is preconfigured with 4 zones. The zones are structured identically. In the function RMD, a
maximum of 16 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve and 16 zones with MHO characteristic curve can
be operated simultaneously.
452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwstrdisrmd, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The RMD function monitors the phase current. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current
thresh, the impedances of the 3 phase-to-phase loops and the positive-sequence loop (phase-to-phase-to-
phase) are calculated.
Ground-fault detection checks whether any ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault is detected, the impe-
dances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
The calculated impedance is assigned to the operate curve (quadrilateral characteristic curve) of the zones. For
long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the positive-sequence impedance is reflected in the operate
curve of the distance protection. For this case, a load cutout can be configured that eliminates unwanted
pickups due to overload. You can find the description of the settings in chapter 6.5.3 Application and Setting
Notes – General Settings.
For all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The adaptive loop selection determines which loops
are actually selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops
are not considered by the adaptive loop selection. You can find more detailed information in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection.
For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip
signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the
zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the phase-
to-ground measurement loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence voltage V0
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-62). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current
without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 453
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
Distance Zones
For each zone, an operate curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic
You can set the zones as basic or as advanced zone. With the parameter Advanced, you are provided
with additional settings in the zone. This allows you to adapt the zone better to the specific conditions.
You can find the description in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is analyzed additionally.
You can find the description of the direction determination in chapter 6.5.7 Direction Determination.
Output Logic
The output logic of the RMD function links the output information of the zones. The output logic forms the
accumulative pickup indications and operate indications of the function. You can find the description of the
output logic in chapter6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
In the General function block of the RMD function, you set the following parameters. The setting values are
valid for all zones in the distance protection.
454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent-
time protection functions, select this setting.
NOTE
i You see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 455
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i If you have set the parameter Zone settings = Basic in a zone, the zone works with the following
parameters of the function (from the function block General):
• (_:2311:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph)
Load Cutout
The load-cutout parameters are only visible if you set the parameter (_:2311:106) Use load cutout =
forward only, reverse only or both directions.
You set the load cutout using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:2311:107) R load cutout = 2.500 Ω
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Angle load cutout = 45.0°
The load cutout applies only for the positive-sequence loops (phase-phase-phase-loop).
In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance zone. The zone
may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific application, calculate the
smallest load impedance and the greatest load-impedance angle under heavy load (see the following
example).
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-63 The Load Cutout Acts only on the Positive-Sequence Loop
The R value should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
EXAMPLE
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅108.9 Ω = 98 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅11.9 Ω = 10.7 Ω
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameter Angle load cutout) greater (approx. 5°) than the
maximum occurring rotor angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos φ).
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load cos φ = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting instructions in the example application beginning in chapter 6.5.11.1 Over-
view.
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 457
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
6.5.4 Settings
458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
In systems with effective or impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
With the distance protection with reactance method (RMD), 7 line loops are calculated (3 ph-gnd loops, 3 ph-
ph loops, 1 positive-sequence loop). Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-circuited lines also
influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-circuit current in line
A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B, C-A, and A-B-C. The ground current is also
measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called apparent impedances
occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop.
For double phase-to-ground faults, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pickup in the associated phase-to-phase loop.
With a symmetrical load and 3-phase short circuits, the positive-sequence loop (phase-phase-phase-loop) is
evaluated. In this case, the pickup is reported via the 3 phase-to-phase-loops. If a ground fault is detected, the
phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. The following table shows the different criteria and their properties:
Criterion Property
Current level The criterion is based on the assumption that the current in the short-
circuited loops increases in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the current
RMS value to the rated current provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Voltage level The criterion is based on the assumption that the voltage in the short-
circuited loops collapses in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the voltage
RMS value to the rated voltage provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Delta current level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the current are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
• Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
• Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
• Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 459
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Criterion Property
Delta voltage level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the voltages are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
• Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
• Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
• Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
Impedance The criterion calculates impedances for all short-circuit loops. The ratio of
the lowest impedance value to the individually calculated loop impedance
provides information on the type of the short circuit.
Symmetrical components The criterion is based on the symmetrical components. The ratio between
zero, negative and positive-sequence indicator provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
Jump detection The criterion is a logical criterion that has current and voltage jumps as input
variables. A conclusion about the type of the short circuit is drawn on the
basis of the logical operation of the existing current and voltage jumps.
Checking the loops with the adaptive loop selection ensures selectivity in a reliable way. The loop selected by
the criteria leads to a pickup only when the loop impedance is within the pickup range.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. The direction of the
short circuit is determined using different methods. The methods are processed and weighted at the same
time. The following table shows the different input variables of the methods and their properties:
Input Variables for Direction Feature
Determination
Current, actual short-circuit This method determines the ratio between the instantaneous voltage
voltage phasor and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selec-
tive.
Saved, actual short-circuit The method determines the ratio between the saved voltage phasor and the
voltage instantaneous current phasor. The voltage phasor adapted to the instanta-
neous phase position is used.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. It is the preferred application for series-compensated systems. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 461
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-65.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
• Power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve (forwards) has a reserve distance to the limits of the 1st
quadrant in the R-X diagram:
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. The entire tripping range applies to it.
462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 463
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-67 Voltage Drop for a Short Circuit behind a Series Capacitor
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. In this case as well, however, direction measure-
ment is correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-68a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus, depending on the
source impedance and the load conditions before the occurrence of the fault, the peaks of the direction-char-
acteristic curves appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direc-
tion (see Figure 6-68b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction (see
Figure 6-68c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
6.5.8.1 Description
[lopolydisrmd, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Zone Setting = Basic)
(1) If the Zone settings = Advanced, set the parameters represented in the General FB directly in the
zone!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 465
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the reactance (X) and the fault resistance (RF) from the current and voltage measured
values.
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parametersX reach, RF (ph-ph), RF (ph-g), and the inclination
angles Delta Dist. charact. angle and Line angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwklpolygon-DisRM, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 467
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
A fault with fault resistance is assumed. In addition to the actual mZL line impedance, the loop impedance
measured also contains the RF fault resistance.
The fault current IF is supplied from both sides. With the classical impedance measurement, the proportional
fault current IB from the opposite end generates a measuring error in the protection device on side A. This
measuring error depends on the preload on the line. The preload causes a phase displacement of the voltages
VA and VB. The following figure shows the effect of this phase displacement on the measured impedance:
[dw_merr_underreach_rmd, 1, en_US]
In Figure 6-73, as a result of an additional voltage drop, the measuring error resulting from supplying the
opposite end B is represented as IB/IA ⋅ RF. This voltage drop is represented as measuring error Δ X in the reac-
tance.
To avoid the measuring error, the distance protection with reactance method (RMD) works with an equivalent
current (I Subst.) that compensates the influence of RF in the measuring loop.
468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.
You can select the equivalent current I Subst. in such a manner that the influence of the fault current IB is
compensated at the fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in R can be compensated only partially.
RF is calculated as follows:
IF cannot be measured by the protection device. For this reason, 3I0 is used as a substitute.
The 2 possible equivalent currents 3I2 and 3I0 achieve a perfect result only with equal impedance angles. If
the impedance angles are not equal, you can compensate the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network condition and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 469
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The relatively smaller compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero and negative-sequence
system) is more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance
at the fault location.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in B for example, the loops A-B and B-C are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current must be applied to the device for this purpose.
The loop equation in this case is as follows:
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The factor k 0M is a line constant that results from the geometry
of the double circuit line and the suitability of the grounding.
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Without parallel-line compensation, in most cases, the ground current of the parallel line leads to a move-back
of the breakdown point (the distance measurement falls short, that is, the impedance is too large). If both
lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-76), overreach
can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-76, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is used only if the ground current of the parallel line is less than that
of the end's own line. In the example Figure 6-76, IGnd is greater than IgndP: Compensation occurs at installa-
tion position I by coupling ZM · gndP; for installation point II, there is no compensation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 471
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Parameter: X reach
472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Note:
If Zone settings = Basic, the following parameters from the function
group Line apply to the zone:
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
Advanced If this setting is selected, the following parameters apply per zone:
• RF (ph-g)
• RF (ph-ph)
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
• Delta Dist. charact. angle
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
If you want one of the previously mentioned parameters to be zone-
specific, set parameter Zone settings = Advanced.
Mixed systems with overhead line and cable sections represent one possible
application. Here, you can set the parameter K0 precisely to the tipping limit
of the zone.
Parameter: RF (ph-g)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 473
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrfmale-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If using a two-sided infeed, the infeed ratios must be considered. Calculate the setting value for the RF (ph-
g) parameter as follows:
where:
IB/IA Ratio of ground circuit current from opposite end to its own end
RF arc, ph-gnd Maximum arc portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
RF tower grounding Maximum tower grounding portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
Factor = 1.2 When using this factor, you obtain a safety reserve of 20 %.
Parameter: RF (ph-ph)
[dwrfmall-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence and negative-sequence system) is
more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance at the fault
location.
EXAMPLE:
Calculation of the Compensation Angle
[dwkomprm-300413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
where:
ZS, A Infeed impedance, side A
ZS, B Infeed impedance, side B
ZL Line impedance
m Zone reach
If the set compensation value matches network conditions during a fault, the fault reactance is not affected by
the load current, the fault resistance, or any other factors. The measurement compensates for the load
current.
If necessary, a change in the infeed impedance maybe considered by adapting the compensation angle. To do
this, set the compensation angle for supporting zones (Zone 1) smaller than that calculated, or negative if
necessary. The effective range X then tends to tilt downward (see Figure 6-77) and thus increases protection
against overreaching.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 475
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Set the compensation angle for all overreaching zones larger than that calculated. This will tilt the effective
range X upward and improve the tendency for underreaching.
[dwreikom-050613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwneipol-050613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Example of an Additional Slope for the Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve
Siemens recommends to incline the quadrilateral characteristic curve (angle φPole) parallel to the straight line
(angle φLine). For this particular case, maintain the default setting φΔ = 0°.
If you would like to set the slope of the quadrilateral characteristic curve to be different than that of the slope
of the straight line, proceed as shown in the following example:
EXAMPLE:
Line angle φLine= 60°
Requirement: Quadrilateral characteristic curve in 90° - angle to R-axis
Calculation:
φPol = φLine+ φΔ
90° = 60° + φΔ
φΔ = 30°
Result: Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle to + 30°.
Parameter: Kr and Kx
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 477
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
You can find an example on how to calculate the parameters K0 and Angle (K0) from the line data in
chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
6.5.8.4 Settings
478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 479
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
6.5.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the polarization voltage from the current measured values
• Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the boundary case, ZF is on the periphery of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is
90° (Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is
less than 90°.
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-80 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve
With the Zr impedance reach parameter , you adjust the range of the zone. With the parameter Direc-
tional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward or reverse direction. In the reverse direc-
tion, the MHO characteristic curve is reflected across the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 481
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are
processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
short-circuit voltage by a rotation of 90°. The displacement of the lower peak is then identical to the displace-
ment for the memory polarization.
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 483
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-83 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
You can set the level of polarization for the memory- and cross-polarization separately. For phase-to-phase
loops, the RMS value of the buffered voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage can be missing. In this case, the
buffered voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and 2-
phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross-polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the current voltage and the corresponding healthy voltage and is calculated as
follows:
If the buffered voltage is not available, you can access cross-polarization. For the phase-to-phase loops, you
can set the evaluation of the voltage with the factor kcross.
NOTE
484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading-time increment.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 485
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.5.9.3 Settings
486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the overlapping indications of the distance protection.
General Pickup
With the impedance pickup, the group indication Pickup is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the
working area of a zone.
The signal Pickup is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions, for
example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and issued as group indications.
Trip Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
If the device is capable of 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-pole
pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indication.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 487
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
6.5.11.1 Overview
The distance protection clarifies 100 % of faults in a meshed system selectively.
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The RMD
function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resistances at high loads. If the electrical power
system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, the reach of the
distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compensates this influence via adjustable compen-
sation angles.
This example describes the use of the RMD function for the protection of a 380-kV overhead-transmission line.
For this example, the following is assumed:
• In the Line function group, the RMD function is selected.
• The distance protection works with load cutout.
NOTE
i If you wish to add new functions, take note that the visibility of individual parameters depends on the
configuration. Thus, first define the functions for your specific application and then enter the parameters
afterwards.
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with the line to be protected.
488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The following system data apply to the application example (primary values):
R1 [Ω] X1 [Ω] Angle Z1 [°] R0 [Ω] X0 [Ω] Angle Z0 [°]
Infeed A 2.363 22.487 84 1.534 14.596 84.00
Infeed B 15.635 33.530 65 14.001 25.761 61.48
Overhead line 2.384 25.6 84.68 13.112 82.432 80.96
(80 km)
In the application example, the infeed impedances with a large angle difference were selected in order to
emphasize the benefits of the reactance method (compensation angle). In most real applications, the angle
difference is too small so that you can use the default setting of 0° for the compensation angle.
The following table shows the time grading of the distance zones for the protection device at the installation
location A:
Zone Directional mode Reach X reach [Ω]
[% of the line length]
Zone 1 forward 80 % 20.48
Zone 2 forward 120 % 30.72
Zone 3 forward 150 % 38.4
Zone 4 reverse -50 % 12.8
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 489
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i For other applications, for example, mixed sections with cable and overhead line, you can overwrite the
residual compensation factors set here in the distance zones with local parameters.
The following tables show the parameters relevant for the application example in the Line function group:
Parameters Setting Value Description
(_:9001:108) Line 84.68° Positive-sequence system impedance angle
angle
(_:9001:104) Kr 1.58 Rgnd/Rph of the line
(_:9001:105) Kx 0.74 Xgnd/Xph of the line
Load Cutout
The parameters R load cutout and Angle load cutout define the load cutout. With the reactance
method, the load cutout is important only for 3-phase short circuits. The maximum operating current must be
known for calculation of the load-cutout parameters.
The following output data are assumed in the application example for calculating the load-cutout parameters:
Maximum operating current Iload, max = 2000 A
with an unfavorable power factor cosϕ = 0.9
Calculate the primary setting values for the parameter R load cutout and the Angle load cutout with
a safety margin of 10 % as follows:
490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Remote infeed (I remote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-88). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio I remote/I local.
You can obtain the effective tower-grounding resistance values in Figure 6-144 . In the example, the primary
effective tower-grounding resistances is 1.9 Ω. When calculating the setting value for RF (ph-g), consider
the infeed from the opposite end when calculating RTF as follows:
The ratio Iremote/Ilocal can only be calculated approximately using the reactance. For the calculation, a 1-phase
short circuit is assumed at the opposite end of the line. This is used to calculate the Iremote/Ilocal ratio as follows:
The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the fault loop is thus:
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground. The arc
length should be 7 m in the example. If you assume a double arc length, you consider the curvature of a
burning arc:
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 7 m = 35 kV
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 491
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current. With Ik min = 1,500 A, calculate Rarc as follows:
For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the parameter RF (ph-g) can be calculated as follows:
For the phase-to-phase fault, only the arc voltage must be considered. If you assume double the value for the
arc length and you use the same value for the minimum fault current, the value of 2 ⋅ 23.3 Ω calculated previ-
ously applies for the arc resistance. By adding a safety margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the
parameter RF (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows. For the parameter RF (ph-ph), half of the calculated
arc resistance is set.
Parameter: Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq.
For optimum results, the RMD function must know the phase angle of the current through the fault resis-
tance. As this current cannot be measured, the zero or negative-sequence current is used as equivalent
current for the estimation of the phase angle.
492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. For an accurate impedance measurement,
the phase angle of the fault current must at least be estimated. In the measurement, the phase angle of the
fault current IF is derived from the zero or negative-sequence current. In electrical power systems with inho-
mogeneous power infeeds, that is the power infeeds have great differences in the impedance angles, a
compensation angle can be used. In the example, the compensation angles for the zero and negative-
sequence systems are calculated with m = 80 % for the limits of zone Z1.
Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 493
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i The parameter (_:14191:11) 1-pole operate allowed is only visible in the device variants that can
trip in a 1-pole way!
Zone Z1
494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i If the zone should not work with the general parameters of the RMD function, set the parameter Zone
settings = Advanced.
Then, the respective zone works with the following zone-specific parameters (example for zone Z1):
• (_:14191:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:14191:131) RF (ph-ph)
• (_:14191:104) Kr
• (_:14191:105) Kx
Zone Z2
Zone Z3
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 495
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Zone Z4
Check the setting values on the basis of the following graphical representation of the operate curve:
496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[sc_KL_RMD_examble, 1, en_US]
6.5.12 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 497
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 499
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 501
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 503
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstg13p-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impedance is
assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic) of the zones.
In the Impedance pickup method, the load cutout is analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated after
assigning the calculated impedance to the operate curves. The direction to the short-circuit location is then
determined for all picked up loops. The loop selection determines the picked up loops for which the classifica-
tion into the defined zones is processed. The loop elimination removes all the loops that are no longer picked
up after direction determination and querying of the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the time delay in
the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone.
The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the
distance protection.
In the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup, the load cutout is set directly in
the zone and is evaluated for all zones.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Supervision of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Supervision of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-91). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero-sequence voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-
sequence impedance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases. The Ground-
fault detection parameter specifies which criterion is used to perform ground-fault detection.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 505
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detections.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
[loerdfeh-240511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of the phase currents
for exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
For long, highly loaded lines, high load currents can lead to overstabilization of the zero-sequence current
criterion (see Figure 6-92). For the detection of ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence
current criterion is extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to
negative-sequence current is also monitored. In a 1-pole short circuit, the negative-sequence current I2 is
about as high as the zero-sequence current I0. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence
current exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current
criterion is stabilized for high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic curve. Figure 6-93
shows the connection. A prerequisite for release of the zero-sequence/negative-sequence current criterion is a
minimum current of 0.2 ⋅ Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage is monitored for exceeding a set value (parameter V0> threshold value). The
dropout threshold is about 95 % of the pickup value. In grounded systems, monitoring of the zero-sequence
voltage can be used as an additional ground-fault criterion.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 507
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loerdawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-94 Ground-Fault Detection during 1-Pole Disconnection (Example: 1-Pole Pause A)
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following starting processes are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup
• V/I pickup
• V/I φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.9.1 Description)
• Quadrilateral characteristic curve with adaptive pickup (description begins in chapter 6.6.10 Zone with
Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup)
• Circular characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.12 Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Output Logic
The output logic of the function Distance protection for grounded systems links the output indications of
the zones and forms the group trip signal of the function. You can find the description of the output logic in
chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is indicated and the corresponding time delay starts.
After that time, the operate indication is generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see
section 6.53.1 Overview of Functions) is in effect can the blocking be set.
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance on the line to be protected:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 509
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If no extreme power-
system unbalance and unusually large current-transformer errors are expected, Siemens recommends keeping
the default value of 0.10.
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase
The Loop select. with ph-ph-g parameter is used to determine which loops will be analyzed by the
distance protection in the event of double ground faults. You can restrict the analysis to certain loops. If you
wish to restrict analysis to certain loops, they must have the same direction.
In two-end feed to a shared fault resistance to ground, the phase-to-ground loop of the leading phase tends to
overreach. If you set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase, these
loops will not be analyzed.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Loop select. with ph-
ph-g parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Evaluated Loop(s)
block leading phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-A
block lagging phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-gnd, C-A
all A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A
ph-ph only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-A
ph-gnd only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd
In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the internal fault
loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for this applica-
tion. To ensure the selectivity of protection, reduce the range of the underreaching zone.
NOTE
i You can see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 511
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
6.6.2.4 Settings
512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 513
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 515
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 517
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Trips 3-phase
518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The following figure shows the structural principles of the function Distance protection for isolated or reso-
nant-grounded systems.
[dwstriso-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. The impedance is calculated for the released loops. The calculated impedance is assigned
to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic 16) of the zones. In the Impedance pickup
method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For all picked up loops,
the direction to the short-circuit location is then determined. The loop selection determines for which of the
picked up loops assignment in the defined zones is done. The loop elimination removes all loops that are no
longer picked up after direction determination and querying the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the time
delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for
the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip
signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
• Monitoring of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
16 in preparation
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 519
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
stub-end feeder. If phase-to-phase voltages are unbalanced, a double ground fault can be assumed. In that
case, pickup is released immediately. The balance criterion prevents unwanted pickup for a simple ground
fault or unbalanced load conditions (see Figure 6-96). The Max. unbalance Vph-ph parameter specifies
the maximum permitted unbalance for the load case, or in the event of a simple ground fault.
[losymerk-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-97 shows the logic of the ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.
If the following conditions are met, the ground-fault detection responds for double ground faults with very
low ground currents:
• The zero-sequence current is 10 % of the measured negative-sequence current I2
• The zero-sequence current is at least 5 % of the secondary rated current
[loisolie-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents due to unbalanced load conditions
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For long lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion (see Figure 6-98).
For the detection of double ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current criterion is
extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence
current is also monitored. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence current exceeds a preset
limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is stabilized for
high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-99 shows the connection. A prereq-
uisite for release of the zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is a minimum current of
0.2· Irated for 3I0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 521
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following pickup methods are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup
• V-/I pickup
• V-/I-φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance phasors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic (preconfigured)
• MHO characteristic curve
You can find the description of operate curves in the chapters 6.6.9.1 Description and 6.6.11.1 Description.
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
not an immediate danger. In the entire galvanically connected system, the voltage of the phase affected by
the ground fault is approximately 0 V. Thus each load current gives an impedance of approximately 0 Ω. The
distance protection may not respond in this case. A 1-phase phase-to-ground pickup without ground-current
pickup is thus prevented.
[dwerdslu-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a ground fault occurs, a significant starting current can flow in an extended resonant-grounded system. This
can result in a pickup of the ground-current pickup. Special measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
pickups when a ground fault occurs.
Specify a uniform double ground-fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which
fault will be switched off.
For a double ground fault in the isolated or resonant-grounded system, it is enough to switch off one base
point. The 2nd fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Specify a uniform double ground-fault
preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which fault will be switched off. The Phase
preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference. The following double ground-
fault preferences can be selected.
Setting for Parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph- Principle of Preference
g)
C(A) acyclical Acyclical C before A before B
A(C) acyclical Acyclical A before C before B
B(A) acyclical Acyclical B before A before C
A(B) acyclical Acyclical A before B before C
C(B) acyclical Acyclical C before B before A
B(C) acyclical Acyclical B before C before A
C(A) cyclical Cyclical C before A before B before C
A(C) cyclical Cyclical A before C before B before A
In the 8 preference cases, a ground fault will be switched off according to the preference program. The 2nd
fault remains as a simple ground fault in the system and can be detected using the Ground-fault detection
function.
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detec-
tion or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 523
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start.
After that time, the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see section 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
EXAMPLE:
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) on the line to be protected in
the following way:
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 525
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
If you wish to switch off both base points of a ground fault, set the parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph-
g) = all.
NOTE
i The following parameters will be visible only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.3.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 527
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 529
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 531
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop.
Different methods are implemented for direction determination. The function selects the most appropriate
method depending on the available input variables when a short circuit occurs.
The following factors during short-circuit occurrence influence, for example, the method selection:
• Existing measurands
• Existing storage capacities
532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 533
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-102.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
• Power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve (forwards) has a reserve distance to the limits of the 1st
quadrant in the R-X diagram:
[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. The entire tripping range applies to it.
534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
sponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after the short circuit occurs, the direction-charac-
teristic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For fault loca-
tion F1 (Figure 6-103a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the back-
ward direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer), there is
a consensus for forward (Figure 6-103b). If the current reverses, the orientation of the direction-characteristic
curve changes suddenly (Figure 6-103c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point
(current transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of I2. During load transport on
the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-104 Voltage Characteristic for a Short Circuit Upstream of a Series Capacitor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 535
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. But in this case as well, direction measurement is
correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-105a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus the peaks of the
direction-characteristic curves, depending on the source impedance and load conditions before occurrence of
the fault, appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direction
(Figure 6-105b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction
(Figure 6-105c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
6.6.5.1 Description
In impedance pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-
current thresh, the impedances between the phase-to-phase loops are calculated. If a ground fault is
detected, the impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
Impedance pickup includes the elimination of apparent impedance and – if activated – monitoring of the load
cutout.
Healthy Loops
In impedance pickup, all 6 line loops are calculated. Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-
circuited lines also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-
circuit current in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B and C-A. The ground
current is also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called "apparent
impedances" occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop. They are therefore of no significance for the zone selectivity of the protection.
536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
In addition to zone selectivity, phase selectivity is also important. Phase selectivity includes the identification
of the faulty phase, the generation of phase-selective indications, and the possibility of executing a 1-pole
automatic reclosing function (AREC). Depending on the infeed conditions, short circuits near the station may
have the result that the healthy loops see the short circuit at a greater distance, but they still see it within a
tripping area. This case leads to a disconnection without the option of a 1-pole AREC. The 3-pole disconnec-
tion of the line then results.
Inspecting the loops reliably assures zone and phase selectivity. Loops are inspected in 2 steps.
• From the calculated loop impedance and their partial impedances (phase or ground), a replication of the
line is first simulated.
Load Cutout
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the load impedance will be reflected in the operate curve of
the distance protection. For operate curves with high R segments, a load cutout can be configured that elimi-
nates unwanted pickups due to overload. The load cutout (see Figure 6-106 can be configured for phase-to-
phase loops and for phase-to-ground loops.
The parameters are explained in chapter 6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.
NOTE
i Note the following when adding a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup to
the function Distance protection for grounded systems:
• The parameters for the load cutout are no longer available in impedance pickup.
• You set the parameters for the load cutout directly in the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic
curve and adaptive pickup.
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:102) Use ph-g load cutout = Yes
• Default setting (_:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 20.000 Ω
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 537
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The values should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions
110 kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108.9 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 11.9 Ω
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameters Angle load cutout (ph-ph) and Angle load
cutout (ph-g) ) greater (approx. 5°) than the maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the
minimum power factor cos φ).
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load (cos φmax)min = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting notes in Example application high voltage overhead line in 6.6.15.5 Setup
Notes for Pickup Method
When, with double lines, 2 line systems are on a single tower, there is a significant coupling between the 2
line systems. In the event of a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, increased load currents and coupled
ground currents can cause a ground pickup. This pickup can be prevented by separate setting of the load
cutout for phase-to-ground loops.
During the 1-pole dead time on the parallel line, a significant ground current flows on the intact line. This
ground current is caused by the coupling in the zero-sequence system. The ground current during the 1-phase
pause on the parallel line must be taken into consideration when setting the R load cutout (ph-g)
parameter.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the load-cutout parameters for an application on a double circuit line
This example applies to a double line with zero-sequence system coupling of both line systems and 1-pole
tripping on one system in the double line.
The set values for the load cutout parameters are calculated for a 400-kV overhead line with the following
data:
220 km double line on one tower (zero system coupling of both line systems)
Maximum load current per line with both lines in operation:
Pmax = 1200 MVA
Imax = 1732 A
[fofr1bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 539
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
This calculated value applies to phase-to-phase loops. For double lines, the 1-pole dead time on the parallel
line must also be taken into consideration for phase-to-ground loops. During the 1-pole dead time, the load
current on the intact line increases. At the same time, a load current flows in the ground path on the parallel
line in the 1-pole dead time. Calculate the minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops with the load
current in the ground path. For the calculation in this example, this ground current is given as a value relative
to the load current Imax.
For the ratio of Ignd on the healthy line to Imax in the 1-phase pause on the parallel line, the following value is
assumed:
[fofx2bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The line length as well as the source impedance and line impedance have an influence on this ratio. If you
cannot determine the value using a system simulation, you can assume the following approximate values:
Long lines (about 200 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.4
Short lines (about 25 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.6
The minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops results in the following for the calculation example:
[fofr2bs2-270910-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values as the primary or secondary varia-
bles. Conversion into secondary values yields:
[fofr3bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofr4bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The opening angle of the load cutout, as in the first example for the single line, is calculated using the
minimum power factor.
6.6.5.3 Settings
540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.6.1 Description
Overcurrent pickup is a phase-specific pickup method which monitors the phase currents per phase. If a phase
current exceeds the set threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, a phase-selective pickup signal is output.
The phase-selective pickup signals are converted to loop information for the distance zones. If the network is
grounded, the loop selection for 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection depends on parameter Loops
with 1-ph. pickup. You will find more information on this in chapter 6.6.6.2 Application and Setting
Notes.
For more information about ground-fault detection in grounded systems, please refer to chapter 6.6.2.2 Struc-
ture of the Function.
If the network is not grounded, the selection of the 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection always
depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. If a ground fault is detected, it will be indicated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 541
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, the Loops with 1-ph.
pickup parameter will be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
• Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-B
• Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA → Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the zone will work
with the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E loop
will be selected.
542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay non-dir. pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay non-dir. pickup for the specific application.
6.6.6.3 Settings
6.6.7.1 Description
V/I pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have
exceeded the set threshold value Min. current thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being eval-
uated, both associated phase currents must exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-107 determine the slope of the V/I characteristic.
In systems without a grounded neutral point, a pickup is effectively suppressed with ground faults. You can
find more information on this in chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function, under section Ground-fault detec-
tion.
The following figure shows the V/I pickup characteristic:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 543
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[DwUIanreg-160813-01, 1, en_US]
The geometry of the V/I characteristic is determined by the parameters shown in the figure (dots).
The following table shows which voltage settings define the characteristic in Figure 6-107:
For high-current short-circuits, overcurrent pickup O/C threshold Iph>> is superimposed. If the phase
currents exceed the threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, pickup occurs regardless of the voltage. The
following table shows the measurands used by the pickup modules:
Pickup Module Voltage Current
A VA17 IA
B VB17 IB
C VC17 IC
A-B VAB18 IA
B-C VBC18 IB
C-A VCA18 IC
17 Phase-to-ground voltage
18 Phase-to-phase voltage
544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Pickup Programs
Pickup programs allow you to adapt to different system states. With the parameter Pickup program, you
control the measurand selection. For different fault types, you can determine whether the phase-to-phase
loops or phase-to-ground loops are the most important or whether the measurand selection depends on the
ground-fault detection. Thus, adaptation to system states is very flexible. The best possible control depends
significantly on the neutral-point grounding.
You can find more information on this in chapter 6.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 545
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 547
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.8.1 Description
V/I/ϕ pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
[DwUIPhia-160813-01, 1, en_US]
548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The basic structure of the V/I/ϕ characteristic is identical to that for V/I pickup with an additional, sensitive
angle-controlled characteristic (short-circuit region ϕ> in Figure 6-108). The sensitive characteristic (a-d-e) is
used if the fault impedance is close to the straight lines. In this way, it is still possible to differentiate reliably
between load and short-circuit conditions in cases where simple V/I pickup fails.
Possible applications include, for instance, protection of long lines or line segments with intermediate infeed
and low external impedance at the same time. In the event of a short circuit at the end of the line or in the
distance protection backup range, the local measured voltage is interrupted only briefly. In this case, the
phase angle between the current and voltage serves as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The angle-dependent region of the characteristic (hatched area in Figure 6-108) can be set for the forward
direction only (line direction) or both directions.
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must exceed
the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage and the phase angle between the current and voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-108 determine
the slope of the U/I-/ϕ characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I-/ϕ characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and network conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-108:
Setting When Evaluating Phase- Setting When Evaluating Phase-
to-Ground Voltages to-Phase Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iph> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>>
Iph>>
V(Iphi>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iphi>
Iphi>
The phase angle between the current and voltage is determined as follows:
• If you are evaluating phase-to-ground voltages, the phase angle is determined from the phase-to-ground
voltage and the associated phase current without consideration of the ground current. A requirement is
that the corresponding phase current must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
• If you are evaluating phase-to-phase voltages, the angle is determined from the phase-to-phase voltage
and the associated current difference. A requirement is that both phase currents and the definitive differ-
ential current for the loop must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
With the ϕ< and ϕ> parameters, you define the upper and lower limits of the short-circuit angle range (see
following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 549
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[DwUIphiK-160813-01, 1, en_US]
If the phase angle is greater than the limit angle ϕ> and less than the limit angle ϕ<, the sensitive V/I/ϕ charac-
teristic applies (a-d-e). Otherwise, the lower characteristic applies (a-b-c).
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 551
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/ϕ characteristic curve (parameter: O/C
threshold Iph>>).
Parameter: Iφ>
Parameter: φ>
Parameter: φ<
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.8.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 553
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lopoly13-230511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 555
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-111 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continued)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Impedance calculation from the measured current and voltage values
• Placement of the impedance into the zone
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parameters X reach, R (ph-ph), R (ph-g), and Zone-incli-
nation angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
[foflschl-160909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 557
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
(complex) measurands
(complex) line impedance
[folimped-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwllschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in A, for example, the loops A-B and C-A are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
[dwleschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The voltage VC-gnd, the phase current IC, and the ground current Ignd of the faulty loop are measured.
[fofeschl-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foreform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
and
558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[foxeform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
VC-gnd Short-circuit voltage phasor
IC Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
φV Phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
φph Phase angle of the short-circuit current (phase C)
φgnd Phase angle of the ground-fault current
The factors Kr = Rgnd/Rph and Kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
NOTE
i In the impedance calculation, the factors Kr and Kx are used for residual compensation. If you enter the
grounding resistance factors in the format k0 with Phi(k0), they are automatically converted into Kr and
Kx. Conversion is performed under consideration of the line angle. For this reason, pay attention to the
correct setting of the line angle in the general data of the Line function group (parameter (_:9001:108)
Line angle).
As long as one of the phases involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the auto-
matic reclosing, the phase-to-ground loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time in the
automatic reclosing in C, the C-gnd loop is blocked, for example. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor observes the state of the automatic reclosing and provides the
blocking signal.
[fofokpl1-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofokpl2-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios R0M/3Rph and X0M/3Xph are line constants that result
from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 559
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Without parallel-line compensation, the ground current of the parallel line typically results in the under-
reaching of the distance protection (the loop impedance seen by the distance protection appears to be larger).
If both lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-115),
overreach can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-115, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is only connected for those line ends where the ground current of
the parallel line is less than that of the end's own line. In example Figure 6-115, Ignd is greater than Ignd-P:
There is compensation in I in that ZM · Ignd-P is coupled in; in II there is no compensation.
560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.
Parameter: X reach
Parameter: R (ph-g)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 561
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Only if the Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes parameter in the zone is set, the residual compensation
factors set here will be valid and visible. If the parameter is set Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no, the
residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High-voltage over-
head-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .
NOTE
i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
NOTE
i For short lines with large R/X ratios, note the following during zone setting: The angle errors of the current
and voltage transformers cause a rotation of the impedance measured in the direction of the R axis. The
risk that external faults will be shifted into the first zone increases if, because of the settings for the
polygon, kr and kx, the loop range is large in the R direction in relation to the X direction for Zone 1. Use
the grading factor of 85 % only up to an R/X ratio ≤ 1 (loop range).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 563
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
For larger R/X settings, you can calculate a reduced grading factor for Zone 1 using the following formula:
STF Grading factor = range of Zone 1 relative to the line length
R Loop range in the direction R for Zone 1 = R1· (1 + kr)
X Loop range in the direction X for Zone 1 = X1· (1 + kx)
δU Angle error of the voltage transformer (typically 1°)
δI Angle error of the current transformer (typically 1°)
[fofdustf-060709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Alternatively or additionally, you can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to incline the polygon
of Zone 1 in the first quadrant. This also prevents overreach (see Figure 6-112).
6.6.9.4 Settings
564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.10.1 Description
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Zone
with quadrilateral characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.6.9.1 Description.
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You set the load cutout directly in the zone. The load cutout applies for all the additional zones in the
Distance protection for grounded systems function.
• The load cutout applies to both the phase-to-phase and the phase-to-ground loops.
• You can additionally limit the load cutout by user-specific minimum/maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the load cutout better to the load curve.
• The load-cutout settings are available as measured values R load cutout and Angle load cutout.
You can define multiple characteristic curves with different load cutouts and store them in different settings
groups. If you switch the settings group, you can adapt the load cutout in the operate curve of the Distance
protection quickly and flexibly to different load conditions. This increases the safety against erroneous
pickups due to overloads.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group
Switching.
Measured Values of the Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup
The measured values are prerouted to the operational and fault log. This supports fault analysis if the function
trips.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 565
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i If you insert a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup into the Distance
protection function, the load-cutout settings migrate from the impedance pickup into this zone.
If you delete this zone in the function, you must again set the load-cutout settings in the impedance
pickup.
In the impedance pickup, you can again set the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground loops.
NOTE
i If you set the load cutout in the Quadrilateral zone with adaptive pickup, the load cutout applies for all
zones, both for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-ground loops.
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
• Default setting (_:122) R load cutout = 25.000 Ω
• Default setting (_:123) Max. R load cutout = 600.000 Ω
566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
set the Max. Angle load cutout and Min. Angle load cutout parameters to the same value, the
parameter Angle load cutout cannot take on a different value.
6.6.10.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 567
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.11.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lomho13p-230511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 569
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-117 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve (Continued)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the polarization voltage from the measured current values
• Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In marginal cases, ZF is on the peak of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is 90°
(Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is less
than 90°.
570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve
The Zr impedance reach parameter is used to define the zone. Whether the zone works in a forward or
reverse direction is determined. In the reverse direction, the MHO characteristic curve is mirrored across the
coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a
distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is converted into phase-selective pickup indications.
The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are processed further in the output logic of the distance
protection and by external additional functions (for example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the
distance protection is described in Chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 571
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 573
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-121 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
[fofuspch-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
An evaluation (factor kpre) for the prefault voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-
phase loops. Memory polarization is only carried out when the RMS value of the corresponding buffer voltage
for phase-to-ground loops is greater than 40 % of the rated voltage (Vrated). For phase-to-phase loops, the RMS
value of the buffer voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For an evolving fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage may be missing. In this case, the
buffer voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-pole short circuits and 2-pole
short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization. This
voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross polarization). The polarization voltage VP
is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding external fault voltage. The following equation
shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:
[fofukrzp-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the buffer voltage is not available, then cross polarization can be used. An evaluation (factor kcross) for the
voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops.
574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters for the distance protection function.
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes parameter only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 575
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.11.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 577
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.12.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[locircle, 1, en_US]
578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-124 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Placement of the calculated impedance into the zone
• Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone
If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the circular characteristic curve of a distance zone and the
direction of the impedance phasor matches the directionality of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop informa-
tion is converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones
are processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
Base Circle
The operate curve of the zone is a centered impedance circle around the origin of the R-X coordinate system.
The base circle of the circular characteristic curve is defined by the parameter Zr impedance reach.
Since the circle cannot distinguish between positive impedance (forward direction) and negative impedance
(reverse direction), direction-characteristic curves delimit the operating zones to the desired quadrant.
You can find more detailed information regarding the direction determination in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
Figure 6-125 shows an example of the shape of the impedance circles. The circle for the first zone as a
forward-directed zone is shaded. The third zone is shown as a reverse-directed zone. Zone Z5 is non-direc-
tional.
The impedance circle is defined by its radius and it forms the local curve of constant impedance.
[fo_7sa6_fkt-beschr-Grundkreis, 1, en_US]
The radius thus determines the reach of a distance-protection zone in the R-X diagram and is independent of
the short-circuit angle φSC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 579
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kreis-charakteristik, 1, en_US]
580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_bsp-erhoehte-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]
The limit angle α can be set separately for each zone. If a zone is set in the reverse direction, the section of the
increased resistance reserve is mirrored at the coordinate origin.
The resistance reserve is increased according to the following equation
[fo_resist_up_circlezone, 1, en_US]
with
ZBreak Balance-point impedance = actual limit of the zone
Zr Set impedance (parameter Zr impedance reach) = radius of the base circle
α Set limit angle (parameter Angle for R-reserve) = angle below which the increased resis-
tance reserve takes effect
φsc Actual short-circuit angle = angle of the calculated short-circuit impedance
At the set limit angle α, the zone reach limit is therefore still on the impedance circle: because φsc = α, sin(α –
α) = 0, and thus ZBreak = Zr. If φsc is greater than the set limit angle α, then the impedance circle takes effect by
definition and the increase of the resistance reserve makes no sense and is ineffective. For smaller angles up
to -45°, the resistance reserve is increased by the expression sin(α – φsc), thus by sin(α) at φsc = 0°.
Load Range
If the impedance circle is used as an implicit pickup method, there is a danger on long, heavily loaded lines
that the load impedance may extend into the operate curves of the distance protection. To avoid faulty
pickups of the distance protection in case of high power transmission, you can adjust a load cutout here. For
operate curves with a high R-range, the load cutout excludes faulty pickups due to overload. For other pickup
methods, this load cutout is unnecessary since the distance zones are only enabled after a pickup has taken
place. That is, in those cases, the pickup distinguishes between load operation and short circuit.
The load cutout cuts the section of the load impedance from the circular characteristic curves (Figure 6-127).
It also acts on the section of increased resistance reserve, as shown in the figure for the 1st zone. The shape of
the load cutout is determined by the load section Rload and the load-range angle φload. These values apply to all
zones.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 581
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kreis-charakteristik-mit-lastk, 1, en_US]
Direction Determination
Since each zone can be set to forward, reverse, or non-directional, there are different (centrally
mirrored) direction-characteristic curves for forward and reverse. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. For such a zone, the entire trip region applies.
582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
i If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for this distance-protection zone is 1.5 power-system cycles even if no transformer inrush
current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need
the blocking by Inrush-current detection.
NOTE
i The residual compensation factors set here will be valid and visible only if you have set the parameter
Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone. If you have set the parameterZone-spec. residu.
comp. = no, the residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 583
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the reach of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip without delay.
Set the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its oper-
ating time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
• Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
• Dropout time for protection systems
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
s (length) 8.5 km
R1/s 0.15 Ω/km
X1/s 0.10 Ω/km
R0/s 0.83 Ω/km
X0/s 0.31 Ω/km
Current transformer 500 A/5 A
584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fo_zl_circlezone, 1, en_US]
If you set the first zone to 85 % of the line length, the following setting values result:
Primary:
Secondary:
EXAMPLE:
[dw_resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-freiltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-129 Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Overhead Lines
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 585
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Zr Set reach
ZL Line impedance
φline Line angle
Rarc Arc resistance
Zsc Short-circuit impedance
φsc Short-circuit angle
The resistance reserve Rarc in this case depends on the line angle and on the underreaching of the distance
zone that is to be tolerated. For a line angle of φline = 80° and 10 % underreaching, for example, the resistance
reserve is 30 % of the balance-point impedance.
The following table shows additional values for the resistance reserve at the impedance circle:
Line Angle φline Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of
10 % 15 % 20 %
85° 36 % 45 % 53 %
80° 30 % 40 % 47 %
75° 26 % 35 % 42 %
70° 22 % 31 % 38 %
65° 19 % 27 % 35 %
60° 17 % 25 % 32 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)
EXAMPLE:
586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kabelabg-mit-lichtbogenfehler-am-oertl-endverschluss, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Outgoing Cable with Arc Fault at Local Sealing End
[dw_oertl-resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-kabel, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-131 Local Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Cables
EXAMPLE:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 587
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_bsp-eine-erhoehte-resistanzreserve-mit-erweiterung, 1, en_US]
This extension leads to an increased resistance reserve both in the vicinity of the breakdown limit and in the
vicinity of the installation location. The curvature of the extension curve in the X direction can determine an
overreaching. This overreaching can be tolerated within certain limits, however, because the breakdown limit
in any case normally has a 15 % reserve distance from the next station, that is from the end of the line.
There is no extension-induced overreaching for limit angles α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle for
R-reserve for the 1st zone) of 45° or less. The greater the set value of α, the greater the possible over-
reaching. The following figure qualitatively shows the shape of the operate curve for different angles α.
[dw_quali-verlauf-ausloesekennl-erhoeht-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-133 Qualitative Plot of the Operate Curve for Increased Resistance Reserve
Since the overreaching and the resistance reserve both depend on the line angle φline and on the set limit
angle α, a few reference values are listed in the following sections.
The resistance reserve for short-circuits through an arc near of the breakdown point is primarily relevant for
overhead lines. Select the limit angle α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle for R-reserve for the
1st zone) so that a high resistance reserve goes into effect without impermissibly high overreaching.
Note the following:
• Do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a value greater than the line angle.
• Do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve above 75°.
588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Otherwise, increased overreaching may occur in the event of arc faults. The following table shows the condi-
tions for some examples of the approximate overreaching caused by setting an increased resistance reserve.
α Possible Overreaching Values Due to Arc Faults for a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 10 % 11 % 12 % 14 % -19 -19 -19 -19 -19
70° 3% 4% 5% 7% 10 % -19 -19 -19 -19
65° 0% 0% 0% 0% 3% 7% -19 -19 -19
60° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4% -19 -19
55° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 2% -19
50° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 1%
As with the base circle, the level of the resistance reserve Rarc depends on the line angle and on the tolerable
underreaching of the distance zone (also seeFigure 6-132). The following table shows the approximate resis-
tance reserve for tolerable underreaching of 15 %.
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of 15 % at a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 148 % 141 % 135 % 129 % -19 -19 -19 -19 -19
70° 137 % 131 % 125 % 120 % 116 % -19 -19 -19 -19
65° 125 % 118 % 112 % 108 % 105 % 102 % -19 -19 -19
60° 107 % 100 % 96 % 93 % 91 % 90 % 89 % -19 -19
55° -20 -20 59 % 86 % 71 % 73 % 75 % 77 % -19
50° -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 36 % 55 % 61 % 65 %
The resistance reserve in the near the breakdown point is not relevant for cables but rather the local resis-
tance reserve, that is for φsc = 0°. To avoid overreaching, do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve
to a value greater than the line angle here either. The resistance reserve is derived from the R axis segment (X
= 0) of the expanded operate curve. The following table shows some values for various setting values of the
parameter Angle for R-reserve:
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for X = 0
65° 190 %
60° 186 %
55° 181 %
50° 176 %
45° 170 %
40° 164 %
35° 157 %
30° 150 %
25° 142 %
20° 134 %
15° 125 %
10° 117 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)
For the higher zones, a resistance reserve lower than that for the 1st zone makes sense (relative to the impe-
dance reach in each case). To do this, adjust the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a lower value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 589
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High voltage over-
head-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .
NOTE
i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
6.6.12.3 Settings
590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 591
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.13.1 Description
The AREC zone works together with the Automatic reclosing function. In order for automatic reclosing to be
successful, short circuits on the entire transmission route to all line ends must be switched off at the same
time and with as little delay as possible. In addition, with distance protection, the AREC zone may be func-
tioning as an overreaching distance zone, or example, Zone Z1B, prior to automatic reclosing. After automatic
reclosing, the AREC zone is typically no longer in effect. For the relevant AREC cycle, short circuits up to the
breakdown point of the AREC zone can be switched off quickly (see following figure). Before automatic
reclosing, limited non-selectivity in favor of fast simultaneous disconnection is acceptable. Automatic
reclosing will be performed in any case. The normal stages of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.) are typi-
cally operated independently of the automatic reclosing function.
[dw_reichweite_ar_zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Reach Control Before 1st Reclosure for Distance Protection
The automatic reclosing zone is available in the function library in DIGSI (in Line function group → Distance
protection → Zone types). If necessary you can insert the automatic reclosing zone into the Distance protec-
tion function. The automatic reclosing zone can be controlled from the internal automatic reclosing function
and also externally via the automatic reclosing function type Operation with external automatic reclosing
function.
592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Logic
[loarzo13-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The automatic reclosing zone is an instance of controlled trip logic. You use the parameter Operate with
to select which distance zones will deliver the pickup information. If the selected distance zones have picked
up and a release from the automatic reclosing function is present, the automatic reclosing zone generates an
operate indication.
You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If the selected auto-
matic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308) AR only after
1p. trip ), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-pole trip command
in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group.
The, both the 3-pole coupling via pickup or trip command and the handling of 2-pole phase-to-phase short
circuits are considered.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is parameterized for 1-pole operation and the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed is set to no , the automatic reclosing zone indicates Inactive .
If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect, you can block the automatic
reclosing zone with the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active . The AREC zone is active only if the tele-
protection with distance protection is not in effect, for example, with a communication failure. If the telepro-
tection with distance protection is in effect, you achieve 100% selectivity through the teleprotection method
as distance protection only if the comprehensive AR zone is blocked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 593
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.13.3 Settings
Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the superordinate indications of the distance protec-
tion.
General Pickup
In impedance pickup, the signal General is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the working area of
a zone. In the pickup methods I>, V, and V/Phi, the signal General is generated when a pickup condition is
met.
The signal General is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions,
for example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and output as indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 595
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loanrdis-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Operate Logic
The operate signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
The 1-pole operate allowed parameter is used to specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
If the device is capable of 1-phase operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-
phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indi-
cation.
[loaus13p-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
6.6.15.1 Overview
This example describes the use of the distance protection for the protection of a 400 kV overhead-transmis-
sion line. For this example, the following is assumed:
596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• For this example, the following is assumed: In the function group Line, the function Distance protection
for grounded systems (3-pole trip) is selected.
• The distance protection operates with the Impedance pickup with load cutout pickup method.
NOTE
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with line 1 to be protected.
[dwplanab-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Time-Grading Chart
The following figure shows the time-grading chart for the application example:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 597
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection works with four time-graded distance zones. The distance zones have the following
function:
NOTE
i If you use an application template, the numbering of the stages of the distance protection is Z1, Z1B, Z3,
and Z4. If you load the function Distance protection from the DIGSI 5 library, the numbering of the stages
is Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.
The quadrilateral characteristics of the zones are shown in the R-X plane in Figure 6-140. The setting instruc-
tions for the parameters of the zones can be found in Chapters 6.6.15.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1
through 6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 .
598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power-System Data
The following system data and line parameters apply to the application example:
Settings Value
Power-system Phase-to-phase rated system voltage 400 kV
data Power frequency 50 Hz
Maximum positive-sequence system source impedance (10 + j 100) Ω
Maximum zero-sequence system source impedance (25 + j 200) Ω
Minimum positive-sequence system source impedance (1 + j 10) Ω
Minimum zero-sequence system source impedance (2.5 + j 20) Ω
Maximum ratio of remote infeed / local infeed(I remote/I local) 3
Transducer Voltage-transformer ratio (TV, LINE) 380 kV/100 V
Current-transformer ratio (TI) 1000 A/1 A
Current-transformer data 5PR20, 20 VA, Pi = 3 VA
Current-transformer connecting cable 2.5 mm2, 50 m
TI/TV for impedance conversion 0.2632
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 599
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Settings Value
Line data Line 1 length 80 km
Maximum load current 250% of full load
Minimum operating voltage 85% of rated voltage
Character convention for power flow Export = negative
Full-load apparent power (S) 600 MVA
Line 1 positive-sequence impedance per km Z1 (0.025 + j 0,21) Ω/km
Line 1 - Zero-sequence system impedance per km Z0 (0.13 + j 0.81) Ω/km
Line 2 - Total positive-sequence impedance (3.5 + j 39.5) Ω
Line 2 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (6.8 + j 148) Ω
Line 3 - Total positive-sequence impedance (1,5 + j 17,5) Ω
Line 3 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (7.5 + j 86.5) Ω
Maximum fault resistance, 250 Ω
Unfavorable power factor under full load 0.9
Tower data Average tower base resistance 15 Ω
Grounding conductor 60 mm2 steel
Distance: Phase-to-tower/phase-to-ground (mid-span) 3m
Distance: phase-to-phase 5m
Circuit Breaker Trip pickup time 60 ms
Operate time 70 ms
Based on the source and line impedance, the minimum fault-current levels can be calculated as follows:
[fofiklg1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 3-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal Sum of synchronous source impedance and line impedance (since only the magnitude of the current
= should be calculated, only the magnitude of the impedance is relevant)
For a 3-pole short circuit at the end of the line, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofztt3p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for 3-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi3pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal 1/3 (sum of the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence source as well as line impe-
= dance)
600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fofztt1p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for single-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi1pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is taken into consideration, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofi1prf-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For 1-phase short circuits with high fault resistance, the minimum fault current is:
[fofi1pir-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofinelg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 601
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Neutral point parameter allows you to set the type of the neutral point grounding. In the example
application, the system neutral point is grounded.
[fofxstek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fof1rerl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for Kx is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fofdxexl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For other applications, you can overwrite the residual compensation factors in distance zones set here with
local settings.
602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.15.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems – General Settings
Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
[dwlwpoly-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 603
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
In the example application, the system is grounded. For grounded systems, the combination of the criteria
3I0> and V0> is a very reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one another. For a
weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the
conditions are reversed. Set the parameter Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0.
[fou0bere-011010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwzverte-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-142 Impedance Distribution for 2-Phase Ground Faults with Fault Resistance
The influence of the load (remote infeed and load angle) can increase or reduce the rotation of the measured
fault resistances (see Figure 6-142). The leading phase-to-ground loop tends to produce an overreach. For this
reason, set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase for the application
example. In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the
internal fault loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for
this application. To avoid overreach, you must reduce the radius and/or modify the zone inclination (alpha
angle).
Load Cutout
You can configure the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase loops and phase-to-ground loops with the
following parameters:
• Default setting (_:3661:102) Use ph-g load cutout = no
• Default setting (_:3661:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 23.8 Ω
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 605
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops and phase-to-phase loops. Since there is no
restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a 1-pole tripping
of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load current. For these
cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic. The smallest load impedance is calculated as
follows:
[formnalg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The minimum operating voltage is 85 % of the rated voltage and the maximum load current is 250 % of the
full-load apparent power (see Table 6-4).
[foumnmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The primary minimum load impedance (parameter R load cutout (ph-ph)) can thus be calculated as
follows:
[formnpri-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The secondary setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows:
606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[formnsek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following step, you will determine the opening angle of the load cutout for phase-to-phase loops. The
largest angle the load impedance can assume results from the largest angle between the operating voltage
and load current. Since the load current ideally has the same phase as the voltage, the difference is given by
the power factor cos φ. The largest angle of the load impedance results from the least favorable, smallest
power factor. For this calculation, the power factor for full-load conditions must be used, since under light-
load conditions the reactive power flow can dominate. The load impedance under these conditions is not close
to the set impedance range. According to Table 6-4, the least favorable power factor under full-load condi-
tions is 0.9. The maximum load angle can thus be calculated as follows:
[fophlmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-ph) is 26°.
In this example, there is no distinction drawn between the maximum loads for phase-to-phase activation and
phase-to-ground activation. Under this assumption, you can set the load cutout parameters for phase-to-
ground loops to the same values. The setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-g) is 23.8 Ω,
the setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-g) is 26°.
Parameter: X reach
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 607
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
the line impedance (see Figure 6-141). The resistance settings for the individual zones must therefore only
cover the fault resistance at the fault location. For the setting of Zone 1, arc faults are taken into considera-
tion. For this reason, the arc resistance must be calculated with the following equation:
[foz1rlbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage (Varc) is calculated using the following rule of thumb:
[foz1ulbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rule of thumb is a very conservative estimate. The estimated value Rarc is larger than the actual value. The
arc is pulled into a curve due to thermal and magnetic forces. Thus the length of the arc (Iarc) is greater than
the distance between the phases (phase-to-phase). As an estimate, we assume that larc is twice the distance
between the phases. When calculating the setting value, first calculate the largest value of Rarc. To do so, you
must first calculate Rarc with the smallest value of the fault current (calculated in section 6.6.15.2 Block
Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbwr-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
By adding a safety reserve of 20 %, the secondary minimum set value can be calculated as follows: The divi-
sion by 2 is necessary because Rarc appears in the loop measurement, while the set value corresponds to the
conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsst-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired coverage of arc resis-
tances. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on
the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line on the high-voltage
or very high-voltage range, the following rule of thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-ph) for the
Zone 1:
0,8 · X reach < R (ph-ph) < 2,5 · X reach
In this example, the lower limit applies. The secondary setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) can be
calculated as follows:
R(ph-ph) = 0.8 ⋅ 3.537 = 2.830 Ω
Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in Zone 1 to 2.830 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmaster-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 609
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Remote infeed (Iremote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-145). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio Iremote/Ilocal. In Table 6-4, this value is specified as
3. The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the faulty loop is thus:
[foz1rtfx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground (see
Table 6-4):
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 3 m = 15 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current (calculated in section 6.6.15.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbmx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
reserve of 20 %, the secondary setting value R (ph-g) can be calculated as follows: The division by the
factor (1 + kr) is necessary because Rarc and RTF appear in the loop measurement, while the setting value corre-
sponds to the conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsku-250309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired resistance coverage.
To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on the X
reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line, the following rule of
thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-g) for the Zone 1:
[foz1rez1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i The lower limit is the same as for phase-to-phase faults. This ensures fast tripping. The upper limit corre-
sponds to the loop range. This prevents overreach.
In this example, the lower limit applies. The setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) can be calculated for
Zone 1 as follows:
R (ph-g) = 0.8 · 3.537 = 2.83 Ω
[dwalphae-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-146 Transmission Angle for the Alpha-Angle Setting (Parameter: Zone Inclination)
To determine the setting value for the zone inclination, the least favorable practical case is assumed. First,
calculate the maximum transmission angle (computer simulation). For the example application, the maximum
transmission angle is 35° (see Table 6-4). The R/X ratio of Zone 1 is 0.8 (2.830/3.537 = 0.8). From
Figure 6-147, use these values to read off the alpha angle. For the example application, the point is valid in
the middle between 30° and 40°. This gives an alpha angle of 15°. Set the parameter to Zone-inclination
angle = 15°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 611
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklalph-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Zone Z1B
In the application example, Zone Z1B operates as an overreaching zone for phase A. Use Zone Z1B for cooper-
ation with the Automatic reclosing (AREC) and/or Teleprotection scheme functions. These functions process
the output signals (pickup indications) of Zone Z1B. In the example application, Zone Z1B does not trip inde-
pendently, but rather only via the AREC and Teleprotection scheme functions. The independent tripping of
Zone Z1B is suppressed. To do this, set the time delays of Zone Z1B to ∞.
Parameter: X reach
612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Zone Z1B must be set to overreach on Line 1. The minimum setting is 120 % of the line reactance. If the line is
not extremely long, a setting of 150 % of more is used in practice. For this application, a line of medium
length, a range of 150 % is selected:
X reach = 1.5 · XLine1
X reach = 1.5 · 80· 0.21 = 25.2 Ω (primary)
The secondary setting value of the X reach of Zone Z1B can be calculated as follows:
X reach = 25.2 Ω · 0.2632 = 6.633 Ω
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
Parameter: R (ph-g)
[foz1brgl-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example application, the lower limit applies. The setting value of the R (ph-g) of Zone Z1B can be
calculated as follows:
[foz1brsk-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 613
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: X reach
[foz2xrch-310309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[fo1_rll_z3, 1, en_US]
[fo2_rll_z3, 1, en_US]
614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: R (ph-g)
[fo1_rle_z3, 1, en_US]
[fo2_rle_z3, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 615
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the application example, Z4 is used as a non-directional backup stage. For zone 4, set
the parameter Directional mode = non-directional.
Parameter: X reach
[foz3xrch-130509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[foz3rlmn-020409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With these assumptions, the calculated setting value R (ph-ph)min ensures fault detection in Zone Z4. The
upper limit is determined by restrictions in reach balance. The following apply:
R (ph-ph) < 6· X reach
The X reach of zone Z4 is 17.782 Ω (see section 6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 Parameter: X range). The
upper limit is thus 106.69 Ω. This extends well into the load range (see Parameter R load sector (L-E) in section
6.6.15.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ). Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in zone Z4 to twice the minimum
value. This is a safe compromise.
R (ph-ph) = R (ph-ph)min· 2
R (ph-ph) = 13.16 · 2 = 26.32 Ω
In Zone Z4, set the parameter R (ph-ph) = 26.32 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-139 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.75 s.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 617
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
• Functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery to faults in the upstream electrical power
system beyond a transformer
The Impedance protection function is used in protection function groups which provide current and voltage
measurement values.
The Impedance protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB) General and
one zone. A maximum of 4 zones can be operated simultaneously in the function. The zones are structured
identically.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all zones.
[dw_strimpedanceprot, 3, en_US]
6.7.3 Description
• In the case of auto transformers and transformers grounded on both sides in the star-star connection,
measurement through the transformer is possible. Here, distance protection for lines can be used
without any problems.
618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_ratio-2pol-ifault, 2, en_US]
[dw_ratio-1pol-fault, 2, en_US]
The changed measurand mapping also leads to a different impedance mapping. Figure 6-151 and
Figure 6-152 show, for example, for a 2-phase or 1-phase short circuit on the star side, the resulting phasors
on the delta side. To simplify it, the transformer ratio was assumed to be 1.
[dw_imp-2pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 619
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_imp-1pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
With a 2-phase short circuit, the phase-to-ground impedance of the phase corresponds to the double phase
current of the actual fault impedance via the transformer. The impedance is correctly measured. All other
impedances are measured as considerably larger. Subtracting the currents results in an infinite impedance
measured value for the C-A loop.
A 1-phase ground fault results in the smallest impedance value based on the calculation with phase-to-phase
voltages (in the example, C-A). Because the zero-sequence system cannot be transferred via a star-delta trans-
former, an impedance is measured that is too large by the amount of the zero-sequence impedances (trans-
former, line). The actual fault location is seen as being farther away.
With a 3-phase short circuit, the impedance measurement for all measuring loops is correct.
The following table summarizes the results of the impedance measurement for a star-delta transformer:
Table 6-5 Fault Mapping and Measuring Errors during the Impedance Measurement of a Star-Delta
Transformer
620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[lo_dis-impedance-protection, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 621
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[lo_block_imp, 2, en_US]
Loop Selection
The function Impedance protection can be used in electrical power systems and plants with different neutral
points. With the Loop selection parameter, you control which parameters influence the loop release.
In power systems with effective neutral point grounding – solidly or low-impedance grounded neutral point –
all impedance loops (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops) can work parallel to each other. When all
loops are working in parallel, the loop release is controlled by the parameter Min. phase-current
thresh (see following figure).
Figure 6-155 Effective Parameter for Loop Release for All Loops
In power systems with a non-effective neutral point grounding – isolated, grounded, or high-impedance
grounded neutral point – the control for the loop selection is necessary to avoid an overfunction, for example,
a ground fault. The loop selection is controlled by the Current-dependent parameter. The following figure
shows which parameter controls the loop selection.
622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
In case of a ground fault, the voltage collapsed – ideally to 0 – and the phase-to-ground loop measures either
a small impedance or 0 Ω. The phase-selective overcurrent detection releases the loops (parameter Overcur-
rent threshold). The undervoltage seal-in (parameter Undervoltage seal in) keeps the overcurrent
erect. The undervoltage seal-in is necessary for use in power plants when an exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus. During a near short circuit, the excitation voltage collapses and results in a decreased
synchronous generated voltage. Thereby the fault current sinks below the rated current and thereby the
current threshold value (parameter Overcurrent threshold). The parameter V-seal-in threshold
monitors the positive-sequence voltage. The undervoltage seal-in drops out when the threshold value V-
seal-in threshold is topped or the undervoltage seal-in time (parameter Duration of V-seal-in
time) runs out.
• In the event of a 3-phase pickup, the loop selection is dependent on the ratio of the current amplitudes of
the phases to one another.
The following table shows the measuring-loop selection:
Pickup Measuring Loops
1-phase A Phase-to-ground A-gnd
B B-gnd
C C-gnd
2-phase A, B Phase-to-phase A-B
B, C B-C
C, A C-A
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 623
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
Impedance Measurement
From the sampled values of the phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages, the fundamental phasors
are determined per period using an FIR filter (FIR = Finite Impulse Response). The impedances are calculated
from the fundamental phasors. By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance is measured
using another frequency range. This is advantageous for island networks or block-unit power plants, for
example, for start-up processes.
There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are calculated using the current
cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the current fault condition.
The impedance for phase-to-phase loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_schleife_ZLL, 2, en_US]
[fo_schleife_ZLE, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current thresh. All released impedance loops are
calculated.
To release phase-to-ground loops, it is sufficient if the corresponding phase current exceeds the Min.
phase-current thresh. For phase-to-phase loops, both phase currents and the loop current must exceed
the Min. phase-current thresh.
There is no special ground-fault detection, such as distance protection for lines.
If the released impedance loop(s) lie in one zone, the Impedance protection function generates a pickup indi-
cation with loop information. At the same time, a pickup indication in the picked up zone occurs with specifi-
cation of the relevant phase and direction. The direction is subsequently determined for all picked up impe-
dance loops and the associated time delay started. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of
the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the function.
Direction Determination
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage or negative-sequence system variables. If the
measured negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current exceed 10 % of the rated values of
the device, the variables of the negative-sequence system are used exclusively. For the direction decision, the
angle between the negative-sequence current I2 and the negative-sequence voltage V2 is evaluated.
Figure 6-157 shows the defined directional areas on impedance level.
624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
For 3-phase symmetrical short circuits, there is no negative-sequence system. In this case, the memory voltage
is used. If the memory voltage is not available either, for example when switching onto a fault, all zones –
regardless of their parameterized direction – pick up and generate an operate indication after the time delay
has expired.
Optionally, you can link the Impedance protection function with the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto
fault function (see chapter 6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes). This enables the selected Impedance-
protection zones to trip without delay.
[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Inrush-Current Detection
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the zones against trip-
ping due to transformer inrush currents.
Impedance Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (impedance polygon) in the zone is a rectangle in the R-X plane. The polygon
is defined by the parameters X reach (ph-g), X reach (ph-ph), R reach (ph-g), and R reach
(ph-ph) and the Directional mode. This means that, in special situations, a different setting is possible
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops.
To stabilize the quadrilateral limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies
within a polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions. The following figure shows an example with
2 non-directional zones:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 625
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_klpoly-impedanceprot, 2, en_US]
Sample Configuration
The following figure is an example of how the Impedance protection function is used at a feeder point in a
medium-voltage power system.
626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_example-protection, 1, en_US]
The medium-voltage power system is fed on the high-voltage side with a YNd5 transformer. In addition, there
is an infeed that enables energy recovery to faults occurring on the high-voltage side.
The protection device installed on the delta side of the transformer functions as distance protection, which is
the backup protection for the medium-voltage power system.
In addition to distance protection, the protection device on the delta side functions as impedance protection,
which looks in the transformer direction. The power system on the high-voltage side is a meshed system and
also contains distance protection devices.
In the following, you can find recommendations for the protection setting values and a view of the setting
problems. Figure 6-160 shows a possible setting approach.
Zone TZ 1 should be coordinated with the protection system and delayed by approx. 100 ms. The delay makes
preferred tripping possible due to the differential protection and a dropout of the zone.
Zone TZ 2 is intended as a directional reserve stage, whose time must, without fail, be coordinated with the
protection system. At the same time, this stage can be used if, when switching the transformer on, it switches
onto a fault.
In exchange, the function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault must be present and set accordingly
(see function description in chapter 6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 627
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_config-staffel, 1, en_US]
Line (transformed to
20 kV):
The sample calculation clearly shows that the line reactance can be disregarded compared to transformer
reactance due to the quadratic transformation.
To avoid overfunction, select the following setting values for the 1st zone (TZ 1)
X1 = 0.9 ⋅ XTr = 0.9 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 0.864 Ω
For the 2nd zone, select the double transformer impedance and set the time delay correspondingly high.
X2 = 2 ⋅ XTr = 2 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.92 Ω.
With the selected setting, Zone TZ 1 does not protect the transformer completely, especially if you take into
account the incorrect measurement for a 1-phase short circuit.
If you want to achieve a reliable tripping for all fault situations (see Table 6-5), the setting value must extend
far beyond the transformer. One possible strategy for the time grading is a setting value of approx. 1.5 XTr.
You must guarantee the selectivity using the Time criterion. The following figure shows the time-grading
chart:
628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_staffel-x1-xtr, 3, en_US]
The zone range in the R direction must take into account the fault resistance on the fault location. The fault
resistance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resis-
tance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. For the zone range in
the R direction, you do not have to take the fault resistance on the upper-voltage side and the line resistance
into account. These are also divided by the transformer-ratio quadrant and can be mostly disregarded.
However, fault resistances on the upper-voltage side during high-current feed on the upper-voltage side also
impact the reactance and resistance measurement on the undervoltage side. This impact is unavoidable and
can result in a short circuit with fault resistance on the upper-voltage side not being detected by the under-
voltage side until the high-current feed on the upper-voltage side is cleared. Do not set the reserve resistance
any larger than necessary. The setting can be adjusted to the maximum load in the direction of the line section
to be protected, in other words, in the transformer direction. The setting value for the R range must be lower
than the resistance under maximum load conditions (RL max). For a sufficient distance to the load range,
Siemens recommends a value of about 20 % to 50 % RL max. This means an incorrect measurement is avoided
by the apparent impedances (seeFigure 6-151 and Figure 6-152).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 629
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
NOTE
i The parameter (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops is visible only if you set the parameter
Min. phase-current thresh.
EXAMPLE:
The rated generator current is calculated as:
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
X range = 150 %
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Xprim = 150 %/100 % ⋅ ZKT = 1.5 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.44 Ω (primary)
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[fo_Xreichweite_sek, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 631
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
The rated transformer current is assumed as the rated load current. The current is 1443 A on the 20 kV side.
The smallest impedance measured under maximum load conditions (Zmax) is calculated as follows assuming
10 % undervoltage and 10 % overcurrent:
[fo_Zmax_trafo_RLE, 2, en_US]
For the R reach, 20 % ⋅ Zmaxis specified. This means the primary setting value of the R reach (ph-g) param-
eter is calculated as follows:
[fo_rReichweite_sek, 2, en_US]
632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
Set the range for phase-to-phase loops just like for phase-to-ground loops. This results in the following setting
values:
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 1.45 Ω (primary)
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 10.9 Ω (secondary)
6.7.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 633
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 635
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
Power-swing blocking
• Detects power swings
• Evaluates the impedances per phase accordingly
• Blocks the selected zones of the distance protection in case of power swings
• Detects 1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase short circuits during a power swing and then cancels the blocking
for the specific phase
• Does not generate tripping of the out-of-step condition; a separate out-of-step protection function is
available for this purpose
The Power-swing blocking function is a supplementary function to the distance protection. It only works if the
distance-protection function is activated. If a power swing is detected, power-swing blocking blocks the pickup
and tripping through the distance protection. Each distance-protection zone can be blocked separately.
The Power-swing blocking function is included in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor delivers status information to the function regarding the protected object (open
poles in particular).
[dwpsdstr-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-162 Power-Swing Blocking Works Together with the Distance-Protection Function
Power-Swing Event
After dynamic events such as load jumps, short circuits, automatic reclosing functions, or switching opera-
tions, the generators exposed to the oscillations may have to respond to the new power balance of the
system. In case of power swings, the distance-protection function is fed with high compensating currents and
- especially at the electrical center - low voltages (Figure 6-163). Low voltages combined with high currents
636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
represent apparently small impedances that can lead to tripping by the distance protection. Power-swing
blocking prevents tripping by the distance protection in case of power swings.
[dwpendel-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power swings are 3-phase symmetrical events. As a rule, a certain symmetry of the measurands can be
assumed. Power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical events, such as short circuits or during a 1-pole
dead time. For this reason, power-swing detection is structured to use 3 measuring systems. One measuring
system is available for each phase, which warrants phase-selective power-swing detection. If short circuits
occur, the power swing detected in the respective phase will be discarded, which enables the distance protec-
tion function to initiate selective tripping.
Functionality
In order to detect the power swing, the rate of change will be adjusted to the impedance phasor.
[dwzvekto-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-164 Impedance Vectors During a Power Swing and During a Short Circuit
In order to warrant all functions of the power-swing detection are stable and secure, without the risk of over-
function during a short circuit, the following measurement criteria are used:
• Trajectory monotony:
During a power swing, the measured impedance indicates a directional path of movement. This path
occurs precisely if within the measurement window one of the components ΔR and ΔX at the most indi-
cates a change of directions. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it causes a directional change in ΔR as well
as in ΔX within the measured value window.
• Trajectory continuity:
The spacing of two consecutive impedance values will clearly indicate a change of ΔR or ΔX during a
power swing. If a short circuit occurs, the impedance vector skips to the fault impedance and remains
motionless.
• Trajectory uniformity:
During a power swing the ratio between 2 consecutive changes of ΔR or ΔX do not overshoot a
threshold. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it will cause an erratic movement since the impedance
phasor abruptly skips from load impedance to fault impedance.
If the impedance indicator enters the distance protection pickup range and the power-swing detection criteria
are met, a power swing will be indicated. The pickup range is composed of the largest setting values for R and
X in all active zones.
Figure 6-165 shows the logic of the power-swing blocking. The measurement takes place per phase. A power-
swing detection signal will be transmitted only after the measured impedance is in the distance protection
pickup range ((_:55) Block zones). The power-swing detection signal remains active until a short-circuit
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 637
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
occurs, the power-swing subsides, or the maximum blocking time has elapsed. You can use the binary input
signal >Block function to block the power-swing detection.
[lopendel-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can place a time limit on the blocking effect of the
power-swing blockage. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated when using
systems that are slowly drifting apart.
When the impedance enters the distance protection pickup range, the maximum blocking time will be started.
When the impedance exits the pickup range while the maximum blocking time is running, the maximum
blocking time will be reset.
638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
Logic
[lopsdlog-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection delivers information about the loops contained in its zones to the power-swing
blocking. If the power-swing blocking detects power swings in the activated loops, it delivers phase-selective
information about the zones to be blocked to the distance protection. The actual blocking is carried out in the
distance protection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 639
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can limit the maximum blocking time of the distance
protection during the power swing. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated
when using networks that are slowly drifting apart.
For tripping during an asynchronous long-lasting power swings, Max. blocking time is not relevant. For
this application, use the function Out-of-step protection.
If there is no operational requirement with regards to a time limit of the power-swing blocking, Siemens
recommends the default setting ∞ (= not in effect).
6.8.5 Settings
640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
To enable selective and non-delayed fault clearance of all faults, on the entire line length, information
exchange with the remote line end is applied. You can implement teleprotection using binary inputs and
outputs (transmission and reception contacts) or using a digital communication connection.
The Teleprotection method is used in protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combina-
tion with the distance-protection function. The functions outlined in Figure 6-167 are available.
[dwtpsdst-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-168 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the distance protection and generates the associated
transmission signal for transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is optionally coupled via a binary input, via the unblock logic or via
the communication. For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1
and Rec.unblk.sig# are available multiple times, once for each remote line end.
The distance zone parameterized for the teleprotection method provides the pickup information. This pickup
information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled,
the teleprotection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 641
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsfst-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
For the coupling of receipt signals from opposite ends, the 3 receipt block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Rec.unblk.sig# and Rec. PI# are available. The teleprotection schemes described below can be oper-
ated with the suitable receipt blocks if required.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via binary signals. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured with a total of 3 ends, for example, 2 Receipt function blocks are required.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. The receipt signals can thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as indi-
vidual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-168.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The teleprotection scheme can optionally be used with the unblock method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 643
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so great that reception by the
other line end is not ensured.
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receipt signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the receipt of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-168.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital). Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The iden-
tity and the number of devices participating in the teleprotection scheme for the protection of the line, are set
644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
by using the configuration of the protection interface; see 3.6.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the
Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 .
NOTE
i When operating the following functions for communication via a protection interface, you need a
minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s.
• Teleprotection scheme with distance protection or
• Teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection and
6.9.4.1 Description
[dwtpsmit-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the underreaching zone - this is usually zone Z1 for the distance protection - a transfer-
trip signal is sent to the remote end. The receipt signal leads to accelerated tripping in the device at the
remote end.
[lotpssem-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 645
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
Sending takes place upon pickup in the distance zone selected as a send condition. You can use the (_:
5671:101) Send prolongation parameter to compensate the differences in the pickup times at both
line ends.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or
phase-jointly as individual signals (general).
If the internal indication Echo Confirmation from the trip logic is present, the sending logic also generates
the Send signal. If, with a present receive signal, an Operate with parameterized zone has picked up, the
Echo Confirmation raises. Even if the Send zone is set below the operate zone, a definite tripping is
possible for all line ends.
[lotpsalm-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter Operate with will be released for trip-
ping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5671:102) Operate delay
(1-phase); for multi-phase faults use the (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
If the permissive underreach transfer trip is used to protect a line configuration with more than 2 ends, the
receive signals from all line ends are linked with OR.
A trip signal results from a simultaneous presence of the distance zone pickup, the release signal, and the time
sequence. The (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping
in 1-/3-pole trip logic devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the distance zone
pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the corresponding time
646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote end is no longer
present.
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General
The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 647
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an Extended Measuring
Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Grading-Time Shortening)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault within the underreaching zone. If
the fault is detected there within the overreaching zone, the receipt signal leads to tripping.
[dwtpsmeb-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-175 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Extended Measuring Range
You can configure the intertrip process via an extended measuring range with the following settings:
Transmit with
Operate with
6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup (Distance
Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping with Release)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. If the
distance-protection function picks up at the remote end, the signal received there leads to tripping.
648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsmua-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-176 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup
You can configure the permissive underreach transfer trip via pickup with the following settings:
6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. The
signal received there leads directly to the tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 649
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsdim-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.9.4.6 Settings
650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.5.1 Description
[dwtpsver-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the overreaching zone, for example zone Z1B for the distance protection, a send signal
is sent to the remote end. In the distance protection device, the received signal leads to accelerated tripping if
the fault is also detected in the forward direction.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 651
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpssmv-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Sending takes place upon pickup in the selected overreaching zone or optionally upon pickup in the forward
direction. The send signal can be extended by a parameterizable time (_:5701:101) Send prolonga-
tion if the protection has already issued a trip command. This also enables the release of the other line end if
the short-circuit is deactivated there very rapidly by the underreaching zone. With this, pickup differences
between the cable ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5701:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). No transmission signal is sent in the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive mode for double faults can be improved
on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transmitted per communication direction. Trans-
mission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly as indi-
vidual signals (general).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsavv-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a receive signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5701:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5701:103)
Operate delay (1-phase). For multi-phase faults, use the (_:5701:104) Operate delay (multi-
ph.) parameter.
The (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-pole
tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive mode for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all line ends are combined for the tripping with AND.
A trip signal results from simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the release signal and the
time sequence. For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the
distance zone pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the
corresponding time delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote
end is no longer present.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
mode. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 653
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection methods have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.
Related Topics
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)
However, the selected texts are identical to the designations you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selected text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1B.
[dw_Dis-prot-vergleich-200314-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compensate the differences in
the pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.
6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme (Distance Protection
with Overreaching and Release)
A send signal is sent to the remote end in the event of a fault in the overreaching zone. If the fault is also
detected there in the overreaching zone, the received signal leads to tripping.
[dwtpssiv-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-182 Function Diagram of the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 655
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
You can use the following settings to configure the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme:
[dwtpsriv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The parameter Operate with is used to set the trip condition to Dis pickup fwd..
6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process (Distance Protection with
Overreaching and Unblocking)
The directional unblock method corresponds to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a tripping
is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional unblock method cannot be
operated with a communication via a protection interface owing to the way it functions.
[dwtpsubl-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional unblocking method:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 657
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.5.6 Settings
658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.6.1 Description
[dwtpsblo-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a fault in the reverse direction, the blocking signal is sent to the opposite
end. If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line end, it generates the trip
signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotpssbl-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is generated upon activation of the distance protection in the reverse direction or non-
directionally. The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5731:101) Send
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 659
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
prolongation , you can extend the blocking signal. In this way, the remote end can continue to be
blocked, even if the fault has already been cleared locally.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5731:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the distance
protection detects a fault in the forward direction, the blocking signal is stopped immediately and the indica-
tion Stop is generated.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for L1, L2, and L3 or phase-
jointly as individual signals.
[lotpsaub-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:5731:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking procedure must be delayed due to possible differ-
ences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. The time
delay is set with the (_:5731:107) Release delay parameter.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the delay time under Operate delay (1-phase) ; for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.
660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. The trip is blocked so that an activation in the
selected overreaching zone in the forward direction does not quickly shut down the external fault at the
remote end.
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the recep-
tion signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
The (_:5731:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the protection function detects a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is generated. If the other
line end does not receive a blocking signal, the protection function trips in the event of a fault in the over-
reaching zone. For this, the overreaching zone must be set to approximately 120 % of the line length. In the
case of multiple end lines, the overreaching zone must extend over the longer line section, irrespective of
whether an additional infeed is possible via the branching point. Since no release signal is required by the
opposite end, single infeed short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking procedure.
[dwtpsrib-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 661
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 663
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.7.1 Description
[dwtpsrwv-260613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the crossover zone and none of the subordinate protection devices transmits a blocking
signal, this will initiate tripping of reverse interlocking.
Trip Logic
[loruever-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:14311:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase) ; for
multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.
664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
If a receiving signal is pending, tripping will be blocked in order to ensure that a pickup in the selected cross-
over zone does not disconnect quickly the short circuit on the outbound line.
If the Reverse interlocking function is used with several receiving blocks, the receiving signals from all
receiving blocks will be linked with OR.
The (_:14311:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. If the device is capable of only 3-pole tripping, the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed does not apply and is not visible.
[dwrckver-180613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 665
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.7.3 Settings
666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.8.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The transient
blocking is used for blocking and permissive overreach transfer trips, but not for a permissive underreach
transfer trip.
[lotpstrb-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period Trans. blk. pickup delay. The Transient blocking signal has an
effect on send and trip logic of the permissive overreach transfer trips as well as on the trip logic of the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 667
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
blocking method. After the omission of the blocking criterium, the transient blocking will be maintained for a
set time Trans. blk. dropout delay. If a trip command is generated in the underreaching zone during a
transient blocking (signal Release Trip forward (DIS)), the transient blocking time is triggered. In this way,
the blocking of the teleprotection in the event of an internal fault is prevented.
The teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection can affect one another. Use
the Trans. block. with parameter to set whether the transient blocking of the teleprotection method for
the ground-fault protection is to affect that of the distance protection. The reciprocal influence is advisable if
the teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection work with a common commu-
nication channel.
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are recom-
mended.
668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded-neutral systems function
(ANSI 67N):
• Detects high-resistance ground faults in electric equipment in grounded systems
• Detects short circuits phase selectively
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function is used in the
Line protection function group. The function is preconfigured at the factory to have 2 stages with definite-
time delay (definite time-overcurrent protection stages). Within the function, maximum 6 definite time-over-
current protection stages can be operated as well as 1 simultaneously by each inverse type. A maximum of 2
functions can be operated within the function group.
The following stage types are available:
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay (definite-time overcurrent protection)
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay with logarithmic inverse characteristics (AMZ-3I0-log)
• Operate
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 669
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[dwgfpstr-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and delay times of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected from outside
via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Binary input signal
Automatic reclosing (AREC) If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (see section 6.10.11.1 Description).
The stages can be used for directional-comparison protection via the Teleprotection method with ground-
fault protection function, if necessary (see chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions).
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types definite-time overcurrent protection
(UMZ), inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ) according to IEC and ANSI and inverse-time overcurrent
protection (AMZ) with logarithmic inverse characteristics.
670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loggfp02-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-194 Stage Control for the Stages Types Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Inverse Time-Over-
current Protection, and Logarithmic Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stage is blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure,
insofar as the stage works directionally, and the transformer neutral-point current is not connected.
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types S0 inverse and V0 inverse.
[loggfp12-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-195 Stage Control for the Stage Types S0 Inverse and V0 Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stages is also blocked upon a measuring-voltage failure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 671
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[loggfp01-170611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Measurand
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition equa-
tion
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this ground current (residual
current). The linear range of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.5 A. At higher currents,
the device automatically switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
zero current from the conductor currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending
on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 1 cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or backward
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).
Phase Selection
Phase Selection Depending on the distribution of the currents and voltages, the phase selection detects if a 1-
phase (determination of the affected phase) or multiphase short circuit is present (see Chapter 6.10.10 Phase
Selection ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 673
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked .
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description)
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be independent of the current level, select the stage type Definite time-overcurrent
protection.
A multi-stage Definite time-overcurrent protection function is realized by the parallel operation of several defi-
nite time-overcurrent protection stages.
Parameter: Hold mode 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 675
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).
676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 677
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 679
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 681
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI
6.10.5.1 Description
[loggfp03-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-198 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection
According to IEC and ANSI
Measurands
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition equa-
tion
682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
residual current from the phase currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant method of measurement,
depending on the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
[loggfpst-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 683
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Phase Selection
The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole (determination of the relevant conductor) or a multiphase short
circuit is present via the distribution of the currents and voltages (see section 6.10.10 Phase Selection ).
Pickup, Dropout, and Tripping Behavior of the Dependent Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. This time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between the following options:
• Non-delayed dropout: The summed time is deleted.
• Dropout according to characteristic curve: The summed time is reduced in relation to the characteristic
curve.
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The execution of the characteristic curve after exceeding 1.1 times the threshold value can be delayed by a
constant time ( Additional time delay parameter).
• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked .
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description and section
6.10.6.1 Description)
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to the IEC or ANSI standard, select this
type of stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 685
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Parameter: Hold mode for 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 687
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.5.3 Settings
688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 689
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.6.1 Description
[loggfp05-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-200 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with
Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic Curve (AMZ-3I0-Log)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 691
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.1 Description .
Operate Curve
Figure 6-201 shows the effect of the characteristic curve parameters qualitatively.
The Threshold parameter setting is the reference value for all current values. At the same time, the
Threshold multiplier parameter maps the beginning of the characteristic curve, that is, the lower oper-
ating range on the current axis in relation to the threshold value. The time value Max. time of the
curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 = threshold value). The Time dial
parameter changes the slope of the characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve
parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[loggfp04-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 693
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 695
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.7.1 Description
[loggfp10-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-202 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence System Power-Dependent
Time Delay (S0 Inverse)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.1 Description .
696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Operate Curve
Figure 6-203 shows the operate curve of the stage.
The zero-sequence system power protection operates according to a power-dependent operate curve.
The zero-sequence system power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence system
current. The Sr component in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle φcomp is definitive. This
component is designated as a compensated zero power.
Sr = 3I0 · 3V0 · cos(φ-φcomp) with φ = φV0– φI0
φ comp therefore indicates the direction of maximum sensitivity (cos(φ– φ comp) = 1, if φ = φ comp). The power
calculation automatically contains the direction via its sign information. Reversing the signs also allows the
power for the reverse direction to be determined. Figure 6-209 represents the direction-characteristic curve.
The tripping time results according to the equation:
[fogfp003-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The power-time characteristic curve can be shifted with the reference value Sref (S ref for Sr-charac-
teristic = basic value for the inverse characteristic curve for φ = φcomp) in power direction. The power-
time characteristic curve can be shifted in the time direction by the factor k-fact. for Sr-character..
You can set additional power-dependent delays with the time setting Additional time delay.
[loggfp11-250111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero power according to an inverse characteristic curve, select
this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 697
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.7.3 Settings
698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 699
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.8.1 Description
Figure 6-204 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage-Dependent Time Delay
(V0 Inverse)
700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Measurands
The device measures the residual voltage. The measured voltage is converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand from the broken-delta winding, the zero-
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC:
The zero-sequence current is used as a measurand. The zero-sequence current is calculated its definition equa-
tion from the sum of the 3 phase currents.
Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the zero-sequence current can be measured or
calculated.
If you connect a current input to the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (zero-sequence current) will be directly
available to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device calculates the
zero-sequence current from the phase currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 701
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description).
with
V0 Actually occurring zero-sequence voltage
V0 min Setting value of the parameter Min. zero-seq. volt. V0
The following figure shows the voltage-dependent characteristic curve of the V0-inverse stage:
[dw-GFP-kennl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-206 Parameter of the Voltage-Dependent Characteristic Curve of the V0-Inverse Stage (without
Additional Times)
702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The operate time depends on the value of the zero-sequence voltage. In meshed, grounded systems, the zero-
sequence voltage increases towards the location of the ground fault. Due to the inverse characteristic curve,
the operate time decreases with rising zero-sequence voltage.
The V0> threshold value parameter defines the lower voltage limit (dotted line c in Figure 6-206). The
lower voltage limit c cuts off the characteristic curve b.
The Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direc-
tion of V0.
The Time delay directional parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direction
of time.
The setting value of the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter is the asymptote a´ of the characteristic
curve a for t → ∞.
Processing the inverse characteristic curve after exceeding the threshold value V0> threshold value can
be delayed by the time set in the Time delay directional parameter.
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero-sequence voltage according to an inverse characteristic
curve, select this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 703
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Related Topics
6.10.11.2 Application and Setting Notes
704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can lead
to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10 % under normal conditions.
6.10.8.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 705
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.9.1 Description
The direction determination works across stages. Various methods are available for determining the direction
and for increasing the accuracy of the determination.
706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The following diagram shows which variables and settings are used for direction determination.
[logfpri1-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 707
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Depending on the device connection, it is measured or calculated. If a voltage input is connected at the
broken-delta winding Vdadn of a voltage-transformer set, the device will use this voltage with consideration of
the Matching ratio Vph / VN (see chapter 8.3.9.3 Function Description). Otherwise the device calcu-
lates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
If the neutral-point current IY of a grounded transformer (supply transformer) is connected, the reference
voltage VP is the sum of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and a variable proportional to the neutral-point current
IY (see Figure 6-208). This corresponds to 20 V at the rated current. With the setting IY (neutral pt.)
only, VP is only derived from the transformer neutral-point current.
To determine the direction, the device sets the measuring current IN (= -3I0) to the real axis. If the phasor of
the reference voltage VP is within the defined forward range, the device determines the direction as forward.
In other cases, the device determines the direction as backward.
As a prerequisite for direction determination, the adjustable minimum variables for the zero-sequence voltage
or the transformer neutral-point current must be exceeded (parameters Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and
Min. neutral-point curr. IY).
If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit, the direction determination is
prevented with V0. If the transformer neutral-point current is connected to the device, the direction can be
determined via this.
708 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri2-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-208 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Variables
Determining the direction requires a minimum residual voltage that can be set as Min. zero-seq.
voltage V0. Another prerequisite is that the compensated zero power must have an adjustable minimum
value (parameter Forw. dir. power threshold).
The following figure shows an example of the direction characteristic curve.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 709
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri4-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-209 Direction-Characteristic Curve for Direction Determination with Zero-System Power
710 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri5-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The V0 voltage at a ground fault with direction = backward is determined with the following equation:
V0F0=backward = I0 · (Z0trf + Z0L)
This equation can be used to determine a I0 threshold with corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0 threshold is
exceeded, the measured V0 voltage at a backward fault must exceed the corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0
threshold is exceeded and the measured V0 voltage is less than the V0 threshold, the direction = forward can
thus be determined.
The method can improve the directional sensitivity in the case of long lines (large Z0L).
Switch on this functionality via the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min parameter.
If the measured V0 voltage falls below the minimum value Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and 3I0 exceeds
the current threshold Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens., the decision is for forward.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 711
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
with
[dw_corr_series_comp_direction_with-0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-211 Adjustment of the Series Compensation for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence
System
The voltage drop on the series capacitor VC0 is subtracted from the measured voltage 3V0meas. The resulting
voltage 3V0Dir is then assigned to the direction-characteristic curve of the ground-fault protection (see
Figure 6-211).
NOTE
i If a teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection is used, it must be ensured that the direction meas-
urement at all line ends is carried out using the same procedure. The setting for the Polarization with
parameter must be the same at all line ends. If a device is used at a line end that does not have all the
setting options, then the direction measurement must be limited to a single procedure that is possible at all
line ends, for example, only V0 (setting option V0 + IY (neutral pt.)).
712 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 713
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 · max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence
system V0
Example:
Max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence system V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 0.5 V = 0.60 Vsec
The setting value refers to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to the definition equation and not to 3V0,
as with the SIPROTEC 4 devices.
714 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[fofrbest-060110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this equation, V0 is the setting value for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter. SM is a reserve
(for example, 1.2).
As the ground-fault protection works with the zero-sequence or negative-sequence values, direct determina-
tion of the ground fault is not possible. To be able to implement 1-pole automatic reclosing despite high-resis-
tance ground faults, the ground fault protection has a phase selector. The phase selection detects whether a
1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred with the distribution of the currents. The phase selection
detects which phase is affected in the case of a 1-phase short circuit.
The phase selection filters the negative-sequence and the zero-sequence out of the phase currents. The fault
type, that is, whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred, is determined from the phase displace-
ment between the negative-sequence current and the zero-sequence current. The phase currents, purged of
the load current, are also evaluated from this. This utilizes the fact that, in the case of a 1-phase short circuit,
the healthy conductors can only conduct either no fault currents at all or only in-phase fault currents.
The phase selection has an action time of approx. 40 ms. If the phase selection is unable to make a decision in
this time, 3-phase is signaled.
6.10.11.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The S0 inverse stage and the V0 inverse stage do not pick up. The start of the time delay and
tripping are blocked. The stage signals this by way of a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 715
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loggfp13-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-212 Partial Logic Diagram for the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
You can extend the ground-fault protection by means of the integrated signal-transmission logic for direc-
tional comparison protection. You can find more detailed information on the possible transmission methods
and their function in section 6.11.1 Overview of Functions.
716 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10.13.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings (DS).
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-213). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically.
[lodynpar-260111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-213 Principle of Dynamic Settings in the Example of the 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If the following functionalities are available in the device, they can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the protection stage
or block it, if necessary. In the latter case, the settings for the threshold value and time delay are of no rele-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 717
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
vance. To each of the signals, the overcurrent-protection stage provides a configuration parameter Affected
by function... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration
settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, that is, whether the dynamic settings should
be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take
effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that the setting
assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard settings apply
again. Activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Where several signals are active in parallel, the specified priority applies. This means that a signal with priority
1 has precedence over a signal with priority 2. The settings assigned to signal 1 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
718 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[loeinawe-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the threshold value and time delay of the protection stage and
its blocking:
• AREC is ready for 1st reclosing (= AREC cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for 2nd reclosing (= AREC cycle 2)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 719
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpkal-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-215 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters
or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way the Cold-load pickup signal is generated is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup
Detection (Optional) .
[loeinbin-270111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you must
activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay parame-
ters or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
720 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Further application and setting notes can be found in the Overcurrent protection, phases and function in
chapter 6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 721
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
Information is exchanged with the remote station so that the ground-fault protection switches off immedi-
ately and selectively on the entire line for all errors. You can implement the teleprotection through reception
and transmission contacts or through a digital communication connection.
The Teleprotection methods are used in Protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combina-
tion with the Ground-fault protection function. The methods of the function illustrated in the following figure
are available.
[dwtestru-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-218 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the ground-fault protection and creates the respective
transmission signal for the transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is coupled either through:
• Binary Input
• Unblock logic
• Communication
For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and Rec.unblk.sig#
are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
The stage parameterized for the teleprotection method delivers the pickup information. This pickup informa-
tion is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled, the tele-
protection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
722 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lotefste-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. Detailed informa-
tion about the function control can be found in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
For the coupling of reception signals from opposite ends, the 3 reception block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Unblock reception and Protection interface reception are available. The teleprotection schemes described
in the following can be operated with the suitable reception blocks as needed.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 723
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the communication occurs through binary signals, this reception logic is used. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured, for example, with altogether 3 ends, 2 function blocks Reception are required.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity for double ground faults can be improved on parallel lines if
3 phase-selective transmission signals can be transferred per communication direction. The receipt signals can
thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-218.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the teleprotection schemes optionally with the unblocking method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
724 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so large that the reception from
the other line end is not provided
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 reception signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the reception of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-218.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital), this receipt logic is used. Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The
number and the identity of the devices that participate in the teleprotection scheme for protection of the line
configuration can be set in the function group Protection-data communication under Device configuration.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 725
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i Note that the teleprotection scheme requires a minimum bandwidth for communication via a protection
interface.
If the Line differential protection function is available in the device, the bit rate cannot be lower than
512 Kbps.
6.11.4.1 Description
[dwtevgve-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the ground-fault protection recognizes a fault in a forward direction, a send signal will be sent to the oppo-
site end. If the fault is also recognized in the forward direction, the received signal in the device on the oppo-
site end will lead to an increased trip.
[loteseve-310511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
With the parameters Send with, you can select which stage of the ground-fault protection affects the send
signal. The send condition is fulfilled if the selected stage - or stages - are picked up in a forward direction. If
the protection has already submitted a trip command, the send signal can be prolongated by a set time (_:
5761:101) Send prolongation. This allows for the release of the other cable end even if the short circuit
726 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
is very quickly switched off. With this, pickup differences between the cable ends and signal delays can be
considered.
If needed, the send signal can be delayed with (_:5761:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). The detailed description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description . No send signal is sent in
the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity of the permissive overreach transfer trip for double ground
faults can be improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective send signals are transferred per communication
direction. Send and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly as
individual signals (general).
[loteausv-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection scheme with which the ground-fault protection collabo-
rates.
If a reception signal is present, the stage set through the parameter (_:5761:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. You can set the time delay under Send delay.
With the parameter (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed, the tripping logic can allow for 1-pole trip
in 1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive overreach transfer trip for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is
used, the reception signals from all line ends are combined for the trip with AND.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 727
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• Expired time
For applications with delayed trip, a non-recurring receipt signal is only kept until the stage pickup returns.
Through this, it is guaranteed that the release signal is also present if the time-out of the corresponding time
delay releases the trip and the send signal of the protection of the opposite end is no longer imminent.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
overreach transfer trip. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by
a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The detailed
description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description .
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection schemes have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.
The functions are described in detail in the chapter Echo and Tripping in the event of weak infeed.
6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures
The various comparison procedures can be implemented by using both parameters Send with and Operate
with (see Figure 6-223 and Figure 6-224) . Additionally, you must observe the selection of the reception
block.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
Ground-fault comparison proce- One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
dure
Ground-fault unblock procedure One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
(unblock logic as a reception block)
728 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter 1-pole operate allowed, you allow 1-pole trip of the teleprotection method for 1-
phase faults or multi-phase faults and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole trip, Siemens recommends the
setting yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.
[dwtevgvf-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 729
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[dwteublv-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:
6.11.4.5 Settings
730 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 731
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.11.5.1 Description
[dwtefblo-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a ground fault in the backward direction, the blocking signal is sent to
the opposite end (signal Blocking). If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving
line end, it generates the trip signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotesblk-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is created in the event of pickup of the ground-fault protection in the backward or non-
directional direction. The threshold value for creation of the blocking signal is the percentage of the threshold
value of the level that affects tripping in the blocking procedure. The percentage is set with the parameter (_:
5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. in the teleprotection method. Further information can be
found in the section 6.11.7.1 Description .
732 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5791:101) Send prolonga-
tion , you can extend the blocking signal. Even if the error has already been cleared up locally, the opposite
end can continue to be blocked through this.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5791:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the ground-
fault protection recognizes an error in the forward direction, the blocking signal is immediately stopped and
the indication Stop is created.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-
jointly as individual signals.
[loteaubv-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection method with which the ground-fault protection works
together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5791:140) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup
times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. You can set the time delay with
the parameter (_:5791:107) Release delay .
The tripping can be delayed. You can set the time delay under (_:5761:102) Send delay .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 733
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a backward direction, a blocking signal is transmitted. If
the other cable end does not receive a blocking signal, the ground-fault protection trips in a forward direction
in the case of a ground-fault current. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end, single infeed
short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.
[dwteblve-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
734 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.
6.11.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 735
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.11.6.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
[lotetrbl-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period ((_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay). After the omission of the
blocking criteria, the transient blocking will be maintained for a set time ((_:5791:106) Trans. blk.
dropout delay).
736 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection can influence each other simultane-
ously. With the parameter Trans. block through, you can set if the transient blocking of the teleprotec-
tion for the distance protection should have an effect on the teleprotection of the ground-fault protection. The
mutual influence is meaningful if the teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection works
with a shared communication channel.
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are recom-
mended.
6.11.7.1 Description
In order to avoid a faulty echo during comparison, it must be ensured that an external ground-fault with a
flowing ground-fault current is recognized on both cable ends. During the blocking method and for the tran-
sient blocking, a secure blocking signal must be created under these conditions.
If the error is not recognized in a ground-fault in accordance with Figure 6-232 the protection in B, this would
be interpreted as an error fed-in from A. With a comparison, protection B would send an echo signal. For the
blocking procedure and for the transient blocking, the required blocking signal would not be created. The
consequence would be a faulty trip of the ground-fault protection in A.
[dwt3i0v1-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 737
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The teleprotection method with ground-fault protection has a sensitive ground-current stage (_:5791:104)
3I0 threshold rev./forw..
[lotsigzu-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the permissive overreach transfer trip, the sensitive ground-current stage has an effect on the echo func-
tion and the transient blocking. If the stage for the recognition of a backward fault in B is always more sensi-
tive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees an error from the other line end A in a
forward direction, no fault echo signal can result and the transient blocking will also work correctly.
With the blocking method, the sensitive ground-current stage is the threshold from which the blocking signal
is created if there are reverse errors. For this application, it also applies that the recognition of a reverse error
in B must be more sensitive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees the error from
the other cable end A in a forward direction. Thus, the blocking signal sent from B leads to the required
blocking of the trip ground-current stage on the cable end A.
The setting value for the sensitive ground-current stage is a percent value. For permissive overreach transfer
trips, it automatically relates to the threshold value of the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection,
which are connected with the permissive overreach transfer trip through the parameter Send with.
During the blocking procedure, the percentage setting value is automatically in regards to the stage or stages
of the ground-fault protection, which are connected with the blocking procedure through the parameter
Operate with.
6.11.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault Protection
738 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
fore be below half of the response value of the ground-current stage used for signal transmission. Addition-
ally, the considerations described above apply with regard to the capacitive ground current, which is not dealt
with in Figure 6-234. The conditions are more convenient for a ground-current distribution different than
assumed here, because then one of the 2 ground currents 3I0b or 3I0c must be greater than in the previous
consideration.
[dwt3i0v2-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-234 Possible Inconvenient Current Distribution through a Teed Feeder in the Event of an External
Ground Fault
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 739
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function is used to support the teleprotection method for distance
protection and ground-fault protection. Its use is only advisable, therefore, if you are using an appropriate
teleprotection method.
In the following situations, a permissive overreach transfer trip (signal comparison, directional comparison,
and directional unblock method) does not receive a release signal from the opposite end of the line:
• Lines with single-side infeed, from the end of the line without infeed
• Neutral-point grounding at just one end of the line, from the end of the line without residual current
• From the end of the line with no infeed or only weak infeed
To accelerate tripping at both ends of the line in these situations, the Echo and tripping on weak infeed
function supports the Echo function and the TWI function (TWI = tripping on weak infeed).
To trip the end of the line with a strong infeed, the echo function can be implemented at the end of the line
with a weak infeed. In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received
signal back to the other end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be enabled there.
The Echo function can also be used to test the signal connection between the protection devices in the
context of permissive underreach transfer trip.
You can also use the TWI function to trip the end of the line with missing or weak infeed. You can use the TWI
function together with permissive overreach transfer trips and permissive underreach transfer trip.
Please note that the function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function comprises the subfunctions shown in the following figure.
The function is used in the Line function group.
[dwwnstru-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 2 subfunctions Echo and tripping on weak infeed receive control signals from the teleprotection method
for distance protection and ground-fault protection in the local device; see the following figure.
740 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[dwwnfblk-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received signal back to the other
end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be released there.
Echo Release
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with distance protection is generated as
follows:
[lodisecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-237 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Distance Protection
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with ground-fault protection is gener-
ated as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 741
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[loeksecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-238 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Ground-Fault Protection
Echo Logic
There are 2 echo logics. Structured in exactly the same way, they are assigned to the distance protection and
ground-fault protection functions. The echo logic is shown in the following figure.
[lodisecl-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The time delay (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay takes effect when the echo release for
distance protection or ground-fault protection is set. This time delay is necessary if the pickup time for the
protection function at the weak end of the line is higher for a reverse fault or if the protection function picks
up later due to unfavorable short-circuit or ground-current distribution. The echo is transmitted at the end of
the time delay. If the circuit-breaker position at the end of the line without infeed is 3-pole open, the echo
time delay is not necessary. The echo time delay is bypassed.
You can set the length of the echo pulse with the (_:5821:103) Echo pulse parameter.
The circuit-breaker position is signaled centrally by the process monitor.
A new echo cannot be transmitted for at least 50 ms (default setting of the (_:5821:101) Echo block
time after Tx parameter) once the echo pulse has been released or for the duration of the send signal
742 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
associated with the release method currently in use. This prevents the echo from being repeated immediately
after the line is disconnected.
[lokankoo-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 743
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[loasephe-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-241 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Ground Voltages (Grounded Systems)
For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, the phase-to-phase voltages are used as the
criteria for undervoltage detection. Phase-selective detection of weak infeed is not possible.
[loasephp-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-242 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Isolated or Resonant-Grounded
Systems)
The TWI function is used to trip the circuit breaker at the end of the line with missing or weak infeed.
744 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[lownfrei-310511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Phase-selective TWI pickup is triggered if a weak infeed is detected and a receive signal from the teleprotection
scheme for distance protection or ground-fault protection is pending at the same time. On TWI pickup, the trip
logic of the associated method triggers the trip signal.
TWI pickup and thus tripping can be delayed with the parameterizable time (_:5821:102) Echo and
operate delay. TWI pickup is also delayed by the release time (_:5821:103) Echo pulse. Synchroni-
zation between echo and TWI is achieved by both functions using the same time parameters.
The TWI function can be blocked via the phase-selective signals TWI block. This prevents false pickups, for
example, due to switch-off processes on the line in question or on the parallel line. All phases not picked up
for a 3-pole TWI operate are blocked for 250 ms. If another protection function trips, all 3 phases are blocked
for 250 ms. In the event of a cleared reverse pickup of 1 phase of the corresponding function (depending on
the source of Dis or EF), all 3 phases are blocked for 50 ms.
To select the Echo and tripping on weak infeed function, use the function library with DIGSI.
The function is designed for working together with permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive over-
reach transfer trips. The function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The function contains the following parameters:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 745
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
6.12.6 Settings
746 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 747
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification:
• Also switches off the line end with weak infeed with a short circuit on the line
• Selects the faulty phases via a relative undervoltage threshold
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is used in the func-
tion group Line.
The function is preconfigured with an Instantaneous stage and a Delayed stage. The undervoltage and 3I0
detection settings are in the General function block and apply to all stages.
[dw_struck-3I0-erkennung, 1, en_US]
748 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.13.3.1 Description
Logic
[lo_unterspann-3I0-erkennung, 2, en_US]
Undervoltage Detection
The faulty phases are selected via undervoltage detection. The threshold value of the undervoltage detection
is dynamic and results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase voltage and the Vph-g< factor.
This accounts for operational deviations from the rated voltage in the undervoltage threshold.
The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase voltages of the last 500 ms. The average
value is held via a voltage memory for an adjustable time (Time constant Tau). Changes in the phase-to-
phase voltage thus have an effect on the undervoltage threshold in a time-delayed manner. When a phase
picks up, the most recently determined voltage threshold of the picked-up phase is held until generation of
the operate indication. The voltage threshold is thus not affected by the error in the case of long time delays.
The undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases.
If the stored phase-to-phase voltage drops below the √3 ⋅ Threshold Vph-gnd< threshold, an undervoltage
detection is no longer possible in the respective phase.
Since positive feedback results from tripping, that is, the measured fault condition cannot be removed by trip-
ping, the pickup of both stages automatically drops out again after tripping of at least one stage. If the present
voltage exceeds the dropout threshold again, renewed pickup is possible after a maximum of 1 s.
NOTE
i The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is suited for use
only in grounded systems.
3I0 Detection
The Instantaneous and the Delayed stage both use 3I0 detection. If the zero-sequence current exceeds the
3I0> threshold, the 3I0 detection picks up and generates the indication 3I0> exceeded. If the pickup
drops out, the indication 3I0> exceeded is held for an adjustable time T 3I0> extension.
The Health of the function is set to Warning in the event of a measuring-voltage failure.
If the measured voltage values or the 3I0 measured values are invalid, Health is set to Alarm and the stage/
function is blocked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 749
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
750 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.13.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_unverz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
If the input signal >Receive from the remote end is received and an undervoltage is simultaneously
detected, the Instantaneous stage generates an operate indication. The input signal >Receive is held for
an adjustable time (parameter: Receive extension ) so that tripping is also possible in case of a fast
dropout of the signal from the opposite end.
As long as the Distance protection function has picked up in a phase or after a line has been tripped, the
pickup of the Instantaneous stage is blocked. The Instantaneous stage is blocked until the input signal
>Receive drops off again.
If no undervoltage is detected while the input signal >Receive is on, but the 3I0> threshold is
exceeded, an internal fault on the line is indicated. If this state lasts longer than 500 ms, a 3-pole operate indi-
cation is generated.
The Instantaneous stage works only if the binary input signal >Receive OK indicates correct functioning of
the communication channel.
The Instantaneous stage can also be blocked via the phase-segregated signals TWI block. False pickups, for
example, after switching off the local line end are thereby avoided.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 751
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
You use the Operating mode parameter to define whether the Instantaneous stage is enabled or disabled.
752 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.13.5.1 Description
Logic
[lo_verz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
With the Delayed stage you can still trip the local line end even in case of a failure in the communication
channel. The Delayed stage picks up in a phase-segregated way with a detected undervoltage and trips after
a configurable time. Depending on how the stage (1-pole operate allowed or 3-pole operate
allowed) functions, different time delays take effect (Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) or Op. delay
multi-ph. (TT)). If no tripping is indicated even after expiration of the the times TM and TT following the
pickup, the voltage memory is reset and the pickup drops out.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 753
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
In the following cases, the phase selection is blocked via the undervoltage detection:
• The internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker or Measuring-voltage failure
detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
754 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
You can use the 3-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 3-pole tripping or not.
6.13.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 755
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
756 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit-breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
• Links the teleprotection scheme (permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive overreach transfer
trip) for direct trip command transfer with the signal from the other line end
The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals function comes factory-set with 1 tripping stage. A
maximum of 1 stage can be operated in the function. The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals
function can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dwstrext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 757
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation
[lotripha-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-249 Logic Diagram for the External Trip Initiation for Phase-Segregated Signals Stage
Output Signals
The function provides the binary output signals Pickup, Operate delay expired and Operate. The
signals are available phase-selective.
758 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 External Trip Initiation
6.14.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 759
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• The automatic reclosing can occur through an external automatic reclosing function via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosing after switching off through a short-circuit protection is taken over by the automatic
reclosing function (AREC). The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time
automatic reclosing where the second automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw2awewz-090210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-250 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing With Action Time (2nd Reclosing Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption
cycles can work with different parameters.
The automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.
[dwfktawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
760 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can add
and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
[dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwaweasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-253 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
[dwextawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-254 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 761
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.
• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started, the
blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of special
stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the automatic reclosing function provides a signal, based on which
the protection functions can turn off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For the application with 1-pole tripping and stage or zone release through the automatic reclosing func-
tion, this function provides a signal that uses the protection functions that lets the stage and zone release
act only if a 1-pole faults occurs.
762 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loawesig-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-256 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-256. The configuration occurs in a matrix view
in DIGSI, see Figure 6-257.
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be created separately
• For starting the automatic reclosing function and
• For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function.
The automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal automatic reclosing function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 763
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-257 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
Table 6-7 Operating modes of the cylindrical automatic reclosing function in accordance with tripping
behaviors
764 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• During a 1-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 1-pole dead times are
set.
The following example in Figure 6-258 shows a 1-pole tripping that comes after expiration of the action time
of cycle 1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is set to make a
1-pole tripping possible. Cycle 2 will now become active with the settings for 1-pole tripping.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and a 3-pole tripping. Since cycle 2 is already
complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The second trip command comes during the
current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 becomes active with the settings for 3-phase trippings.
[dwawebx1-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func-
tion. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with
longer tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed
faults this does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time
allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on 1- or 3-pole tripping and the trip time of the
protection function(s).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 765
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active
with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dwarcbm2-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
766 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dwawebs3-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dwarcbs4-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 767
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or it goes
into the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the
individual function blocks are described in detail.
[lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
768 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lobtaaus-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 769
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lobtaanr-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.15.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-265. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
770 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• The circuit breaker must be 3-pole closed before the trip command. This condition is not considered if the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead-time state through the binary input >Dead Time Start Delay. As long
the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not be
started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set, param-
eter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is present
longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary signal,
additionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings.
[logistar-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 771
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-266, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Accordingly, the automatic reclosing does not occur if Dead time aft. 1-
pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic reclosing
cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the associated
automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead to
1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
772 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-266 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-267, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 773
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
774 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-267 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time
6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-268, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective auto-
matic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 775
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead to
1-pole tripping.
[loauowrk-210311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-268 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-269, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
776 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
[loanowrk-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-269 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 777
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
release will be returned at the start of the 1-pole dead time. This is necessary, since every additional evolving
fault that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic reclosing func-
tion can no longer take place.
[lo1awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-270 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical to
the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.
[lo2awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-271 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting with the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
778 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the first disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault to
invalid, no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The trip-
ping through evolving faults is then finished.
3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Condition With 1-Pole Tripping And Implausible Circuit-Breaker Condition
With applications with 1-pole tripping, during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned
trip command and the current flow in the open conductor. If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected pole-selectively, the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. More
information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .
The plausibility check determines whether the circuit-breaker poles that have not been switched off after a 1-
pole trip command remain closed.
For an implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip-command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed, provided the trip-command synchronization through the parameter is permitted (parameter 3-
pole operate by 79). After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole automatic reclosing
cycles may follow.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 779
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lopauaul-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-272 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
780 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lopauare-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-273 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: with
Pickup
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 781
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dwbspffe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-274 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
782 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-275.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.
3-Pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker for Automatic Reclosing Function Blocking through Evolving Faults in a 1-Pole
Dead Time
If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead time
without a protection function submitting a 3-pole trip command, for example, during an evolving-fault detec-
tion with pickup, the automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole trip command. Thus, the circuit breaker
will have 3-pole tripping in which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur.
[lo_fofeer_080115, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 783
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing indi-
cation, the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state.
[loeinsha-141111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-276 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication
784 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsvoei-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-277 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before
Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-278. You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[losyncro-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-278 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 785
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the auto-
matic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic reclosing
function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 1-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the first cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the second cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the auto-
matic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
• With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.
786 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-279 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Reclaim Time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 787
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-280 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see
Figure 6-281):
• Detection of a non-closed circuit breaker before the start:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, a non-3-pole closed circuit breaker leads to the blocking
of the automatic reclosing function, see also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings. This monitoring is not needed
if the auxiliary-contact signals are not available.
• After a 1-pole trip, a check is done during the dead time to determine whether the circuit-breaker poles
that were not switched off remain closed. The circuit-breaker position recognition is delivered from the
central circuit-breaker position recognition of the Circuit-breaker function group.
For implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed provided the settings allows this. After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole
automatic reclosing cycles may follow, see also chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with
Tripping.
788 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lolsuebe-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-281 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision
6.15.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-282:
• Static blocking
• Dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The static blocking is signaled with the
indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for AREC, recognition through Inactive
binary input. This cause can be switched on or off via the param-
eter CB ready check bef.close.
Circuit breaker not closed on 3-poles, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 789
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
• AREC cycle is not set.
• AREC cycles are set, but all are blocked, for example, via
binary input.
• There is no device-internal function and no binary input
configured for starting the Automatic reclosing function.
• With operating modes with tripping:
– both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary
inputs
• With operating modes with pickup:
– 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase AREC cycles are blocked
via binary inputs.
• With operating modes without action time:
– the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary
input.
• With the dead-line check functionality:
– if the voltage measurement is not available or is
disrupted
Dynamic Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is blocked dynamically if a blocking condition occurs while an Automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can be
removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime, the
blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the Automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
Condition Indication
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
• With operating modes with tripping: Block. by no cycle
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs at the auto-
matic reclosing function starting process, however, the
Automatic reclosing function does not start in accordance
with the parameterization for this type of tripping, the
respective dead time will be set to invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs at
the automatic reclosing function starting process, but the
Automatic reclosing function may not be started in accord-
ance with the parameterization for this type of pickup.
If a protection function causes the Automatic reclosing function Not ready
to be blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the Not ready
dead time through the binary input >Dead time start Blk.by max. d.t. delay
delay expires without the binary input becoming inactive
during this period of time
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time extension are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command
790 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
If the query of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time extension expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead time Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the starting-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the AREC or the starting binary input expires. Blk.by strtsig.superv.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the AREC a dead time is already running and a Not ready
blocking binary input is active, with the following binary inputs: Block. by binary input
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of Automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not
fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 791
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-282 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Blocking Logic as an Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and
Dynamic Blocking)
792 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
By displaying the message 79 permits 1-pole trip (see Figure 6-282 in Section 6.15.4.17 Blockings)
the automatic reclosing function signals the 1-pole tripping option of the circuit breaker within the associated
function group of the circuit breaker.
Subject to the following conditions, the message 79 permits 1-pole trip will neither be generated nor
reset:
• during the current 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle if a blocking of the automatic reclosing func-
tion occurs prior to the reclosing
• If an automatic reclosing function start is signaled with 2-pole tripping, for example, through external
binary inputs
• During operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole trip indication and the automatic reclosing
function does not allow for 1-pole cycles in accordance with their parameterization.
• If during a 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle the monitoring of the circuit-breaker pole recognizes
an implausible condition.
The automatic reclosing function may generate a 3-pole trip command (3-pole intertrip), if a blocking of the
automatic reclosing function occurs based on the above-mentioned causes, e.g., during the detection of an
evolving fault with pickup and blocking of evolving faults. Thus, the circuit breaker will have 3-pole tripping in
which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur, see also Chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for
Operating Modes with Tripping.
• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 793
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.
794 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-283 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check
6.15.4.20 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 795
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
796 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 797
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
798 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.5.1 Description
Description
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line side or a possi-
bility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
Figure 6-284 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at the
end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it exists,
so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time
(RDT) ) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set under
voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage
measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final disconnection occurs.
[dwarcasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.
• With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III, no further disruption cycles may occur here
because the short-circuit path via busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with multiple
reclosing.
• At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching can occur at position I.
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (RDT), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (RDT) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ADT).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 799
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.5.2 Settings
800 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 801
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.6.1 Description
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.
802 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching zone
with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 803
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
For the automatic reclosing function, there are 3 functions available in the function library. In each circuit-
breaker function group, a function from the automatic reclosing function can be used.
Configure one of the 3 following function specifications:
• Cyclic automatic reclosing function
• Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT)
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-286 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function or Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead
time function, set the following settings under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control
occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.
• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
804 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
You can use the 79 operating mode parameter to determine which start criteria the automatic reclosing
function works with.
Parameter Value Description
with op., with act. The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s). The start occurs with all protection function(s) or
protection stages that are configured through the automatic reclosing function
start matrix.
Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole trip-
ping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, independent
of the type of connection working, is required in the automatic reclosing func-
tion cycle.
Detailed information can be found in Chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating mode 1
w.pickup, w. action The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s) and the type of fault. The start occurs with all protec-
tion function(s) or protection stages that are configured through the automatic
reclosing function start matrix.
For applications with 3-pole tripping and dead time dependent on the circuit
type, Siemens recommends this setting.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 2
with op., w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The start occurs
time with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 3
w.pickup, w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The automatic
time reclosing function cycles are dependent on the type of fault. The start occurs
with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 4
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 805
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
806 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
NOTE
i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
• The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay. With
this, you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the
busbar, no automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)
• During a 1-pole trip command repeat caused by the circuit-breaker failure protection, the start supervi-
sion time must be longer than the delay time for the 1-pole trip command repeat. With this, it can be
ensured that the trip command is not connected before the 1-pole trip command repeat through the
circuit-breaker failure protection from the trip-command synchronization of the 3-pole automatic
reclosing function.
• The start supervision time must be longer than the time delay for the tripping of the busbars if a 1-
pole trip command for the line branch should not be coupled by the automatic reclosing function or
the circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole before the circuit-breaker failure protection can trip the
busbars. With this case, the automatic reclosing function must be blocked with the trip command for
the busbars. This helps to avoid an automatic reclosing function being executed after the tripping of
the busbars for the line branch. The blocking of the automatic reclosing function can occur with a CFC
link to the binary input >Block function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 807
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the chapters 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating
Modes with Tripping, 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
808 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Delay through binary input in order e.g. to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority in a
system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and
Close Command .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 809
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .
NOTE
i Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This
is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
810 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip, Dead time aft. 1-pole trip
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with tripping.
• Default setting (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip = 0.5 s
NOTE
i If you would like to permit the automatic reclosing function only after a 1-pole tripping of the circuit
breaker, set the dead time after the 3-pole trip (parameter dead time after 3-pole OFF) to ∞. If the auto-
matic reclosing function should only occur after a 3-pole trip, set the dead time after the 1-pole trip
(parameter Dead time aft. 1-pole trip) to ∞. Therefore, all protection functions will be tripped as
3-pole after each type of fault.
After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is priority. Since the switched off line cannot
develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted in most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s to
0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried out prior to reclosing. Even in radial systems
longer 3-pole dead times are possible. The dead time after a 1-pole trip of the circuit breaker must be long
enough to ensure the short circuit arc has extinguished and the ambient air is deionized. It is only then that
the automatic reclosing function can be successful. Due to the charge reversal of the conducted capacity, this
time is longer, depending on the length of the line. Standard durations are between 0.9 s and 1.5 s.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 811
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with pickup.
• Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
• The parameter Dead time aft.2ph. pickup applies to dead times after 2-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
• The parameter Dead time aft.3ph. pickup applies to dead times after 3-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
NOTE
i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 sec. The automatic
reclosing function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
• Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
• Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
812 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 813
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (50/51 OC-3ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, phases – basic (50/51 OC-3ph-B)
Only the Advanced function type is available in the devices of the line protection family. The Basic function
type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the Overcurrent protection, phase – advanced function type, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
814 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpap1-210113-01.tif, 4, en_US]
[dwocpbp1-210113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 815
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
Logic
[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters
h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes. Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
816 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Overcurrent
protection, phases – advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the functional measured values are shown as ---.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 817
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.3.3 Settings
818 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.4.1 Description
[loocp3b1-280113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-290 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 819
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[Lo_ocp_umz_ad.vsd, 1, en_US]
820 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3p1-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-292 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 821
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of thePhase function group. In the function group Line, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.
822 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[sccmpoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-294 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 823
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.16.9.1 Description .
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
824 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
[foocpph1-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 825
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[fo_ocpph4_030311, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocp004-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .
Parameter: I0 elimination
826 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
6.16.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 827
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
828 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 829
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
830 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.5.1 Description
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Stage
with definite-time characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.16.4.1 Description .
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You can additionally limit the setting range for the Threshold parameter by user-specific minimum/
maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter in a better way to the specific
application cases.
You can additionally define a minimum and maximum value for the setting range of the Threshold param-
eter and store it in various settings groups, for example. If you switch the settings groups, you can quickly and
flexibly adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter to different application cases.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group
Switching.
NOTE
i You can find the description of the additional parameters of the stage in chapter 6.16.4.1 Description .
6.16.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 831
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
832 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 833
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
834 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.6.1 Description
[loocp3b2-280113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-295 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 835
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[Lo_ocp_amz_ad.vsd, 1, en_US]
836 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3p2-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-297 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 837
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[DwOcp3Mi_20140715-01, 1, en_US]
838 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of the Phase function group. In the function group Phase, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.
[sccmpoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-300 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 839
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is operating.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .
840 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 841
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
[foocp005-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Parameter: I0 elimination
842 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Reset
6.16.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 843
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
844 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 845
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.7.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.16.6.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
846 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-301 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 847
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
NOTE
848 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.7.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 849
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
850 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 851
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.8.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking.
Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see chapter 11.53 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect
can the blocking be set.
[loocp3pha-210812-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-302 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
852 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.16.9.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-303). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is
only available in function type Advanced.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 853
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[loocp3dpa-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-303 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be
active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is,
instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal
becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
854 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
[loocp3awe-040311-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 855
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)
[loocp3kal-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-305 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to
Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions.
[loocp3bin-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must
activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
856 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent stage (1st stage) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to be
used as fast stage before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 857
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)
Only the function type Advanced is available in the devices of the line protection family. The function type
Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
858 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dwocpga1-060213-01.tif, 5, en_US]
[dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 4, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
6.17.3.1 Description
Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 859
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loMasValue-201507-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase +
IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN
urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate
860 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
6.17.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 861
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.4.1 Description
[loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-310 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic
862 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgr1-081111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-311 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 863
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.
864 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 865
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
[fo_ocp005_030311, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocpgr4-030311-01.tif, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
866 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
6.17.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 867
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
868 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 869
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
870 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 871
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
872 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.5.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gr2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-312 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 873
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgn2-291112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-313 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
874 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[Dwocpgr3Mi_20140716-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 875
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.
876 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 877
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.17.5.3 Settings
878 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 879
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
880 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.17.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 881
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-315 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.
882 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 883
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.6.3 Settings
884 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 885
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
886 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.7.1 Description
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-
current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 11.53 Inrush-Current
Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[loocpgrd-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-316 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 887
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.17.8.1 Description
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending on
other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function type
Advanced.
888 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[loocpgnd-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-317 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 889
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
[loocpgrnd-040311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
890 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 2 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 2)
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-319 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional) .
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-320 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 891
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional) .
[loocpbingnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
892 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 893
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurements.
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function comes factory-set with 2 Definite time-overcur-
rent protection stages and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage. In this function, the following
stages can be operated simultaneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection
894 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp01-190912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
6.18.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 895
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lodocp02-251110-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Emergency Mode
You can use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcur-
rent protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. With the
setting Emergency mode = caused by binary input, the emergency mode can also be activated from
an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
896 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the func-
tion.
Parameter Value Description
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection can
no longer operate, directional overcurrent protection automatically starts to
operate. Main protection can no longer work in the following situations:
• Main protection, distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
The use of directional overcurrent protection in emergency mode is
not recommended in this case, as the function also requires voltage
measurement (for direction determination). Non-directional overcur-
rent protection is the appropriate emergency mode.
• Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure
caused by binary input Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 897
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lodocp01-141013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-324 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ).
898 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Dropout delay
If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings ,
Page 900 and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description )
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 899
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
900 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:8311:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable (one
grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function
fails.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in the chapters 6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 901
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.18.4.3 Settings
902 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 903
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
904 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 905
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
906 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 907
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.5.1 Description
[lodocp03-120612-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-325 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.18.7.1 Description ).
908 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[DwDocpMin_040715-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 909
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings , Page 910 and chapter 6.16.9.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .
910 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 911
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Parameter: Reset
912 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 913
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
914 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 915
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.6.1 Description
This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
916 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-327 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 917
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve
is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.00.
Parameter: Reset
NOTE
6.18.6.3 Settings
918 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 919
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
920 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.7.1 Description
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 921
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp02-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient for
reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after the
storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain any voltages
(when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non-direc-
tional pickup parameter.
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit
922 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-329 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φSC. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
[dwdocp03-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range; see Figure 6-330. The forward range is
calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is located in
this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on the back-
ward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
[dwdocp04-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 923
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The influence of other functions via dynamic settings is described in the chapters 6.16.9.1 Description and
6.16.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) (Application and Setting Notes).
924 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
[dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwdocp06-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 925
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used for
the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are isolated
in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-333. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite time-overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite time-overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following situa-
tions:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
[dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The device
uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period. In
contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss of
communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indicated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it you
must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum-
926 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
stances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of
failure followed by a system incident.
• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the oppo-
site end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
• A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 927
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
• Instantaneous breaking of extremely high currents above the highest overcurrent protection stage.
• Trips 1- or 3-pole.
[dwihcstr-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
928 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Logic
[lohlore1-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-335 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the (_:3961:101) Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open) or if
the circuit breaker is being closed or the binary input signal>release is active. The way signals are generated
Rel. by CB switch on is described in section 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and from the
binary input signal >release.
• only with binary signal
The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 929
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Parameter: Activation
Parameter: Threshold
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[foglchzv-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
930 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
[foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1,496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to
be protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
NOTE
i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.
This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 931
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Logic
[lohinre1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-336 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for
further information, see chapter 5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
NOTE
i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of
the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be routed).
932 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Parameter: Threshold
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.
6.19.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 933
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
934 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.20.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
[loocgrin-240112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 935
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are available:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)
The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection (UMZ)
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ)
• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection
The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-338 and Figure 6-339 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-
delay characteristic curve, the Definite-time overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse-time overcurrent
protection stage, the Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage, and the User-defined char-
acteristic curve-time overcurrent protection stage are structured identically.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.
936 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 4, en_US]
[dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 937
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.3.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
938 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.
Related Topics
6.16.8.1 Description
• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 939
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.3.3 Settings
940 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.4.1 Description
[lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 941
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.
942 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.21.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 943
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
944 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.5.1 Description
Figure 6-342 Logic Diagram of the Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
(see chapter 6.21.4.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.21.4.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 945
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/
Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve deter-
mines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the charac-
teristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit.
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
I 1-phase current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.
946 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 947
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
With the parameter Additional time delay, you set an additional current-independent time delay. This
additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.21.5.3 Settings
948 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.6.1 Description
The User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func-
tion type.
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-344 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 949
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
950 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
NOTE
6.21.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 951
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used for generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals and the
overcurrent pickup should be kept depending on the fault voltages
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory-set stages:
• Inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stage
• Definite-time overcurrent protection, undervoltage seal-in stage
In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-dependent stages
• A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent protection, voltage-released stages
[dw_stuvol_release, 3, en_US]
952 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.3.1 Description
[lovoldep-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 953
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwvolpic-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence
The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further even
not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Table 6-11.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed.
954 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by 1.045 times (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to the characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical data.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.8.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 955
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
956 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
6.22.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 957
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.4.1 Description
[lovolrel-210713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
chapter 6.22.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the
operate curve.
958 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-347.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 959
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.4.3 Settings
960 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.5.1 Description
[lo_Seal-in_20150215, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-349 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 961
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
Parameter: Threshold
962 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]
6.22.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 963
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
964 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.6.1 Description
[lo_Seal-in_Rel20150215, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-350 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 1
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 965
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_Seal-in_Rel2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-351 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 2
Voltage Release
In addition to the current criterion with undervoltage seal-in, a voltage-released logic must be present to issue
the indication Pickup. The voltage-released logic monitors the negative-sequence voltage and phase-to-
phase voltages respectively for detecting unsymmetrical faults and symmetrical faults. With the voltage-
released logic, the setting value of the parameter Threshold can be reduced in a certain range and the relia-
bility and sensibility of this function can be improved correspondingly.
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
966 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 967
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.22.6.3 Settings
968 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 969
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: a directional one and a non-directional one.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns) serves:
• For directional detection of permanent ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems
970 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwStrGFP-250113-01, 5, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 971
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwSGFPu4-230113-01, 5, en_US]
6.23.3.1 Description
Logic
[LoGFPger-280113-01, 7, en_US]
Figure 6-354 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Directional Function
972 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[logfpnon-261012-01.tif, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-355 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function
[DwPhINU0, 1, en_US]
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending on
the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously falling
zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered extin-
guished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the angle
error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 973
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwerdwdl-110512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-357 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
NOTE
i The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed to the ground-fault log. If not, you can
meet an overflow of the ground-fault log when an intermittent ground fault occurs.
Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes, all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-
fault log, for example, the indication Ground fault . The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed
indications.
Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault login chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log.
Value Indications
If the following value indications can be calculated, they are written into the log (ground-fault log or fault log)
at the time of the 1st raising ground-fault indication and the 1st operate indication of any stage.
• 3I0 (value)
• 3I0 active component
974 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• V0
• φ (IN, V0)
6.23.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 975
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.4.1 Description
Logic
[logfp3i0stufe-280314-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
976 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[logfp3i0f-280314-01, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-359 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 977
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the setting of the Connection type parameter of the measuring point I-3ph as well as the
current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the
common application:
Connection Type of the Current Threshold 3I0/IN Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Measuring Point I-3ph Settings Range
(Secondary)21
3-phase Calculated 3I022 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN23 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep Measured IN and calculated 3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep Measured IN 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point Current Threshold Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
I-1ph Settings Range
(Secondary) 24
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, especially
the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (parameter
21 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
22 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
23 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
24 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
978 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 ⋅ cos φ is decisive for the direction determination.
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0reactive axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is
decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 979
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwphicor-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-361 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0, the
symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis. Since the
portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3l0dir.),
here, the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here = 3I0reac-
tive) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward. If the
current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
980 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwsinphi-011112-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 981
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
982 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 983
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.4.3 Settings
984 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.5.1 Description
Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems often extinguish a short time after the igni-
tion, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In order
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 985
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special method of measurement
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are not
suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs in
healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by an energy-integrating method to determine the
ground-fault direction. This method ensures high sensitivity and positive stability against parasitic signals in
the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process in healthy phases, those errors
will be detected as well.
This stage is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating zero-
sequence currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.
Stage-Control Logic
[lostuwis-240113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
986 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[lowisfut-240113-01.tif, 8, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 987
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Operational, meaning circulating zero-sequence currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems. This
type of zero-sequence current is also present in case of a failure and can falsify the directional result. There-
fore, an operational zero-sequence current is eliminated.
• The true RMS value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold value.
In this way, high-impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence system values rise
only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the
exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:2311:302) Ground fault of the function
block General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the func-
tion.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.
988 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is not influenced by switching oper-
ations and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching procedure. The
condition that the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold value for
reporting the direction result effectively suppresses the influence of switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time ranges after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion based on the positive-sequence current is also effective. This criterion compares
the positive-sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection. In
case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition.
Thus a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence current
is not effective.
• The function detects transient ground faults using the zero-sequence voltage. In systems with opera-
tional zero-sequence voltages, if the measuring voltage is switched on, the function can internally be
started. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage does not exceed the threshold
of the Maximum operational V0 parameter in a time slot of 100 ms after the function start, the func-
tion is reset internally.
Trip Logic
[loauswis-240113-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 989
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to disable a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If
the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the
tripping delay (Operate delay parameter) starts with the pickup. If the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked is set to no, the stage operates when the tripping delay expires.
An intermittent ground fault has the characteristics of periodical extinction and reignition within one half
period up to several periods. You can find more information in chapter 6.25.1 Overview of Functions. Due to
the tripping delay and the too short fault durations (contact to ground), reliable tripping is not possible. To
ensure reliable tripping under such conditions, the parameter Dropout delay can be used. When the fault
extinguishes, the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 drop below the
threshold values. A dropout can be delayed for a time specified with the Dropout delay parameter. The
tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires within the dropout delay, the stage operates. You can
set the Dropout delay according to the application. The default setting is 0 s. The setting of the dropout
delay does not affect the direction determination. When the fault reignites, a new direction determination
takes place if the function has dropped out before. If the determined direction is opposite to the parameter-
ized direction or is unknown, the tripping delay is reset immediately.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
990 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 991
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
992 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 993
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The stage type 3I0> with cos φ or sin φ measurement is suited for directional detection of intermittent
ground faults. Many years of field experience and field tests have shown that the direction determination of
this stage type reliably determines the direction of the current peaks. Between the current peaks, the direction
is detected as unknown. To generate a tripping or an alarm, you can analyze the individual pickups of a stage
(each directional pickup corresponds to a current peak) in a time-based way or count them via an additional
user logic (CFC chart).
You can also ensure the result in the user logic via a 2nd directional stage that works in the backward direc-
tion, as well as a V0 stage.
You can operate a 3rd directional stage in parallel for detection of permanent ground faults.
In the following, certain settings are explained that are necessary for this application (detection of intermittent
ground faults):
• Parameter: (_:2311:102) Dropout delay
The function must treat the intermittent process as one ground fault. For this, it is necessary that the
indication Ground fault does not drop out between 2 consecutive current peaks. This is ensured via
the Dropout delay parameter (FB General). A dropout delay of 1 s is a feasible value.
994 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.7.1 Description
Logic
[logfppvi-291112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 995
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Figure 6-367 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement
996 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 977.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can be
rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the vector
of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of direc-
tion determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. The value ±
Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. The remaining area besides the forward area is the
reverse area. Between the forward and reverse area, a hysteresis is defined, refer to Figure 6-368.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 997
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dwdirrot-011112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]
Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
998 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 999
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
area by a few degrees is practical, for example, in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.
6.23.7.3 Settings
1000 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.8.1 Description
Logic
[lo_stage_control_Y0G0B0, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1001
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[LoY0G0B0-300713-01, 6, en_US]
1002 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.
Y0, G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
choose to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[DwY0Dire-171012-01, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0 axis.
The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for this
example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direc-
tion-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the active
component G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and
compared with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the
positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value,
the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1003
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-372. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
[DwY0meas-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-372 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir.
(B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is forward. If
the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between,
the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
1004 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[DwSiCoY0-011112-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1005
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
1006 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only the component of the admittance perpendicular to
the set direction-characteristic curve is decisive, see chapter 6.23.8.1 Description. This admittance component
is compared to the threshold value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. In contrast, the absolute value of the
current 3I0 is compared with the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter.
System Type/ Description
Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0
• φ correction = 0.0°
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger reactive current of capacitive or inductive character is superimposed on the small
watt-metric residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and
the fault evaluation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary consider-
ably in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device
should only evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Polarized
G0/B0 threshold parameter, the following formula applies:
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt-metric residual current) of
the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0 must
also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1007
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.02
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
1008 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.
6.23.8.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1009
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.9.1 Description
The Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic is based on a continuous measuring direc-
tion-determination method. The stage determines the direction via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasors of
the zero-sequence voltage V0 and current 3I0.
1010 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
Figure 6-374 Logic Diagram of the Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1011
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Figure 6-375 Logic Diagram of the Start Conditions and of the Direction Determination
• The absolute value of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the threshold Min. 3I0>
harmonic when the timer Dir. determination delay expires.
1012 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
To carry out the direction determination, the following condition must also be met in addition to the
preceding 2 conditions:
The zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm. must exceed the threshold which is 0.02 % of the secondary
rated voltage of the voltage transformer. If this condition is not met, the direction result is unknown.
The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal.
The stage pickup depends on the direction result and on the Directional mode parameter:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the direc-
tion result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined direction.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.
Direction Determination
With the Harmonic selection parameter, you can select the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor for direction
determination. The direction is determined via the calculation of the phase angle between the following
values:
• Zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm.
• Rotated zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm., indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref,rot
The reference voltage is rotated by the angle +90° in relation to V0. This provides the maximum security for
the direction determination assuming that 3I0harm. is a reactive current.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. For details, refer to Figure 6-376.
The areas in the following figure are as follows:
• The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. You can set the value
± Δφ with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is forward.
• The mirror area of the forward area is the reverse area. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is reverse.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1013
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Stabilization Counter
To determine a reliable direction result, the function uses a stabilization counter. For indicating a direction
result, the determined direction must be stable for 4 successive measuring cycles. The cycle time is 10 ms.
Direction-Result Extension
With the timer Dir.-result extension, you can extend the last determined direction result if the condi-
tions for a further direction determination are no longer met. The last direction result is held until the condi-
tions for a further direction determination are met again (timer is reset) or until the timer expires. The
behavior of the direction-result extension varies according to the setting of the Directional mode param-
eter:
• Directional mode = forward or reverse
As soon as the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. or the zero-sequence harmonic voltage
V0harm. falls below its respective dropout value, the timer Dir.-result extension starts. If the
direction result equals the setting of the Directional mode parameter, the last Pickup signal is also
extended.
If both 3I0harm. and V0harm. exceed their thresholds again, the timer Dir.-result extension is
reset immediately and the direction determination is carried out again.
1014 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1015
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the 3I0 harm. dropout ratio parameter, you define the dropout threshold for the Min. 3I0>
harmonic parameter.
Lowering this dropout threshold enlarges the range and the period of direction determination under fluctu-
ating zero-sequence harmonics. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.
NOTE
i When both the Operate delay and the Dir.-result extension are applied, the Operate delay
should usually be set to a considerably greater value than the Dir.-result extension. If the Operate
delay is less than the Dir.-result extension, the function will operate for each fault regardless of
the fault duration, as long as the fault direction equals the set direction.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1016 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.9.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1017
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.10.1 Description
Logic
Figure 6-377 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
1018 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
11.24.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1019
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
• Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
1020 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
linked with the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1021
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.10.3 Settings
6.23.11.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional 3I0 stage also works on
demand.
1022 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1023
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
1024 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.
6.23.11.3 Settings
6.23.12.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional Y0 stage also works on
demand.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1025
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[logfpsy0-240614-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
1026 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 through the
formula Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.
Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function
indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the
stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1027
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
[fo_SeGfY0-270614-01, 2, en_US]
1028 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.12.3 Settings
6.23.13.1 Description
Overview
The Pulse-pattern detection stage detects a faulty feeder during a permanent ground fault in overcompen-
sated systems. This method is not reliably applicable to undercompensated systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1029
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The following figure shows a simplified network that applies the pulse-pattern detection method.
The pulse pattern in the ground current 3I0 is generated by switching on and off a capacitor in parallel to the
arc-suppression coil:
• When the capacitor is switched on, an additional capacitive ground current is generated and the 3I0
compensation changes.
• When the capacitor is switched off, the additional capacitive ground current is vanished and the 3I0
compensation returns to the normal state.
1030 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• When the clocking pulse is off, the capacitor is switched off, 3I0 in the faulty feeder is increased, and the
current pulse pattern is on.
Clocking Pulse Capacitor 3I0 in the Faulty Feeder Current Pulse Pattern of the Faulty Feeder
On On Reduced Off
Off Off Increased On
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1031
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
1032 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 977.
• If VN or V0 is not available, the current is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When
the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold
value, the pulse-detection logic is started.
If the measured current pulse-off duration equals to the value of the Pulse-on duration parameter and
the measured current pulse-on duration equals to the value of the Pulse-off duration parameter, a valid
pulse is detected.
After the first valid pulse is detected, the pulse counter is started to count the number of pulses continuously
until the stage resets.
Pickup, Operate
After the first valid pulse is detected, the stage picks up.
If the number of detected pulses within the pulse monitoring time reaches the setting of the No. of
pulses for operate parameter, the stage operates. The pulse monitoring time is calculated via the
following formula:
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
For example, the value of the No. of pulses for operate parameter is 3, and the value of the Moni-
toring time(in pulses) is 5. Then the pickup and operate time diagram is as follows:
• After the 3rd valid pulse is detected, the stage does not operate because the time between the 1st and
the 3rd valid pulses is greater than the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
• After the 4th valid pulse is detected, the stage operates because the time between the 2nd and the 4th
valid pulses is within the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1033
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Dropout Delay
Switching on the capacitor usually causes 3I0 to decrease in the faulty feeder. This must not cause the stage to
drop out. For that reason, a dropout delay is active for the sum of the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off
duration values.
1034 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
EXAMPLE
Clocking device:
Tolerance to be set:
[dw_tolerance, 1, en_US]
If you have no information about the tolerance of the clocking device, you can carry out a test recording while
the clocking device is in operation. From the test recording, you can read the inaccuracy of the pulse-on/pulse-
off durations. Add a safety margin of 20 ms on the read inaccuracy and consider this as the maximum toler-
ance of the clocking device. For the setting, add another 40 ms for the tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1035
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
To prevent minor current fluctuations from leading to a maloperation of the function, the setting of the 3I0
delta pulse off-on parameter cannot be less than 5 %.
The setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter can be calculated with the following formula:
[fo_3I0_delta_pulse_off-on, 1, en_US]
Where
Kf Safety factor
Siemens recommends applying the factor 0.6 to also detect high-impedance ground faults.
Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor
ω Angular frequency, which equals to 2πf, where f is the power frequency
L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil
C0Σ Zero-sequence capacitance of the whole network
C0i Zero-sequence capacitance of the protected feeder
EXAMPLE
Kf 0.6
Cs 1.1 ⋅ 10-6 F
ω 314 rad/s
L 0.577 H
C0Σ 5.4297 ⋅ 10-6 F
C0i 1.5502 ⋅ 10-6 F
Then the setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter is calculated as follows:
If the network information for the setting calculation is not available, Siemens recommends using the default
setting of 10 %.
1036 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.23.13.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1037
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike
again after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function is used to protect against intermittent
ground faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function can be used in protection function
groups with current measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the
following figure.
[DwIntGFP, 1, en_US]
1038 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Logic
[LoIntnon, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1039
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Method of Measurement
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
[DwIntFaD, 2, en_US]
25 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
26 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
27 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
1040 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal stress,
the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value reaches
the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage issues the
signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs, the
Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike the
integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires, that is,
no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. Timer T-
reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermit-
tent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new
fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
• The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1041
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
the signals of these functions after detection of an intermittent ground fault (signal Intermittent
gnd.flt.).
The special mechanism is applied for the following listed functions and other functions are not influenced:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
Table 6-14 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
1042 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1043
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
6.24.5 Settings
1044 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1045
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
• Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several
periods, depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.
• Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups
with current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and
a maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.
[DwStrDirIGFP_20140618, 1, en_US]
1046 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Overview
[LoOverview, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1047
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[LoIntdir1, 2, en_US]
28 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5 A.
29 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
30 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
1048 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
• Operating mode Counter:
Many ground-current pulses of intermittent ground faults can result in a damage of the protected object.
In this mode, the criterion for operate is only the number of directional current pulses. This is similar to
the SIPROTEC 4 implementation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1049
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[LoIntdir2, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-391 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter
1050 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode
[LoIntdir3, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-392 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1051
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter • The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter • The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
• The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, no operate is neces-
sary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the inte-
grator, each new ground-current pulse restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset
expires, that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are
reset. The Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be
processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs
later is considered as a new ground-fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
• The intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state:
• The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
1052 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the func-
tion group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1053
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without consid-
ering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the threshold
value.
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when at
least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.
1054 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
6.25.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1055
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
1056 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
The Negative-sequence protection function is used in protection function groups with current measure-
ment.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time negative-sequence protection
stages.
In the function Negative-sequence protection, the following stages can be operated simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time negative-sequence protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time negative-sequence protection
The stages have an identical structure. Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following
figure.
[dwnspstr-271112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1057
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.26.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the general functionality which applies across all configured
stages. It contains:
• Selection of the reference value
• Current-release criterion
Reference Value
With the parameter Reference value, the negative-sequence current I2 is normalized to the rated object
current Irated, obj or to the positive-sequence current I1. When I2 is normalized to I1, the sensitivity of the func-
tion for low short-circuit currents is increased.
Release Current
The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative-sequence protection.
1058 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1059
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
Logic of a Stage
[logiknsp-070312-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-395 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic
Curve
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.
1060 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.
Parameter: Threshold
6.26.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1061
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
1062 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.26.5.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_NSP_Inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-396 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the stage picks up, and the inverse-
time characteristic curve is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time.
The weighted time results from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present
current value is determined from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the
stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 0.95 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup is indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1063
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
1064 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Negative-Sequence Protection
With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.
6.26.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1065
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
The function Directional negative-sequence protection with current-independent time delay (ANSI 46)
serves as the backup short-circuit protection for unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various supervision and protection tasks can be realized, for example:
• Recording of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the system with a higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent
protection. The pickup value can be set under the rated object current.
• Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The Directional negative-sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection
function groups with 3-phase current and voltage measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
[dwnspdir-271112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
Stage Control
The following figure shows a stage control. It is available separately for each stage.
1066 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[lostensp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1067
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[lonspdir-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-399 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with Current-
Independen Time Delay
Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.
1068 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.
[dwstabil-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Direction Determination
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward
β (see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle α and the
limit angle β - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor of
the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function deter-
mines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1069
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[dwphasor-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-401 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values
If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion), direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-direction-
ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.
[lorichtu-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
1070 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1071
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
1072 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
NOTE
i The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1073
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
Parameter: Threshold
6.27.6 Settings
1074 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1075
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection
The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A
maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are
structured identically.
[lostuundcu-150813, 2, en_US]
1076 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection
[loundcur-200713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1077
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
• The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.
Parameter: Activation
1078 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection
Parameter: Threshold
6.28.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1079
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Undercurrent Protection
1080 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time over-
voltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time overvoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
[dw3phovp-030211-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1081
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.29.3.1 Description
[lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-406 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
1082 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1083
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
1084 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.29.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1085
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1086 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.29.4.1 Description
[lo3phinv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-407 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
• Measurement fundamental comp. :
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1087
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.
1088 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[dwovpinv, 2, en_US]
Where
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time . Instan-
taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1089
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1090 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.29.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1091
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1092 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.
[dwovpu1s-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1093
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-410 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Parameter: Threshold
1094 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.30.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1095
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
1096 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function (ANSI 47) monitors the electrical
power system for voltage unbalance.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups
with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The stages have an identical structure.
[dwu2ovps-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1097
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lou21pol-090611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-412 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the negative-sequence voltage. The negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defined equation.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
1098 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• From an internal source on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Chapter
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that
the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
Parameter: Threshold
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
31 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1099
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
6.31.5 Settings
1100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1101
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
The Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding function (ANSI 59) detects
stationary overvoltages at the opposite line end.
On long, unloaded or weakly loaded transmission lines stationary overvoltages are caused by the capacitance
per unit length (Ferranti effect). The overvoltage is present at the opposite line end in this case, but it can only
be eliminated by switching off the local line end.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and compounding function is used in protec-
tion function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding comes with 2
factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The trip-
ping stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured so that the line data parameters can act on all stages (see Figure 6-413).
[dwovpuko-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
Logic of a Stage
[lovpu1ko-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-414 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and
Compounding
Method of Measurement
The compounding calculates the positive-sequence system of the voltage at the opposite line end. For this,
the function uses the line data (X per length unit, C1 per length unit, Line angle, Line
length).
NOTE
i Compounding is not suitable for lines with series capacitors or common-mode reactor.
The voltage Vend at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and from
the flowing current based on the equivalent circuit diagram for the line (see Figure 6-415):
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1103
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
[fofuende-170309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
with
VEnd Calculated voltage at the opposite line end
Vmeas Measured voltage at the local line end
Imeas Measured current at the local line end
CB Effective capacitance of the line
RL Ohmic operating resistance of the line
LL Working inductance of the line
[dwerskom-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
1104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.32.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1105
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
1106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59):
• Detects ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• Determines which phase is affected by the ground fault
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes factory-set with
1 stage. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dwu0ovps-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1107
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lou01pol-070611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-417 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
1108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the threshold value with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the threshold value.
• From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1109
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
Example
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
32 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
1110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
• Recommended setting value (_:361:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V33
Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V.
• Recommended setting value (_:361:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V34
Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must lie above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 75
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. =
75.000 V.
33 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
34 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1111
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
6.33.5 Settings
1112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.
The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3
tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical struc-
ture.
[dwovpuxs-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1113
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[louxovpr-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-419 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
1114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1115
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version:
• Select the value V0 calculated for the Measured value parameter in the function Overvoltage
protection with any voltage.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter in chapter 6.1.6 Appli-
cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).
1116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
6.34.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1117
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
1118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time under-
voltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time undervoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time undervoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-420). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstru3p-110211-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1119
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.35.3.1 Description
[louvp3ph-140611-01_stagecontrol.vsd, 2, en_US]
1120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-422 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
• Measurement fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1121
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay param-
eter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved
by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-422 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
1122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE:
[foschwlw-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1123
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
1124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.35.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1125
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.35.4.1 Description
[lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1127
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[lo_UVP3ph_In, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-424 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
1128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_UVP3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1129
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[dwUVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal is
going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instanta-
neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay
time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-422 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
1130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1131
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.
1132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1133
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.35.4.3 Settings
1134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-426). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstuvu1-110211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1135
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[louvpu1p-280912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-427 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
1136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled via the binary input signal Threshold I>. The function
reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-427 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not
block the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1137
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the Vrated,obj. = 120 kV
line):
Voltage transformer:
With regard to the setting, please note that according to the definition, with symmetrical voltages the value of
the zero-sequence voltage must correspond to Vrated/√3.
[foswprim-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[foswseku-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1139
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
6.36.5 Settings
1140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1141
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.
The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of 3
tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical struc-
ture.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-428).
[dwstuvux-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[louvpuxx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-429 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1143
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-429 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:101) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
1144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can select the value V0 calculated instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter in chapter 6.1.6 Appli-
cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1145
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the
current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by the
user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.
6.37.5 Settings
1146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1147
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.38.3.1 Description
[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-431 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1149
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the para-
meterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.
• Measuring-voltage failure
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.16.8.1 Description .
1150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1151
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Parameter: Q sign
6.38.3.3 Settings
1152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1153
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.38.4.1 Description
[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
1154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
Parameter: Configuration
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1155
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
6.38.4.3 Settings
1156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
• Requires the connection of 2 voltage measuring points to the voltage interface of the function group
You can take one of the voltages as the reference voltage and then the other becomes the main voltage.
The reference voltage is used for comparison.
NOTE
i The voltage selection for the protection function in the FGs works independent of the status of the
Voltage-comparison supervision function.
The Voltage-comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups:
• Generator stator
• Generator side
• Transformer side
[dw_structure_VBP, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1157
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
6.39.3.1 Description
Function Application
The following figure shows an application example.
[sc_VBStoFG, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-435 Connecting the Measuring Points to the Generator Stator Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• Either the Voltage-comparison supervision function or the Voltage measuring-point selection func-
tion must be instantiated. They must not be instantiated at the same time.
About the Voltage measuring-point selection function, you can find more information in chapter
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
1158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Voltage Selection
2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group. In the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function, you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the parameter Refer-
ence voltage, and the other voltage becomes the main voltage.
• The reference voltage is used for voltage comparison.
• The main voltage is used for all voltage-related functions in the FGs that contain the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function.
If the main voltage transformer is disconnected, the Voltage-comparison supervision function issues
the blocking signal Meas.-volt failure. The signal is transmitted to all voltage-related protection
functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison supervision.
The voltage inputs in the preceding figure are calculated with the following equations:
ΔV1 = |v(n)ref.| - |v(n)main|
ΔV2 = |v(n)main| - |v(n)ref.|
ΔV3 = |Vref. - Vmain|
ΔV4 = Max. (V1ref., V1main)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1159
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Voltages Description
v(n)ref. Sampled value of the reference voltage
v(n)main Sampled value of the main voltage
Vref. Fundamental value of the reference voltage
Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage
V1ref. Positive-sequence value of the reference voltage
V1main Positive-sequence value of the main voltage
Pickup
If the voltage difference between each 2 of 3 continuous sampling points is over 8 % Vrated of the plant, the
supervision stage picks up.
Voltage Supervision
For the Voltage-comparison supervision function, the following 2 connection types are allowed:
• Phase-to-ground
The phase-to-ground voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
• Phase-to-phase
The phase-to-phase voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
NOTE
i The 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN and 2 ph-to-ph voltages connection types are not allowed.
Voltage-Failure Indication
For different connection types, the indications are different.
• Phase-to-ground
You can get the voltage-failure information from the output signals Main-voltage failure and
Ref.-voltage failure.
• Phase-to-phase
– If one phase is influenced, the phase information is indicated.
– If more than one phase is influenced, the phase-to-phase information is indicated.
Take the main voltage transformer for example. You can determine the faulty phase with the
following table.
Release Voltage
If the main positive-sequence voltage or the reference positive-sequence voltage is between 50 % Vrated and
130 % Vrated, the function is released.
1160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Selection Invalid
An invalid measuring-point selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as Failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to Invalid.
NOTE
i You must assign a voltage measuring point to the parameter Reference voltage. The assignment influ-
ences the voltage-related protection functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison
supervision function. These voltage-related protection functions use the unassigned voltage measuring
point, which is defined as the main voltage in the Voltage-comparison supervision function. You can find
more information in section Voltage Selection, Page 1159.
EXAMPLE
Meas.point V-3ph 1 and Meas.point V-3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage-comparison supervision func-
tion. Then you have 2 more setting options, as shown in the following figure. You must select one of these
setting options for the parameter Reference voltage.
[sc_VBS_ref.voltage, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Mode
6.39.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1161
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
1162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function serves for measuring the fault distance in the event of a short circuit.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Determining the fault location is based on the
loop-impedance calculation of short-circuited measuring loops.
The Fault locator function is used in the Line protection function group.
[dwstrufo-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The recording of phase currents and voltages is a prerequisite for calculation of fault locations. The Fault
locator function contains all necessary control parameters.
Fault-location calculation starts only if the functions Distance protection, Differential protection, Ground-
fault protection, or Overcurrent protection have picked up or triggered.
Starting Conditions
The fault location is an independent function with its own measurand memory and its own filter algorithms.
To define the valid measuring loop and the most favorable time interval for the measured variable saving, only
a start command is required by the short-circuit protection. The fault location can be started by tripping of the
short-circuit protection or also at each pickup. If another protection device causes the disconnection of a
short-circuit, a fault-location calculation is then also possible for each pickup. In the event of a fault outside
the line to be protected, the fault-location indication cannot always be relevant, however, because the meas-
urands can be falsified by the center infeed for example.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1163
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator
• Fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the basis of
the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
• Fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac-
tance per unit length and the parameterized line length
NOTE
i Specification of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is relevant only for homogenous line sections. If
the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-line-
cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate calcula-
tion of the fault distance.
1164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator
[dwfailur-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-438 Fault Currents and Voltages in a Line Fed on Both Sides
M Measuring point
S1, S2 Source voltage (EMF)
IF1, IF2 Partial fault currents
IF1 + IF2 Total fault current
VF1 Fault voltage at the measuring point
RF Common fault resistance
ZF1, ZF2 Fault impedances
ZF1gnd, Ground fault impedances
ZF2gnd
ZS1, ZS2 External impedances
ZS1gnd, Ground external impedances
ZS2gnd
The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
NOTE
i The visibility of the parameter Parallel-line compensat. depends on the selected setting format of
the Line.
The parameter Parallel-line compensat. is visible if you have connected a parallel line for the
device.
Parameter: Start
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1165
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator
The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel-line compensation functions:
• Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
• Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the power-system
data.
• Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system for the line data.
6.40.5 Settings
1166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Fault Locator
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1167
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection
The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstofqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection
Logic of a Stage
[lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1169
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup
time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Parameter: Threshold
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
1170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection
When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.41.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1171
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Overfrequency Protection
1172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Under-
frequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the power
generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or distur-
bances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages
can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstufqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1173
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection
Logic of a Stage
[lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
1174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Parameter: Threshold
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1175
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.42.5 Settings
1176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Underfrequency Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1177
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate simul-
taneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
[dwdfdt01-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.43.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.
1178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
[lodfdtgf-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1179
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.
6.43.4.1 Description
[lodfdtst-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.
• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
1180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
Parameter: Threshold
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1181
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.
6.43.4.3 Settings
1182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1183
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• Maintains operations for the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that generate active power
The Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group
and in the Line function group.
The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory-set with 8 stages. A maximum of 12 stages can
be operated simultaneously within the function. These stages are identical in structure.
1184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
6.44.3.1 Description
Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1185
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
Measurands
The general functionality requires the following input measurands:
• Positive-sequence voltage V1
• Positive-sequence current I1
• Frequency
S1 and P1 are both calculated from V1 and I1. The frequency is calculated from V1.
The frequency and the frequency change rate df/dt are calculated via the angle difference algorithm. You can
find more information in chapter 6.41.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
Undervoltage Blocking
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated from the positive-sequence
voltage V1. In order to obtain a reliable and accurate frequency calculation result, the magnitude of V1 is
monitored. If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all the protection stages are
blocked and the V1< block indication is issued.
Power Criterion
If a feeder delivers active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar delivers active power to
the high-voltage busbar, it is meaningless to switch off this feeder or the medium-voltage busbar during the
load-shedding process. The power criterion determines the power-flow direction and includes this information
as a blocking criterion into the load-shedding decision of all protection stages.
The Positive power direction parameter defines the positive active-power flow direction of the func-
tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality. You can find more informa-
tion in chapter 6.44.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
In the following figures, if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray, the protection
stages are released. In the remaining area, the protection stages are blocked.
The release area is configured via the following parameters:
• The parameter Phi (power criterion) defines the area which limits the range of the power angle.
• The parameter Min. current (power crit.) defines the minimum positive-sequence current that
must be present to calculate the active power in a reliable way. In the following figures, the minimum
current is indicated as the circle whose center is the origin of the coordinates.
The power criterion is checked only when the following 2 conditions are fulfilled:
• The positive-sequence current I1 exceeds the threshold Min. current (power crit.), that is, I1 is
out of the circle in the following figures.
• The undervoltage blocking is not fulfilled, that is, the magnitude of V1 is not smaller than the Minimum
voltage.
The dashed lines in the figures show the dropout characteristics. The dropout differential of the power angle is
1°.
The symbol φ in the following figures represents the setting value of the parameter Phi (power crite-
rion).
1186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
The power criterion contains the check of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion.
You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter.
The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes.
The working method of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion differ at Phi (power crite-
rion) ≤ 0 and Phi (power criterion) > 0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1187
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
For Phi (power criterion) > 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:
• When I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), all the protection stages are released and
the power-angle criterion is not considered.
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
df/dt Blocking
If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
The df/dt blocking comprises the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
The df/dt-rising criterion and the df/dt-falling criterion can be individually switched on or off. These 2 df/dt
criteria are operative only when the magnitude of the positive-sequence voltage V1 is greater than the
Minimum voltage:
• The df/dt-rising blocking takes place when the df/dt-rising value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-rising blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-rising blocking.
• The df/dt-falling blocking takes place when the df/dt-falling value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-falling blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-falling
blocking.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
1188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
The following figure shows 2 application scenarios of protection devices with the Underfrequency load shed-
ding function.
The standard forward direction of the protection functionality is from the busbar to the protected object which
is the transformer for device 1 or the feeder for device 2. The standard forward direction of the protection
functionality is configured via the (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the
measuring point I-3ph (see chapter 6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3-Phase
(I-3ph)). For the load-shedding function, the positive active-power flow direction can differ from the standard
forward direction of the protection functionality, such as for device 1. To adapt the function to this condition,
the Positive power direction parameter is used. With the Positive power direction parameter,
you can set the positive active-power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard
forward direction.
• For device 1, set the Positive power direction parameter to inv. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the medium-voltage busbar when the positive power-flow direction is from the high-voltage
busbar to the medium-voltage busbar.
• For device 2, set the Positive power direction parameter to acc. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is the same as the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the feeder when the positive power-flow direction is from the medium-voltage busbar to the
feeder.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1189
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
Parameter: Power criterion, Phi (power criterion), Min. current (power crit.)
• With the Phi (power criterion) parameter, you decide whether the protection stage is blocked or
released in the case of low active-power flow. If the active-power flow is low, the determined active
power-flow direction is not always reliable.
For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the protection stage is released for a clear forward active power-
flow direction. If the active power-flow direction is not reliable, the protection stages are blocked. For
Phi (power criterion) > 0, the behavior is the contrary.
The Phi (power criterion) parameter can be set depending on your philosophy.
• With the Min. current (power crit.) parameter, you set the minimum positive-sequence current
threshold to achieve a reliable active-power criterion result. The Min. current (power crit.)
parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated current of the connected current measuring
point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
1190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
The default setting is a reasonable value. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.44.4.1 Description
• The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles
(cycle time = 10 ms). You can set the number with the parameter f< stabilization counter.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1191
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
If the Pickup signal is maintained during the Operate delay time, an Operate indication is issued.
• The SPC signal Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
This SPC signal allows the exclusive stage activation from a station controller.
• The SPS signal >Activate all stages which is offered in the function block General.
The protection stage which receives the newest SPS signal >Exclusive activation or SPC signal Exclu-
sive activation remains active and all other stages are deactivated. If 2 or more protection stages simul-
taneously receive the SPS signals >Exclusive activation and/or the SPC signals Exclusive activa-
tion, only the protection stage with the largest stage number is activated.
If the SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated, the exclusive stage activation is reset, that is, all
protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again.
After a normal device restart (reset), the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS
signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained.
After an initial startup, the exclusive stage activation is reset.
EXAMPLE
Configured protection stages: Protection stages 1 to 8
Protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on: Protection stages 1 to 8
• Case 2:
Scenario: In the protection stage 2, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 2 is activated, the stage 1 is deactivated, and stages 3 to 8 remain deacti-
vated.
• Case 3:
Scenario: The SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated.
Result: The protection stages 1 to 8 are activated.
• Case 4:
Scenario: In the protection stages 2 to 4, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated simultaneously.
Result: The protection stage 4 is activated and the other stages are deactivated.
• Case 5:
Scenario: A normal device restart (reset) occurs.
Result: After the device restart, the protection stage 4 remains activated and the other stages remain
deactivated.
1192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
Parameter: Threshold
With the Threshold parameter, you define the underfrequency pickup value of the stage. The specific value
depends on the application and the total number of the stages applied in parallel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1193
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
6.44.5 Settings
1194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Underfrequency Load Shedding
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1195
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi-
sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB.
Binary inputs also provide the option of switching over the phase sequence with respect to the parameter
setting. For example, in pumped-storage hydropower plants with motor or motor/generator operation you
temporarily change the direction of rotation by changing over the phase sequence.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
• Change over the phase sequence for the entire device.
In doing so, all 3-phase measuring points are switched over. All analog inputs are therefore affected (for
example current and voltage inputs simultaneously).
The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.
[dwphrein-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find the
signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Power-system data → General.
There are 3 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
• Changing the phase sequence via the setting parameter.
– Note: With version V7.50 and higher, this setting parameter is a reset parameter. If the parameter is
changed and transmitted to the device, the device performs a startup. The parameter change affects
all 3-phase measuring points. If the device is in operation and if measurands are present at the
measuring points, perform a parameter change carefully since this affects all measuring points.
1196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
• With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal, you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.
• With the binary signal >Invert Phases, you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3‑phase measuring point.
The 2 binary-signal mechanisms are explained separately below.
[dwphrdrf-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi-
ated via the binary input >Phs-rotation reversal. This switches over the phase sequence simultane-
ously at all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB.
NOTE
i The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase meas-
uring points are below 5 % of the rated variables, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred posi-
tion.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1197
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
[dwphrpsys1-151013, 2, en_US]
[dwphrapp-240211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3) with
the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.
1198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-455 the phase sequence is set to ABC. A is swapped with C in motor operation.
The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the measuring points of current measured values 2
and current measured values 3. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2 and the
impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is calculated
correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending
at the selected measuring points. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change
in the phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched
are under 5 % of the rated variables. If the currents of the measuring points of current measured values 2 and
current measured values 3 of the example fall below 5 % of their rated variables, the switchover is released
and the set phases are switched with active binary input.
[lophrgph-190517-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1199
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
NOTE
i If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following:
The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.
6.45.5 Settings
1200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Phase-Sequence Switchover
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1201
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups . The
function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dwstrsto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
[logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-458 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
NOTE
i If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection function, the Instan-
taneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up. In this case there is no fault recording
either.
Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the parameter (_:114) Start
flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (see chapter 6.53 Inrush-Current Detection).
Parameter: Configuration
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1203
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Configuration parameter is used to define the pickup of a protection function or protection stage that
the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function uses to respond.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
• Distance protection
• Overcurrent protection (phase and ground)
6.46.5 Settings
1204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against
thermal overloads
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function is used in protection function groups with
current measurement.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced stage.
6.47.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies by the device (due to the anti-
aliasing filter)
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1205
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Logic
[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the respective parameters h(0), h(1),
h(2), h(3) and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes . Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Thermal over-
load protection, 3-phase - advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the function values are shown as ---.
1206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
Parameter Value Description
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
6.47.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1207
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
6.47.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_TOLP_withFilterstage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-461 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage
1208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter
The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been
enabled.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents based on a thermal single-
body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]
[fo_normie-170914, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1209
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn ( Threshold thermal warn. ), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and corre-
sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-463 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-463 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal
threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping temper-
ature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling , the Cooling time
constant is activated.
1210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following:
[foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40°C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases.
The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated ).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the RTD
unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function changes to
Warning. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under
the Default temperature parameter, depending on which value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding l threshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing
rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1211
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the
trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start , tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel .
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and canceled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
1212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor .
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: K-factor
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1213
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj= 369 A
[fo_perm_1.0-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fo_perm_0.5-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
[fokonsta-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120°C (80 K + 40°C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155°C (105 K + 40°C) derives.
From these values, the K factor can be derived:
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
NOTE
i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1215
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
• The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.47.4.3 Settings
1216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1217
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
1218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with
current measurement.
The Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function is steplessly preconfigured.
[dwtolp1p-270613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1219
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
Logic
[lotolp1p-250713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for
example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model
according to the thermal differential equation with
[fodiffgl-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[fonormie-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At the same time, Irated,obj is the rated current of the protected object.
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and corre-
sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-466 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-466 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1221
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent.
An indication of 100 % means that the thermal threshold has been reached.
The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic compo-
nents. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you get the following operate curve:
[foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 °C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit
increases. The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is recorded by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog units. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is disrupted, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function changes to Warning. In this
case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default
temperature parameter, whichever value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica must be influenced
for overcurrents (exceeding llimit). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
1222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated
current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the trip
command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1223
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A for lrated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for K-factor.
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91% filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95%.
Parameter: K-factor
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications.
1224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
EXAMPLE
[fo_time_constance_11082015, 1, en_US]
[dwtime-dependent-110815-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1225
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected current threshold of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
NOTE
i For an application as a 1-phase overload protection, the ambient temperature measured via the tempera-
ture sensor is not taken into account. Therefore, the setting has no influence. You can keep the default
setting. If you take into account the temperature, note the following descriptions.
Set the overtemperature as the value that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the
rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object.
You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value. If
you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or
the coolant temperature from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 °C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (ϑmax) and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a measuring element for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.
From these values, the magnitude of the K factor can also be derived.
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If selecting a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further temper-
ature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
1226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
• The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.48.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1227
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
1228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 tempera-
ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dwstrtmp-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1229
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
Logic
[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .
1230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor).
6.49.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1231
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
1232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1233
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
1234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1235
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
1236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1237
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Temperature Supervision
1238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dwstrbfp-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-470 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system checks continuously whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1239
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The function is started via the device-internal protection functions and/or externally (via a binary input or
interface, for example, GOOSE). The start can be done 1-pole or 3-pole. Figure 6-471 and Figure 6-472 show
the functionality.
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage that has to control the local circuit breaker starts the circuit-
breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In case of phase-
selective tripping, the start will also be phase-selective. In addition, circuit-breaker failure protection is started
with 3-pole tripping of automatic reclosing (AREC). In the default setting, the starting signal Internal
start (see Figure 6-471) is held when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection function has tripped. The
Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be
open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If necessary, the
Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection
function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Using routing, you can specify whether individual protection stages or protection functions are to be used as
the starting source or whether starting happens only externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device, Project tree in DIGSI 5 (excerpt)).
1240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lointsta-160611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[loanwext-180713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-472 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel mode, start for 1-pole tripping is initiated only with the binary input signals >Start pole A,
>Start pole B or >Start pole C. In the case of 3-pole tripping, start is initiated only with the input
signal >Start 3-pole (see Figure 6-473).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1241
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
In 2-channel mode, to initiate the start, the binary input signal >Release 1-pole must also be activated, in
case of the 1-pole start, and >Release 3-pole in case of the 3-pole start. In the default setting, the internal
starting signals External start phsx and External start 3-pole drop out immediately when the
binary input signals are cleared (see Figure 6-473). If necessary, the internal starting signal can be held. In this
case the start remains active when the binary input signals are cleared.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set monitoring time of the appro-
priate signal without the function picking up, a fault in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding
signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output, and the
Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the super-
vision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of a settable monitoring time for the
starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-473).
1242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[loexlsvs-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-473 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1243
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[loveranw-100311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Current-Flow Criterion
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker position. A circuit-breaker
pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase currents
exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the associated
threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the threshold
value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the sensitive
threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of a criterion.
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value.
The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for
the switchover.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the zero-
sequence current. In this way a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
When there is Direct release of the I2 criterion, plausibility is checked via the phase currents with
1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release. This is to prevent a false pickup of the current-flow criterion in the
open pole after a 1-pole OFF.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.
1244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lostromk-300610-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1245
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
• The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the Circuit breaker function block) is used to
determine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
If the double-point indications are not routed, an error message is issued. The Health signal changes to the
state Warning. You must do the routing with the closed contact or the closed and open contact. If this is not
the case, an error message is output, and the Health signal changes to the Warning state.
A detected static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion is not used (the signals Aux.co.crit. CB Clsd phsx are inactive).
[lohikols-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker or the individual circuit-breaker pole is closed.
The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because it is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the CB or CB pole is closed. This
means that the CB or CB pole is considered to be closed if it is closed according to the current-flow criterion
but, at the same time, open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker or a circuit-breaker pole is detected as closed and a start occurs in this pole, the function
picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the time delay is running, the system checks contin-
uously whether the circuit breaker or a CB pole has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit
breaker is checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion
because it is preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has
been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.
1246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the CB or CB
pole to be open (dropout with auxiliary-contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-471 and Figure 6-473). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur with a cleared starting signal (that is, with a cleared pickup signal or operate of the protection function),
holding of the start signal must be disabled.
[loanregu-170611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. You can set various T1 times for a 1-pole and multipole start. In case of a 1-pole start, trip-
ping can be repeated in a 1-pole or 3-pole way depending on the setting. If the local CB was not yet tripped,
for example, in the event of an external start of the circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the
circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1 elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1. You can set various T2 times for a 1-pole and multipole start.
If the assigned 1-pole period is initially started by a 1-pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multiphase
start occur subsequently, the corresponding multiphase period is also started so that the both periods run in
parallel. Tripping is determined by the period that expires first.
When there is a 1-pole start with 3-pole trip repeat, the 3-pole T2 time is started.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the backup
tripping signal Trip T2 is generated. This tripping is always 3-pole. If the device is equipped with a protec-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1247
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
tion interface, a transfer-trip signal can be sent to the opposite end if necessary (see chapter Protection inter-
face 3.6.3.1 Overview of Functions).
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the set
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named superordinate parameter that is set in the Device settings.
1248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo-bbp-verzau-1ph.vsd, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-479 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1249
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[loschema-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-479 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping
Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2)
1250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1251
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start!
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can dropout
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
1252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
NOTE
i The setting value Direct release can cause inadvertent tripping of the circuit-breaker failure protection
when 1-pole tripping of the circuit breaker is set.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: I2 criterion
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1253
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
anced errors even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
EXAMPLES
Applications which require you to permit the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion:
• Tripping of the high and low voltage side CB on the transformer: If only one of the two CBs trips, there is
no more current flow.
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
Parameter: Dropout
Parameter: Retrip
1254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
EXAMPLE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1255
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Under these circumstances, the T1 time can be set short (for example 50 ms) in a 3-pole start. The T1 time for
1-pole start, however, must be set to the full clearance time (for example, 130 ms) because the two healthy
phases are to be tripped only in case of an authentic circuit-breaker failure.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Various times can be set for a 1-pole and 3-pole (multipole) start. In the presence of 1-pole short circuits –
that do not jeopardize network stability – it can make sense to allow more time to the local CB (such as twice
the clearance time: 2 x 130 ms = 260 ms), expecting that the CB will open yet. This way, tripping of the
surrounding CBs can be avoided.
1256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device
contacts will burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reaches its final position open-
circuited reliably after a control operation.
6.50.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1257
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
1258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1259
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group. A maximum
of 2 functions can operate simultaneously within the function group.
[lo_strrestrike_2014-03-05.vsd, 2, en_US]
The function logic is grouped into the parts shown in Figure 6-481. In the following chapter, these logic parts
are described in detail.
[lo_respro-210113-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Plausibility Release
The function Circuit-breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker,
usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar. Overfunction of this protection can cause extreme problems for
the whole application.
The logic of plausibility release strongly reduces the risk of a false start of the function by adding an extra
release criteria for a function start.
Each criterion can be switched on or off individually.
1260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
• When the parameter Plaus. via open/trip cmd is set to yes, the trip/open command is moni-
tored. The plausibility release is given if the trip/open command has been generated.
• When the parameter Plaus. via binary input is set to yes, the >release signal is monitored.
The plausibility release is given if the >release signal has been received.
If one of the conditions is fulfilled, the plausibility release is given for 5 s. The 5-s timer ensures that the
release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit-breaker opening/tripping process.
If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no, the start/stop-monitoring logic considers the release as fulfilled.
For safety reasons, the input signal >release has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Start/Stop Monitoring
Via the start/stop monitoring logic, the monitoring duration of the current signal regarding restriking is deter-
mined.
The monitoring is started if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected as open via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts during the time
set with the parameter Position recognition delay.
The Position recognition delay time is used for safety means to ensure that the circuit breaker is
definitely open when the monitoring starts. This parameter allows to adapt this start criterion to all kinds
of auxiliary-contact configurations.
For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
In addition to the active start criterion, the plausibility release (refer to the Plausibility Release, Page 1260)
must be present to start the monitoring duration.
With the fulfilled start condition, the Monitoring duration timer is started. This timer defines how long
the current signal is monitored regarding restriking. If the time expires, the monitoring is terminated.
The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected no longer as open.
• A close command is given by the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1261
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
Delay/Tripping
In the first step, tripping of the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism as well. In the event of a
wrong start and pickup, only the local circuit breaker is opened instead of the superordinated circuit breaker.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time
T1.
If time delay T2 expires, circuit-breaker restriking takes place and the backup-tripping signal Trip T2 is
generated.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup-trip-
ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately (without delay). For safety reasons, a default software filter
time of 20 ms is preset (configurable in DIGSI) for the binary input signal >CB defect.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for the trip command of the func-
tion. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the
setting is independent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
[lo_deltrip-030211-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-482 Logic Diagram for Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
1262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
NOTE
i When using release criteria, it must be ensured that the criteria are given under all the conditions where
the Circuit-breaker restrike protection shall be started. If you choose no release criteria, the release is
permanently given.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit-
breaker restrike protection.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker by control or manually will not trigger the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
Consequently the Circuit-breaker restrike protection cannot be released either.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1263
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
With a threshold below the operating current, a falsely-given start directly cause tripping. For minimizing this
risk, Siemens recommends applying a release criterion additionally. Refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off Addi-
tional Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1262.
1264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
• When using the retrip functionality, this delay time must ensure a safe function dropout after giving the
retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens recommends applying a delay time of 150 ms which is the default setting.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts
burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.
6.51.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1265
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
1266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
• Suitable for integration into more complex automatic operations for power system monitoring and
disconnection
• Serves as a basic function for the protection of larger power plant units
• Used in the protection of power systems for selective disconnection in case of power swings
The Out-of-step protection function is preconfigured with one zone by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4
zones can be operated simultaneously in the function (see Figure 6-483). All zones are configured identically.
The Out-of-step protection function is contained in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and
current inputs. The process monitor provides the function with status information regarding the protected
object (open poles on the line in particular). The protected object can be a line or a power plant unit (gener-
ator with main transformer).
[dwoosstr-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1267
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwmodlpe-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measuring point m divides the total impedance into 2 impedances m· Ztotal and (1-m)· Ztotal. The following
details apply to the impedance at a measuring point m:
[foimpdnz-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fostroms-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fospanng-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In combination with
[foumesor-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fozmesrt-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Angle δ is the angle between the generator voltage and the power system voltage. In normal operation, this
angle depends on the load profile and is relatively constant. In contrast, in the event of an out-of-step condi-
tion, the angle changes continuously and passes through all values between 0° and 360°. Figure 6-485 shows
the impedance process at the measuring point m according to the equation mentioned above. The point of
origin corresponds to the point where the protection device is built in (measuring point of the voltage-trans-
former substitute). Assuming a constant ratio between VNet/VG and a variable angle δ, the locus diagram is a
set of circles. The center and the radius are specified through the ratio VNet/VG. All centers of the circles are
located on one axis specified by the direction of Ztotal. The maximum and minimum impedance values are the
result for the 2 extreme values δ = 0° and δ = 180°. If the measuring point coincides directly with the electrical
center of the system, the measured voltage and thus the operating impedance result in 0 at an angle δ = 180°.
1268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwzverla-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1269
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[lo0imped-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-486 Impedance Measurement and Monitoring of the Positive and Negative Sequenced of the
Currents
NOTE
i If the impedance phasor enters through the straight lines, which can be set using the parameters Zone
limit X top or Zone limit X bottom, the power swing direction is not determined. Since the direc-
tion determination is coordinated with the setting parameter Count at, the above limitation applies only
to the setting entry, entry left and entry right.
1270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[loostzon-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1271
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwzonein-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power-Swing Counter
Passing though the impedance zone is the criterion for incrementing the power swing counter. Use the setting
parameter (Count at) to define when the counter is incremented. Depending on the application, there are
different selection options available for this parameter. For machine protection applications, you only see 3
selection options without direction dependency.
entry The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone.
entry left The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the left.
entry right The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the right.
axis The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone.
axis from left The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
axis from right left.
The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
right.
exit The counter is incremented upon exit of the zone.
exit left The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the left.
exit right The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the right.
In all cases, the impedance phasor must first have crossed the entry line and the
middle ordinate.
Figure 6-489 shows how counting is done for the different trajectories of the impedance phasor. 2 zones are
shown as an example. Each zone has a counter of its own.
4 cases are shown:
Case A: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1.
Case B: The counter for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the
settings (entry, entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case C: The counter for zone 2 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 2. The counter
for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case D: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1. The counter
for zone 2 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry left, axis, axis from left, exit, exit right).
1272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwerhzae-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-489 Incrementing the Power Swing Counter for Different Impedance Phasor Trajectories
The protection setting is exemplified by a power-system configuration. If a power swing occurs in the power
system, the out-of-step protection must separate the power system into islands. Each system island must be
able to establish a stable operating state. Although a certain amount of load shedding must be taken into
account, the aim is to minimize power loss. Figure 6-490 shows the power-system configuration used in the
example.
[dwbspnet-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1273
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
If an asynchronous swing condition occurs, the out-of-step protection function separates the 2 systems A and
C from each other. To allow the subnetwork with power reserve to remain connected to the busbar (and the
local load), either the lines A1 and A2 or the lines C1 and C2 must be disconnected from the busbar,
depending on the direction of the impedance curve. This ensures that the infeeding side remains connected
with the busbar and the local load.
1274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorimp-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
To determine the source impedances as seen from relay A, Figure 6-491 is simplified as follows for the state =
line A2 open (zone 2 active):
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1275
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvrimp2-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-492 Calculation of Source Impedances with Open Line A2 (Zone 2 Active)
The impedances of lines C1 and C2 and of infeed C are combined in Figure 6-492. Only one of the two lines is
used for calculation in the case of a weak infeed (10 Ω); both are used in parallel for a strong infeed (5 Ω).
Since the values for zone 2 are calculated with line A2 open here, simply add the impedance in the direction of
power system A for strong infeed to the line impedance of 10 Ω and 25 Ω for weak infeed. The results for
zone 2 are entered in Table 6-18.
1276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorim1-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-493 Calculation of Source Impedances with Closed Line A2 (Zone 1 Active)
When line A2 is in operation, the current is split between lines A1 and A2. The impedance seen from Relay A is
therefore doubled at the infeeds. Figure 6-493 shows the relevant values for strong and weak infeed. The
impedances for zone 1 are entered in Table 6-18. Zone 1 is effective when line A2 is active.
Table 6-18 Extreme Conditions: Extreme Conditions: Impedance, Seen from Relay A
The condition in which both sides provide a weak or strong source is not relevant for the determination of the
outermost ends of the electrical center.
If one end shows a maximum source impedance and the other a minimum one, you obtain the outermost end
of the electrical center. Use the following equation for calculation (shown for relay A):
[foeztrum-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1277
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
The results must be calculated separately for zone 2 and zone 1 according to the open or closed switch posi-
tions of infeed B. Table 6-19 shows the electrical center, as seen from relay A.
If the 2 sources have different voltage levels, the power-swing impedance differs from the electrical center.
This fact must be considered when determining the outermost ends of the electrical center:
[fodvitio-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Ztotal / Ωsecondary Activated Zone Line A2 Electrical Deviation with Outer End of
in Relay A Center (Seen a Voltage Level the Electrical
from Relay A) / Difference of Center / Ωsecon-
Ωsecondary 10 % / Ωsecondary
dary
Figure 6-494 shows the outer ends of the electrical center for relay A, zone 2 (line A2 is open), including the
possible power-swing impedance locations.
1278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwimpelo-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-494 Swing Impedance Locations and Outer Ends of the Electrical Center for Relay A (Line A2 is
Open)
To ensure that the power swing zone in Figure 6-494 covers the power swing trajectories, the upper and
lower zone limits X are calculated as shown in the following formula. The calculated values reliably cover the
determined outermost electrical centers in Table 6-20. The safety clearance is half the distance between the
determined centers. Depending on the application, another formula can be used to satisfy the requirements
placed on the geometry of the zone:
[foznengr-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Table 6-21 shows the zone limit X setting for relay A based on this formula.
Activated Zone Line A2 Most Extreme Most Extreme Upper Zone Lower Zone
in Relay A Electrical Electrical Limit X Limit X
Center, 1st Center, 3rd
Quadrant Quadrant
Zone 1 active 47 Ω -16 Ω 78.5 Ω -47.5 Ω
Zone 2 Open 26.25 Ω -5.75 Ω 42.25 Ω -21.75 Ω
To determine the Zone limit R, the out-of-step tripping mode must be considered:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1279
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
• If an out-of-step tripping on entry occurs, the R setting must equal the smallest value which occurs when
the power swing reaches the transient stability limit angle.
• The R setting is less critical if the out-of-step condition trips when the axis of symmetry is exceeded. It can
be set to the 0.9-fold minimum stable load impedance or to the 0.25-fold distance between the values of
zone limit X. Note that the circuit breaker is exposed to a very strong recovery voltage after switching.
• If an out-of-step tripping on exit occurs, the R setting depends on how long the trip command is to be
present after the axis of symmetry has been exceeded (180°-condition). The calculation of the R setting
can be based on the currently set swing locus angle.
In the example, tripping is to occur when the zone is entered. Therefore, you have to calculate the R setting
using the transient stability limit angle δ. Based on the maximum transmission angle under stable operating
conditions, the transient stability limit angle is calculated as follows:
Transient stability angle = 180 - maximum transmission angle.
A maximum transmission angle of 60° can be assumed in most cases. The result is a transient stability limit δ
of 120°.
To ensure that the R setting is not too high, it must be determined on the basis of the minimum source impe-
dances. The minimum source impedances (with closed/open line A2) or relay A are shown in Table 6-22.
[dwreinst-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-495 Calculation of the R Setting with Minimum Source Impedances (Line A2 Active, Zone 1)
[forfmel1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenergc-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-496 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System C to Power
System A
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1281
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenerga-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-497 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System A to Power
System C
In Figure 6-497, the energy flows in the opposite direction. Out-of-step tripping must take place at lines C1
and C2. In this case, power system A remains connected to the local load of the busbar.
6.52.5 Settings
1282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1283
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Out-of-Step Protection
1284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
The function Inrush-current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of a
transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.
[dwirsh01-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-
value violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic, and synchronizes the method of measurement. In
order to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the Harmonic analysis method of measure-
ment and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the results
through a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1285
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru02-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 95 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.95).
1286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru10-040912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwinru03-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1287
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
[loinru12-060912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1289
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
6.53.5 Settings
1290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Inrush-Current Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1291
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
• Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
• Monitor agreed power limits and output warning indications
• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
• Power P>
• Power Q>
• Power P<
• Power Q<
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the func-
tion. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
1292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Logic of a Stage
Figure 6-506 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P<).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1293
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> or Power P<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
1294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Logic of a Stage
Figure 6-508 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q<).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1295
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-510 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications of
the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-510
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.
1296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P<.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
• Switching from a positive dropout value to a negative dropout value or vice versa is not allowed. As a
result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the dropout value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1297
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q<.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.
1298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
6.54.8 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1299
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
1300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1301
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.55.3.1 Description
[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-512 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1303
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the para-
meterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.
• Measuring-voltage failure
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.16.8.1 Description .
1304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1305
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Parameter: Q sign
6.55.3.3 Settings
1306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1307
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.55.4.1 Description
[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
1308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
Parameter: Configuration
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1309
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
6.55.4.3 Settings
1310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection
The Current-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on current measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dwstruki-111026-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first system cycle is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δi(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ΔILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ΔILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-515. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1311
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection
Logic
[lojumpii-271011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A
With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.
1312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Current-Jump Detection
6.56.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1313
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection
The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dwstruku-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-
phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of 1 system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δv(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the measured
value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used included the sepa-
rate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output indica-
tion data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (ΔVLimit), the general
information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ΔULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-517. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length of this
pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output indication
Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can prolong the
pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the indication
Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input is detected. If
1314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection
the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).
Logic
[lojumpuu-011211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1315
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Voltage-Jump Detection
Parameter: Threshold
6.57.5 Settings
1316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
The Vector-jump protection function can be used in the following function groups:
• Voltage-current 3-phase
• Voltage 3-phase
The Vector-jump protection function comes factory-set with a Δφ stage.
The following stages can operate simultaneously within the function:
• 1 Δφ stage
• 1 I1 < Release stage
[dw_VJP_Structure, 1, en_US]
6.58.3.1 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1317
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
The following figure shows the situations after the load is switched off:
• The terminal voltage V changes to V'.
• An additional phase-angle jump occurs.
A phase-angle jump occurs with load loss and is the evaluation criterion for the Vector-jump protection func-
tion. If the phase-angle differential exceeds a set threshold, the generator circuit breaker or the circuit breaker
of the system switch opens. Therefore, the generator unit can be protected against unacceptable stress.
Vector Description
Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage (rotor voltage)
V Vector of the generator terminal voltage
ΔV Vector of the voltage differential
V' Vector of the terminal voltage after the load shedding
ΔV' Vector of the voltage differential after the load shedding
1318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
• High measuring accuracy by using frequency-tracked measured values and evaluation of the positive-
sequence phasor
• Blocking the function when the primary voltage is switched on or off as switching can lead to a phase-
angle jump
Logic
[lo_VJP_General, 1, en_US]
[lo_VJP_General_2, 1, en_US]
Phase-Angle Calculation
The phase-angle differential is calculated at different time intervals (t-T, t-2T, t-3T) from the vector of the posi-
tive-sequence voltage via a delta-interval measurement. With the current measured power frequency, the
measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated.
Range
If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold, the Vector-jump protection is blocked.
The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits:
• The threshold of the voltage band is configurable.
• The frequency band ranges is fixed from frated - 3 Hz to frated + 3 Hz.
Measurand
The general functionality calculates the phase-angle displacement Δφ and sends it to the Δφ stage. Δφ is used
for comparison with the parameter Threshold Δφ. Δφ is displayed in the functional measured value and can
be routed in a fault record and displayed in the fault log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1319
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
The functional measured values of Δφ in HMI are displayed differently in the following situations:
• If the Vector-jump protection function is inactive, the function value of Δφ is displayed as “---”
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has not picked up, the functional measured value of
Δφ is displayed as 0.0°
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has picked up, the functional measured value of Δφ
is displayed as a calculated value (for example, 12.0°) and remains unchanged until the next pickup of
the Vector-jump protection function.
Parameter: T Block
6.58.3.3 Settings
1320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
6.58.4 Δφ Stage
6.58.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_DeltaPhi_Stage, 1, en_US]
In the logic diagram, the I1 < Release stage is instantiated. You can find more information in chapter
6.58.5.1 Description.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the AND operation has no influence. The Operate indication is
issued under the following conditions:
• The parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked is set to no.
• The operate delay expires.
Measurand
The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality.
Pickup
The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ.
If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded, the pickup delay starts.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1321
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
The vector jump Δφ is stored in an RS flip-flop. Trippings can be delayed by the associated time delay.
Parameter: Threshold Δφ
Parameter: T Reset
1322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
6.58.4.3 Settings
6.58.5.1 Description
Logic
[lo_UndercurrentRelease_Stage, 1, en_US]
The I1 < Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction.
The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip. It indi-
cates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase-angle criterion is released. If any load in
the network is switched on or off, an unexpected trip can occur.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the Δφ stage works without current-flow criterion. You can find
more information in chapter 6.58.4.1 Description.
If the positive-sequence current falls below the parameter I< Threshold, the message Undercurrent
release is issued and is forwarded to the Δφ stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1323
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Vector-Jump Protection
6.58.5.3 Settings
1324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages
[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1325
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 2, en_US]
1326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
[lo_stage_arcprotection, 1, en_US]
TheArc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
NOTE
i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1327
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If the
test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.
1328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
Parameter: Sensor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1329
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
With the Threshold light parameter, you set the light sensitivity. If you set Threshold light to a
smaller value, the sensitivity increases. If you set Threshold light to a higher value, the sensitivity
decreases. If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold
light parameter to a higher value.
Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors.
Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Parameter: Channel
6.59.6 Settings
1330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1331
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
1332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
6.59.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only
6.59.8.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-527 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1333
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it
to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.
• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.
• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.
1334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.
6.59.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
6.59.9.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1335
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-528 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.
• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.
• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.
1336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in the
busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.
6.59.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation
6.59.10.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1337
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]
• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.59.10.2 Application and Setting Notes
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.
1338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.
General Notes:
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1339
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel =
• Parameter: Channel =
• Parameter: Channel =
• Parameter: Channel =
1340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel =
6.59.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
6.59.11.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Optical line sensor placement in the switchgear
• Optical line sensor connection to the protection device in the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1341
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
[dw_Liniensensor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-530 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• Figure 6-530 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compart-
ment and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the
infeed. Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.
• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.59.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.59.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.
NOTE
i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular equip-
ment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.
1342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.59.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1343
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of 1-phase voltage measuring
points or of 3-phase voltage measuring points by a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input
>MP-ID selection depending on the switch positions of disconnectors.
Example
Figure 6-531 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.
[dwbusbardouble.vsd, 2, en_US]
1344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
[scconnection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-532 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than
one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block
Voltage measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 6-531.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value 2
is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point
V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected as
the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position) while
Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[SclocfcVP, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-533 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open
or in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1345
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
NOTE
i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.
1346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
7 Control Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1347
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).
1348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1349
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[dwsteuer-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
1350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see the following images).
[sccbausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu
[scswausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1351
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The Circuit-breaker switching device is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library in 3 different variants:
• 3-pole circuit breaker
This switching device contains additional base function blocks for protection functions (for example, trip
logic, Manual close, circuit-breaker test).
1352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
NOTE
i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker (status only)
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.
36 First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1353
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)
Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings having Effects on the Circuit Breaker
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the overreaching chapter
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
1354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dwfuncls-140212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1355
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation37), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security38 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
37 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
38 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
1356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dwsteue1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1357
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw3polls-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrang1pLS1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1359
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrang1pLS15p, 1, en_US]
1360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrang1pLS13p, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device .
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1361
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open
poles are closed.
[dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw1panls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[scrang1pLS13pz, 1, en_US]
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition,
the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also used by
protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1363
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
1364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[scrang1pLSHk, 1, en_US]
The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1365
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1367
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
NOTE
i In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain any
additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.
The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1369
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is
the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
• Disconnector with 3-pole connection
The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.
1370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Table 7-11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1371
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Table 7-12 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Disconnector Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)
Table 7-13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with effect on the Disconnector
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block are described
in the next chapter (see 7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector). The Control function block is described
identically as the Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check blocking is avail-
able through protection only with the circuit breaker.
More information on this is can be found in chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see chapter 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
1372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is to
replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.02 s to 1800 s
The Maximum output time specifies the duration (Increment: 0.01 s)
of the output pulse created by the switching
command.
(_:5401:102) Seal-in time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
If the target actuating position is not yet attained
although feedback has already been received, the
output time is extended by the Seal-in time. The
Seal-in time is relevant for equipment that sends
feedback before the switching operation is
completely performed. The Seal-in time is only
considered for control models with feedback moni-
toring.
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
The Switching-device type specifies the type of disconnector
the switching device. grounding switch
fast grounding switch
NOTE
i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector switching device type for communication via IEC 61850. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1373
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Table 7-14 and Table 7-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
1374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation39), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security40 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1ptren-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
39 In the IEC 61850 standard, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
40 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1375
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw5polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[scrangtrenn15p, 1, en_US]
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1377
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[scrangtrenn2p, 1, en_US]
7.2.3.4 Settings
1378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1379
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[scudeffb-150816-01, 1, en_US]
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-27). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.
1380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
[dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
• Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
• Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or
DNP
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry is
shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-28, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1381
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Figure 7-28
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display
The function block offers similar settings to the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see
chapter 7.2.1 General Overview).
[scccs4pa-13112014_DE, 1, en_US]
1382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:
[scinfof1-13112014, 1, en_US]
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the last
switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current state of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1383
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
[dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-32) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[Scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US]
1384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 1381, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs. The
DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
7.3.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1385
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
1386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)
[scconf89-061016-01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1387
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).
1388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scmoscha-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance) is
accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote, or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1389
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.
[schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether a locked
or non-interlocked switching should take place is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is
irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of
remote switching commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.
Table 7-18 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority
Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Non-interlocked Non- interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
1390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
The signals shown in Figure 7-35 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 7-36 and Figure 7-37).
[dwhoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwmodsch-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1391
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
• Activation of Switching Authority Station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):
If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.
[scakthoh-161014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 7-19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority
No Signed on – – DIGSI
1392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority
and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command
sources when using Station and Remote).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1393
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Table 7-21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)
1394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
• Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating
the command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.
Table 7-22 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available
Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No On * * * * Switch. auth. 1
No Off On * * * Switch. auth. 2
No Off Off On * * Switch. auth. 3
No Off Off Off On * Switch. auth. 4
No Off Off Off Off On Switch. auth. 5
No Off Off Off Off Off None
Yes On On On On On All
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1395
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Figure 7-40 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities
Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as
described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
• Circuit-breaker function group
• Disconnector function group
1396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
Figure 7-41 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device
When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.
Figure 7-42 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device
Figure 7-43 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices
The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1397
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.
The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance of
the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority. Addi-
tional signals are displayed in the Control function block.
Figure 7-45 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for Each Switching Device
1398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scverrie-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1399
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[ScAbgang-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.
1400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-48).
EXAMPLE
[ScAnlage-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure below).
[scplanve-241013, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1401
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scdoppel-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnotselected-090315_de, 1, en_US]
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
1402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
You can use the function block Ext. 1-of-N check in the Circuit breaker and Disconnector function groups. In
order to use the function, a control model with feedback monitoring must be configured in the circuit-
breaker control.
If the external 1-of-N check is instantiated, the output Release request prompts a central bay controller
before executing a switching command. This bay controller must permit the switching operation (see the
following figure). If the allocated switching devices were locked in another bay, the release is issued. Only
when the release was issued via the input >Release active is the allocation (Control model: SBO w.
enh. security) or the switching command (Control model: direct w. enh. security) executed
and confirmed. The central bay controller is parameterized to reject a 2nd switching request.
[dw_block-ext-setzen, 1, en_US]
Once the switch position has been reached, interlocking of the switching devices is canceled via the output
Release request. The switching command is completed and acknowledged with CMT (see the following
figure) only when interlocking termination has been acknowledged positively via the input >Release
active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1403
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[dw_block-aufheben-1, 2, en_US]
1404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
This applies to automatic reclosing as well. Switching commands must be prevented as long as automatic
reclosing is active.
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 7-51).
NOTE
i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
NOTE
i The command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit breakers,
because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic reclosing has been
configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1405
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scposcas-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scposca2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scposcan-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnegint-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1407
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scnegtim-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scnegti2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
[scsponta-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 7-23 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
7.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1409
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
1410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
The Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk to the
stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system.
Typical applications are as follows:
• Synchronization of a line and a busbar
• Synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1411
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 7-66 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V141 This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is
connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as
reference is designated with V241. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the
Sync. voltage 2 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The assignment of the measuring points to
the interfaces of the Circuit-breaker function group can be configured, see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding
in the Device.
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
• Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase meas-
uring point (Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-66):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring point.
• Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 7-65):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.
You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.
41 Donot confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 7-64) and V1 to V8
(Figure 7-65).
1412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
[dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1413
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-66 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
1414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwsynp04-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2
setting values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1, the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.
7.5.4.1 Description
• Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1415
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losyn001-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 7-68).
Note the following special features:
• As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calculated
and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to start
the stage for this purpose.
• If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate an closing release. If the synchronization function is deleted,
the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case, it is
possible to activate via the control without synchronization.
• If more than one synchronization stage is switched on, then the >Selection signal must be active for
exactly one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.
1416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
Operating Range
[losyn002-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limits Min.
operating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax as well as by the specified frequency band
frated ±4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or a
voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.
Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the monitors picks up, the
Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is not
possible in this case.
• For consistency of settings of specific parameters
Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. If there is an inconsistency, the
error message Setting error is set.
• For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is set.
Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of one
of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing commands of the synchronization stage are no longer
tested. In other words, a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The readiness
of the stage turns to warning. Direct close command is still possible.
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1417
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
1418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The 1-
phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between VAB
and VA takes into consideration the delta variable Δα during calculation..
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.
Stage-Type Selection
The following 2 types of stage are available:
Stage Type Application
Synchrocheck stage Select this type of stage to issue, for example, an additional release
during an automatic reclosing or a manual reclosing for safety reasons.
With this type, the variables ΔV, Δf and Δα are checked before
connecting the 2 parts of the power system.
Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between
synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch posi-
tion.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous
systems are present. A typical characteristic for synchronous systems is
equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). In this state, the conditions Δα and ΔV
are checked.
If the systems are galvanically isolated, asynchronous systems can be
present. At the same time, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV
and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The time of the
direct close command is calculated taking into account the angle differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. The time of the
direct close command is calculated so that the voltages are equal at the
moment of pole contact of the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0. Δα ≈ 0).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1419
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
NOTE
i All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to
the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test. Therefore, connected phase-to-ground voltages are multiplied by √3 as
the threshold values with reference to the rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) must be set.
[lohyster-010415-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the
minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat.
limit Vmax). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage
exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in
the area of the hysteresis.
1420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 7-70 shows such
an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rotation.
The vector group of the transformer is defined by the upper voltage side to the lower voltage side. If the refer-
ence voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper voltage side of the transformer (as in Figure 7-70),
enter the phase-angle rotation directly according to the vector group. A vector-group figure of 5, for example,
means an angular rotation of 5 ⋅ 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust. (transform.) param-
eter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the lower voltage side due to the system, you then have to apply the exten-
sion angle with 360o. A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o –
(5 ⋅ 30o) = 210o
2. Correction of phase-angle errors: You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in
increments. Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1421
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.4.3 Settings
Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro-
check function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage
on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V
sync1 or V sync2, you must create the V sync select. function block in the Circuit-breaker function
group.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points (V sync1 and V sync2) for the Circuit-breaker function
group is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.
Example
Figure 7-71 shows an example of a Synchrocheck in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. If circuit breaker QA2
is to be closed, the reference voltages must be selected from several possible measuring points. This selection
of measuring points is dependent on the switch positions of all circuit breakers and disconnectors.
1422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwdynmsu-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Each synchronization function requires 2 comparison voltages. For the circuit breaker QA2 located in the
middle, there are 2 options for each side (Vsync1 and Vsync2). The selection of synchronization voltages for each
side depends on the position of the circuit breaker and the disconnectors.
For circuit breakers QA1 and QA3, the busbar voltage (Vsync1) is available for one side, and 3 voltages (Vsync2)
are available for the other side.
[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-72 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1423
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
• It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.
CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit-breaker function group, the V sync select.
function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit-breaker function group. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.
[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If no measuring point can be selected because of the switch or disconnector positions, the ID0 is used. If ID0 is
selected, the indication (_:2311:304) Blocked no V selected is set. The synchrocheck is blocked. If
you have activated the parameter (_:5071:108) Direct close command, unsynchronized switching is
still possible.
1424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynf01-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the control and the reclosing, or externally via binary input signals, for example, by
an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see chapter 7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing
(AREC), and External Triggering).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection of the synchronization stage (see chapter
Supervision in chapter 7.5.4.1 Description). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a successful
start, the indication In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration of the
synchronization process (parameter Max.durat. sync.process) is started. The system also checks
whether the voltages and frequencies are in the operating range (see chapter 7.5.4.1 Description). If this is
not the case, the closing conditions are not checked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1425
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.
1426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.7.1 Description
[losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec-
trical power system. The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions)
have been reached and that the release for closure has been given (see Checking the Closing Conditions,
Closure in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt
for sync. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt syn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is issued.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1427
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.7.3 Settings
1428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1429
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.8.1 Description
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical character-
istic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the operating mode asynchronous is active.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN the
operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the stage is inactive, i.e. a switching release
cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No activa-
tion release can be be given via these operating
modes either.
1430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 7-77). The indication All
sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions remain
fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given (see
also chapter 7.5.7.1 Description).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) dfdiff/dt too large is generated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1431
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1433
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-79 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
1434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency
Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1435
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asynchro-
nous operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz.
7.5.8.3 Settings
1436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1437
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
When configuring the Expanded delta-f options function block, you can expand the synchronization checks
to include the following aspects:
• Limitation of the frequency change rate
With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of permissible requency difference
change. The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration.
Both activation (parameters (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt for sync. op and (_:142) Limit
dfdiff/dt for asyn. op) and the upper limits (parameters (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt
syn and (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) for the frequency change rate are adjustable
selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions. Both stage types consider the frequency
change rate when issuing the release for switching and indicate when the rate is exceeded.
If you also activate the option to compensate for low-frequency oscillations (parameter (_:150)
Suppr. frequ. oscillations), the frequency change rate is stabilized in the presence of such oscil-
lations. Stabilization is in effect for asynchronous as well as synchronous operating modes.
1438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwsynfre-101013-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-80 Example: Frequency Difference between the Constant Frequency f1 and the Sinusoidal
Oscillating Frequency f2
With this option active, the range of function measured values is expanded by the smoothed frequency.
Release of switching in synchronous networks occurs after one second at the earliest. This time is needed
to smooth the frequency measured values.
The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant. The Max. diff.
"f threshold" parameter makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value in
relation to the respective frequency threshold value.
7.5.10.1 Description
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the part
of the electrical power system is detected. In this case, all phases are compared to the parameter V1, V2
without voltage. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage and
frequency (see chapter 7.5.4.1 Description) and all phases must exceed the threshold V1, V2 with
voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing condi-
tions for the synchronism:
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is energized and the part of the electrical power system
U2 is de-energized.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1439
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is de-energized and the part of the electrical power
system U2 is energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-ener-
gized.
Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.
[losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.
You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.
1440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
NOTE
i For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no for
reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 7-81). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is de-energized and part V2 of the power
system is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power
system is de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Settings Description
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If the parts V1 and V2 of the power system are de-energized, the release
for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the
supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1441
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
NOTE
i For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting atno. If a direct close command is necessary,
Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 7-83). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti-
vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command
parameter or dynamically with the binary input signal >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see Figure 7-82).
[losyndir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon start
of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other oper-
ating data is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
7.5.4.1 Description).
1442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering
With Control
The control and synchronization function are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function
group Circuit breaker.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the function group Circuit breaker, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be acti-
vated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer subject to
compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchronization is
then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
[losynaw1-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1443
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[losynaw2-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
• State-controlled, via the signal >Start / stop syn.proc. (see also chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions
are fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is issued. The switched object QAx of the function
group Circuit breaker is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly assigned to
the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.
[losynaw3-160311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.13.1 Description
The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device.
[dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 1, en_US]
The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check
is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay
controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command
from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x. The bay controller x provides the information to the
central bay controller via IEC61850-GOOSE.
The External synchronization is designed as a function block which can be used in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group. The additional External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization
into command processing, so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source.
If a circuit-breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present, the external synchroniza-
tion device is started. After successfully checking the synchronization conditions, the close command is issued
from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker. If a circuit-breaker close command without
synchronization requirement is present, the circuit-breaker close command is issued directly from the Circuit-
breaker function group to the circuit breaker. Also, each circuit-breaker trip command is issued directly to the
circuit breaker.
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1445
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
[dwextsyn-02, 1, en_US]
[scextsyn-041116-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-88 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit-Breaker Function
Group
It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza-
tion function in the same Circuit-breaker function group.
1446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
Parameter: Mode
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1447
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
7.5.13.3 Settings
1448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1449
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
1450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command and
the check of whether the circuit breaker has reached the position for user-defined controllables.
The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5
Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority. For control commands, the function block
checks whether the switching direction is the same as the current switch position. You can instantiate every
user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block and route the corresponding indications
(see following figure).
[scbenutz, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-89 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Individual Indications
The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority, (_:105) Check
if pos. is reached, and (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode. The parameter settings Check
switching authority and Check if pos. is reached affect all controllables instantiated in the
function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parameters and objects.
On the other hand, the parameter setting Check swi.auth. for Mode affects the controllable Mode
(controllable) of the function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1451
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
[scfbudct, 1, en_US]
7.6.4 Settings
1452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1453
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings
If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using
DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer
parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function block
depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current value of
the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.
You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool , Chart setting Int , and Chrt sett.real
in the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a func-
tion group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param-
eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC
charts.
NOTE
i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.
[sccfcparam, 1, en_US]
1454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.7 CFC-Chart Settings
You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
7.7.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1455
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervision
and monitoring functions. The supervision and monitoring functions are used to check the voltage and supply
information about the tap position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection.
[sc_tssdig, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-92 Transformer Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix
The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
You can find more information in chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Position Controllable also contains parameters. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The taps
are controlled via the commands Higher command and Lower command, each of which must be connected
to one binary output.
1456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
Example
The following 2 figures show a CFC chart as an example for transformer tap control with the routing of the
function keys for stepping up or stepping down.
[schilocd-280316-01, 2, en_US]
To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications (SPS). These are used for the func-
tion keys (for example, <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower function key) and as the input signals for
the appropriate CFC blocks. In addition, you must use the controllable Cmd. with feedback for the CFC
chart.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1457
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
You can select the control direction using the following values at the Val input of the BSC_DEF building block.
• 1 means step up
[scbivctv-280715-01, 3, en_US]
Pressing the function keys to step up or down incrementally can be displayed using this simple CFC chart.
Adjusting-Command Supervision
Adjusting-command supervision is used for checking the proper operation of the tap-changer mechanism. The
Transformer tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher/lower
command. The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding
contact. After resetting the active motor sliding contact, the Transformer tap changer function reads the new
tap position value. If the value for the calculated tap position could not be received within the parameterized
time Motor supervision time, the error message Position failure is output.
The following position errors of the transformer tap changer are taken into consideration during this:
• Invalid tap position: The tap position is outside the predefined range of minimum value and maximum
value
• Adjusting command in the wrong direction (for example, if a higher tap was commanded and the tap
changer responds with a lower position and vice versa)
• No operation of the tap changer (for example, if the tap-changer motor is defective or the position indi-
cation is not functioning)
• Illogical tap-change operation (for example, if no logical tap position following the previous position is
indicated)
1458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
The value of 0 during an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage represents a special case. An invalid
tap-changer position without a corresponding adjusting command is signaled in the Position controllable
only as an invalid tap position.
[lotcmoue-090713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The user-defined signals Higher command and Lower command are provided via a CFC chart (see
Figure 7-94).
Supervision Behavior
Depending on the setting of the Supervision behavior parameter, the function reaches a health state of
Alarm or Warning. You can set the parameter Supervision behavior to off, alarm block, or
warning.
In the alarm block mode, the function is set to the health state Alarm. All tap-changer commands are
blocked.
In the warning mode, the function is set to the health state Warning. Executing tap-changer commands is
still possible.
You can manually reset the health state of alarm block or warning using the controllable Reset errors
(Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions → Tap changer). As an alternative to this, you can also
switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again.
Operating Counter
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. switching
cycle counting value. The counting and memory levels are protected against an auxiliary-voltage failure. The
switching cycle counting value can be set to 0 or to any other starting value.
You can access the statistical values via the operation panel on the device (measured values/statistics), via
DIGSI, or using various communication protocols.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1459
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i If run positions, this means internal tap changer positions without voltage changes, are available, the
following must be observed:
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not
required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime
when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing of the motor
sliding contact.
• status only
1460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
• Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer pos. = Lowest voltage tap
With the Highest tap changer pos. parameter, you specify whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1461
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
[scdeegts-170216-01, 1, en_US]
1462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
• BCD
• table
• BCD signed
• gray
The tap changer position can also be routed via a GOOSE signal (BSC) or a 20-mA measuring transducer input.
You can find more information on this in the document Measuring the transformer tap changer using an
analog measuring transducer input in SIPROTEC 5 in the Download area under SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI
5 downloads → SIPROTEC 5 General → Application Notes → Control.
A selection of tap-coding types is described in greater detail using examples in the following text.
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X X – –
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving – –
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0 – –
With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the numerical value 3. You must configure
the information properties as follows for the example:
Tap-coding type: binary
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 4
Tap-display offset: 2
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, and BI 4 for the moving
contact.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1463
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7
Tap changer X X X X X X X
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 BCD 4 BCD 8 BCD 10 BCD 20 Moving
contact
Tap = 21 1 0 0 0 0 1 –
With 6 binary inputs, a maximum of 39 tap positions can be mapped with the tap-coding type of BCD. This
yields the number of tap positions from 1 to 39. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is detected as tap 0.
The 7 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, BI 4, BI 5, BI 6, and BI 7 for
the moving contact.
Tap-coding type: BCD
Number of tap positions: 39
Number of bits f. tap code: 7
Tap-display offset: 0
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
1464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
[sccotabi-111016-01, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i If the binary inputs used for encoding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of
the display offset). For an invalid tap position, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid,
exception BCD signed, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed), Page 1465.
Enter the encoding for the tap in the Encoding column in the Code table. Enter the value according to the
number system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding. Taps
with the same encoding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.
Table 7-27 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X – – –
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign – – –
Tap = 1 1 0 1 – – –
Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed.
This yields the number of tap positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized as
tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap-coding type: BCD signed
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 3
Tap-display offset: 0
Moving contact (highest binary input): No
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1465
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
[sc_trass7, 1, en_US]
1466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
The settings listed here can only be reached and changed by way of the Properties dialog of the Position
Controllable.
Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
General Information
- Minimum value Calculated -
- Maximum value Calculated -
- Tap-display offset –63 to +63 0
- Number of bits f. tap code 2 to 32 4
- Number of tap positions 2 to 63 15
- Tap-coding type • binary binary
• 1-of-n
• BCD
• table
• BCD signed
• gray
Software filter
- Software filter time 0 ms to 86400000 ms 500 ms
7.8.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1467
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.8 Transformer Tap Changers
1468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using a
motor-operated tap changer. In addition, the voltage control can be used for two-winding transformers
connected in parallel.
The function provides automatic voltage control within a specified voltage range on the secondary side of the
transformers or, as an alternative, at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compensation) in the
network. In order to compensate for the voltage variations in the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z
compensation). For voltage drops on the line, use the LDC-XandR procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that a higher or lower adjusting command to the tap changer, as a
function of the voltage change (ΔV) per tap, causes a voltage increase or decrease.
The voltage control operates on a tap-for-tap basis and compares the measured actual voltage (Vact) with the
specified target voltage (Vtarget). If the voltage difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a higher or
lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed. Specifying the
time delay (T1) depends on the set controller response (inverse or linear), so as to avoid unnecessary adjusting
commands during brief voltage deviations from the target value and for coordination with other automatic
voltage controllers in the system.
The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on the upper-voltage side and the low-voltage side
of the transformer to block the voltage controller during impermissible operating states (overcurrent/under-
current/undervoltage). The voltage controller function also has limiting values that, in special operating cases,
suppress higher adjusting commands in the case of overvoltage and lower adjusting commands in the case of
undervoltage.
You can also use the voltage controller function for parallel control of up to 8 two-winding transformers in
different groups. You can carry out parallel control based on the Master-Follower method or using circulating
reactive current minimization method. You can find more detailed information about parallel control in
chapter 7.9.3.8 Parallel Operation.
The Two-winding transformer voltage controller , Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and
Grid coupling transformer voltage controller function groups consist of 5 function blocks. Depending on
the application, the function groups are preconfigured in the relevant application template by the manufac-
turer or can be copied into the corresponding device project during engineering.
The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Two-winding transformer voltage
controller function group.
[dwvolctl-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1469
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
The functions General (GAPC), Tap changer (YLTC), and Voltage controller (ATCC) are logical node points in
IEC 61850-8-1.
The tap changer (YLTC) is the interface between the voltage controller (ATCC) and the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). This means that the voltage controller (ATCC) sends higher and lower
adjusting commands to the tap changer. This tap changer issues command pulses to the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). The tap changer (YLTC) measures the tap positions and monitors the
action of the motor-operated tap changer (OLTC).
The Parallel control function is needed for the parallel operation of 2 to 8 transformers. The Parallel control
function can only be instantiated in the Voltage controller function group.
The function group has interfaces to the following measuring points:
• Two-winding transformer:
– Voltage, 3-phase
– Current, 3-phase (optional)
• Three-winding transformer:
– 2 x voltage, 3-phase
– 2 x current, 3-phase (optional)
[dwvocnti-060913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
You can find the information and function measured values of the voltage controller in the DIGSI routing
matrix.
7.9.3.1 General
If the load is increased in an electricity-supply system, the voltage is reduced and vice versa. The power trans-
formers are usually equipped with transformer tap changers (OLTC) so as to keep the power-system voltage at
a constant level.
As a result, the transformer ratio is changed in predefined steps. Changes to the transformer taps cause the
voltage to change.
The Voltage control function is intended to control transformers with motor-operated transformer tap
changers.
1470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
• For three-winding transformers (3W): the voltage of the secondary winding 1 or winding 2
• For grid coupling transformers (GC): voltage of winding 1 or winding 2, selectively depending on the
power direction
Control operation is based on a step-by-step principle. To move the tap changer one position higher or lower,
a single control pulse is issued to the motor-drive mechanism of the tap changer. The length of the control
pulse can be set over a large range so as to handle the different types of tap-changer drives. The control pulse
is issued if the measured voltage deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset voltage range
for more than a given time period.
The voltage can be controlled at the voltage measuring point or at the load point in the electrical power
system. In this case, the load-point voltage is calculated on the basis of the measured load current and the
known impedance between the voltage measuring point and the load point.
The following figures show possible configurations of the voltage controller for two-winding transformers
with and without current measurement.
[dwkonlst-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-102 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for
Load Compensation at the End of the Line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1471
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dwkonlsK-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-103 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers without Current Measurement
Three-Winding Transformers
Three-winding transformers are special power transformers that have 2 separate windings on the secondary
circuit and typically supply 2 different busbars. The voltage levels on the secondary circuit of the power trans-
formers can either be the same or different. In addition to designs with 2 tap changers on the secondary
circuits, in most cases, three-winding transformers are equipped with only one tap changer or on-load tap
changer on the primary side. It is therefore necessary to feed both voltages of the secondary windings to the
voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and to specify one of them, depending on the busbar situation, to the
voltage controller as the control variable.
The voltages of side 1 and 2 of the three-winding transformer are simultaneously monitored. In the process,
the voltage to be controlled can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one
parameter. This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input, protocol, or function keys. The
uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits.
If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group, the voltage to be controlled can be automatically
selected dependent on the load.
For automatic on-load tap changing, the voltage of the transformer side into which the larger load current
flows is controlled. The respective uncontrolled voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage.
In contrast to overvoltage on the controlled side, for overvoltage on the uncontrolled side, the higher
adjusting command is blocked and no fast step down to a lower tap occurs. In case of undervoltage on the
uncontrolled side, the lower adjusting commands are blocked if this behavior is activated for undervoltage
supervision.
1472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dw_V-constell-3wind-with-imeas.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-104 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement
for Load Compensation at the End of the Line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1473
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dw_V-constell-3wind-without-imeas-091014.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-105 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers without Current Measure-
ment
1474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dw_V-constell-2wind-coupl-transf.vsd, 1, en_US]
Tap Changer
The Tap changer function issues the adjusting commands to the on-load tap changer and receives the corre-
sponding feedback. The function of the tap changer inside the voltage controller corresponds to that of the
separate tap changer. The higher and lower adjusting commands are generated by the voltage controller. The
Check switching authority, Control model, SBO time-out, and Feedback monitoring time
parameters are set only in the voltage controller.
You can find more information in chapter 7.9.4.1 General.
Voltage Controller
The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and within the set voltage limits.
Using the Mode parameter, you can turn the voltage controller on or off or set it for test mode.
With the Number of target voltage parameter, you can specify up to 4 target voltages. You can only
activate one of these target voltages at a time using function key, communication, or a binary input. Use the
Set point mode active parameter to specify a valid target voltage via a communication network.
If the voltage controller is switched off, adjusting commands cannot be given to the tap changer in automatic
operation or in manual operation. The set on-site or remote switching authority is independent of this.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1475
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
You can set the voltage controller operating mode using the Operating mode parameter or the Operating
mode command to automatic operation or manual operation. In automatic operation, the voltage is
controlled automatically in accordance with the set parameters.
1476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[lovoltco-060913-01.vsd, 4, en_US]
1) Manual operation
2) Automatic operation
3) Controllable
4) Command
5) Position and motor supervision (Figure 7-95)
In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard, DOI LTCBlk (Block automatic operation command), automatic
control can be blocked with a command.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1477
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
The voltage controller measures the actual voltage (Vact) and compares it to the target voltage (Vtarget). If
the difference between the measured voltage (control deviation D) is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a
higher or lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed.
You can change the settings for control during operation with the settings group switching.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
• Via a communication connection to substation automation technology (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
You can find more information in chapter 3.11.1 Settings-Group Switching.
Control Deviation
The control deviation is calculated from the present actual voltage and the target voltage in relation to the
rated voltage.
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]
D = Control deviation
Bandwidth
To minimize the number of switching operations by the tap changer, a permitted bandwidth is defined. If the
actual voltage is within the bandwidth, no adjusting control commands are issued to the tap changer. If the
actual voltage exceeds the defined bandwidth, an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay T1
delay. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth before T1 delay elapses, no
adjusting control command is issued.
If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth within the time delay T1, the running time
delay T1 continues to count down, starting at the already elapsed time. If the actual voltage returns again to
the set bandwidth while the time is counting down, the time delay T1 is started at the remaining time. In this
way, the time delay is reduced in the event of frequent violations of the lower limit of the bandwidth.
[dwistspn-060913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
1478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Linear, Inverse
With linear control response, the voltage controller reacts independently of the control deviation after the set
time T1 delay. If more than one tap-position change is required to bring the actual voltage back within the
bandwidth, the set time T2 delay takes effect.
With inverse control response, the time T1 delay depends on the magnitude of the control deviation. Small
deviations are tolerated for longer than larger ones. If the time delay is very small in accordance with the set
characteristic curve, the time T1 Inverse Min takes effect.
The set inverse characteristic curve is a function of the parameter T1 delay. The characteristic curves arising
for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 7.9.4.1 General, margin title Parameter: T1
characteristic.
[dw_istgro-130215, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1479
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dwistgro-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
[losnlruk-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
1480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Automatic Operation
If the actual voltage exceeds or falls below the set bandwidth for longer than the set time delay, this situation
is shown by the indication (_:14011:309) Auto Monitor. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage
range, the indication is reset. You can switch off the function monitor with a time delay = 0 min.
[lofktueb-090913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Line compensation is only active if power is flowing in the direction of the line.
Z Compensation (LDC-Z)
Z compensation allows you to include the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer. You can switch
Z compensation on or off. If cos φ is roughly constant, you can use Z compensation. Setting the parameters
requires the calculation of the voltage increase (Target voltage rising) taking into consideration the
load current (Max load current).
The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % under rated
load.
You can find more information and the calculation in chapter 7.9.4.1 General.
In case of active Z compensation, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to the
target voltage to avoid too high voltage at the transformer. To do this, set the parameter Max load
current. In addition, the parameter Vmax threshold is active. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold
value, no more higher adjusting commands are issued.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1481
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dwregchr-090913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
[dw-line-drop-kompensation-250214-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
1482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
You can also use X and R compensation for parallel control of transformers. If the X value is positive, the
voltage losses of the phase are compensated. If you are implementing parallel control with X and R compensa-
tion, then the X value is negative and considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the transformer.
If the X and R compensation are active, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to
the target voltage in order to avoid a voltage at the transformer that is too high. To do this, set the parameter
Vmax threshold. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold value, no more higher adjusting commands
are issued.
7.9.3.7 Blockings
The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions. The following blocking functions are
available:
• Undervoltage
• Overcurrent, load current
• Undercurrent
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1483
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
If assignment of the tap changer for the transformer side is available, the current of the upper-voltage side is
also monitored and the differential-protection pickup automatically blocks the voltage controller.
General
The parallel operation of 2 or more power transformers is intended to increase the electrical throughput or
short-circuit power at a power-system node. An additional reason for the parallel operation of transformers is
a reserve in case of a failure of a transformer.
If power peaks are to be expected in the power system, multiple transformers can be connected in parallel on
different busbars. This allows several feeders to be supplied simultaneously. You can control up to 8 trans-
formers in parallel in one group. The evaluation of the measured and status values takes place via the IEC
61850 GOOSE communication.
If for the transformers used the tap positions differ, thus creating a different transformation ratio, the no-load
voltages on the low-voltage side are different. A circulating reactive current flows via the transformers. Since
the transformer impedance consists mainly of leakage inductance, the current is inductive. These currents can
result in an overload of the transformer.
The parallel operation is intended for two-winding transformers. For this application case, additionally instan-
tiate the function Parallel operation. For each of the transformers connected in parallel you need an addi-
tional function block ParallelProxy. The 1st ParallelProxy is preinstantiated. For a configuration with
8 transformers working in parallel, you can instantiate a maximum of 7 ParallelProxy. The exchange of
the necessary information takes place via this proxy. 8 transformers can be configured to a maximum of
4 groups.
1484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
As the preceding table shows, before selecting the method, you must check whether the corresponding
requirements are met. If you place transformers in parallel, whose short-circuit voltages differ by more than
10 % from each other, then Siemens recommends the Method of minimizing circulating reactive current.
• Master
• Follower
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1485
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_infogroup, 1, en_US]
Grouping
Each transformer in the parallel operation is assigned to a group. The group number can be set by a superordi-
nate control system or locally using a CFC logic. Once the group assignment is fixed, enter a value for the
initial start via the Properties tab of the command Parallel group in the information routing of DIGSI 5.
[sccfcgrouprel, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-117 CFC Chart for Group Assignment and Group Display
1486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_para_grouping_vc, 1, en_US]
During operation you can change this assignment by command, depending on the switching state of the
transformers.
[lo_proxy-logic-part_01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1487
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
same parallel-operation group via GOOSE. The groups of the transformers to be controlled in parallel are set
and changed using the control Parallel group. Thus, you assign the device to a parallel-operation group.
You can do this remote or locally on the device. If No mode is set for the parallel operation, no group
assignment takes place.
[lo_proxy-logic-part_03, 1, en_US]
The signals automatic operation, automatic-block. local, Health, and Remote parallel
mode are transmitted via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group.
If the other voltage controllers in the group are set to the mode No mode or if the communication is
disturbed, the automatic operation is blocked. The blocking is reported. If a fault in the tap position is detected
via the difference in the tap positions of the transformers, the indication Error tap difference is issued.
1488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[lo_proxy-logic-part_02, 1, en_US]
Controlling Locally/Remote
The parallel operation can be done with a parameter or via the control. With the parameter setting control-
lable, with a CFC block, you can also use a binary input and the status signal of a circuit breaker
(Figure 7-124).
First, for the control of the Parallel operation, set the parameters Parallel mode changeable and
Force master changeable.
You can select one of the 2 options:
• by setting
• controllable
[sc_para_oper_change, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1489
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
If you set Parallel mode changeable to controllable, you can read and change the settings for the
parallel operation on the device under the following path:
• Main menu → Commands → Functionality → Voltage cont. 2w1 → Operation
[sc_para_hmi_oper, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-123 Menu Item for Parallel Operation on the Device Display
Figure 7-124 shows an example of a CFC chart for switching to parallel mode via the binary input of the circuit
breaker.
[sc_switchparop_cfc, 1, en_US]
Master-Follower Method
As a prerequisite for the application of this method, the following values must be almost equal:
• Transformation ratios of the transformers used
• Number of the taps
1490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
result in the same ratios. The relative short-circuit voltages of the transformers must not deviate significantly
from each other (max. 10 %).
[lo_parallel_voltage_contrl-master-follower, 1, en_US]
The Master-Follower method can be blocked using the automatic function in the systems control. In case of a
communication failure the function is also blocked.
The Master device controls the voltage of the transformer. The Follower device updates its tap position
according to the Master device. When doing so, the maximum tap-position difference between the trans-
formers is taken into account. If the tap-position difference is exceeded for a predefined time, an error is
reported (Error tap difference). If the supervision of a group detects that there is more than one
Master device, this is reported and the automatic operation is blocked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1491
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dw_CCM_01, 1, en_US]
The following formulas are used to calculate the circulating reactive current.
For each device, a direct-axis reactance relating to the control side of the transformer is calculated from the
following 3 parameters:
• Rated apparent power Srated of the transformer
• Rated voltage Vrated of the transformer
1492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
If the ohmic longitudinal resistance is neglected, the direct-axis reactance of the transformer Tk (k = 1,2,3 ... n
in the example) relating to the control side results in:
[fo_reakccm, 1, en_US]
This direct-axis resistance is transferred to the other voltage controllers as a measured value via GOOSE. This
value is displayed as a check. To determine the total load current, from each voltage controller the measured
current with magnitude and phase angle is transferred as a GOOSE CMV measured value.
The total load current results in:
[fo_summccm, 1, en_US]
The total inductive susceptance, the total susceptance of all transformers results in:
[fo_suszccm, 1, en_US]
The partial load current value of the individual transformers results from the ratio between susceptance and
total susceptance multiplied with the total load current. Only the inductive value, that is, the imaginary part
Im(IA) of the calculated total load current is used.
[fo_loadcurccm, 1, en_US]
The circulating reactive current at transformer k is the difference of the current measured at the transformer
and the calculated partial load current ILkImag. This is multiplied with -1 so that its positive no-load voltage
difference results in a positive circulating reactive current:
[fo_ccmtrafo, 1, en_US]
where:
ILkImag Calculated inductive part (imaginary part) of the partial load current of transformer k
IKBSk Circulating reactive current
IkImag Measured inductive part of the current at transformer k
ISC Measured current at the transformer
X Reactance of the transformer
k 1, 2, 3, ... 8 (number of the transformer)
[fo_regelabwdcc, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1493
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
where:
Xk Reactance of the transformer
Bp Total susceptance (total susceptance value) of all parallel transformers (sum of the reciprocals
of the transformer reactance)
Bk Susceptance of the transformer (reciprocal of the reactance)
Vrated Rated voltage of the transformer
With the parameter Reactive I control factor, you can adjust the control deviation DKBSk so that the
circulating reactive current caused by a tap difference results in exceeding the control bandwidth. A Reac-
tive I control factor which is set too high can affect the control stability. In most cases, control
quality and control stability are available with the default setting of 1.
The sum of the control deviation resulting from voltage deviation DV and the control deviation DKBSk, caused by
the circulating reactive current, results in:
Dk = DKBSk + DV
and is compared with the set bandwidth. The following 2 diagrams explain the summations of the control
deviation at negative and positive voltage deviation. A possible control deviation initiated by the circulating
reactive current, is on transformer T1 in contrast to transformer T2. This results for both voltage controllers in a
different total deviation.
For the calculation of the voltage deviation, the voltages of all voltage controllers are transferred with GOOSE
as a measured value and an average value is calculated. The voltage can be monitored. If the data are not
plausible the voltage controller is blocked after a time delay which can be set.
Error Behavior
If the value of the circulating reactive current exceeds the set time delay Circul. current time delay
for a longer time than the threshold value Circul. current threshold, the indication Circul.
current blocking is issued and the voltage control blocked.
If the circulating reactive current value drops below the preset value, the signal is automatically reset. You can
achieve this by manually controlling the tap changer.
1494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[scblockVC-240117-01, 1, en_US]
[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
In addition to present blockings a parallel operation of the number of proxies used is taken into account.
Binary input
Controllable/device display
NOTE
i Decommissioning the device is only allowed if the Parallel mode of the voltage controller is set to No
mode. After the decommissioning you must commission the voltage controller again.
The decommissioning can be done with binary input indications or via the control.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1495
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dw_overview_sys-config_and_iec61850-goose, 1, en_US]
Step 1
• Create the 1st device for parallel control in the DIGSI 5 project.
• Create the configurations and make the necessary settings for the IEC 61850 structure.
1496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_para_dev_set, 1, en_US]
[sc_para_dev_func, 1, en_US]
• Instantiate the voltage controller function for the two-winding transformer and the Parallel control
function and the proxies that are necessary for parallel operation. One ParallelProxy is required for
each transformer to be controlled in parallel, that is, for 3 transformers in the project, it must be addition-
ally instantiate 2 ParallelProxies.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1497
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_para_instanz, 1, en_US]
[sc_para_com_prot, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Note that you must assign a separate IP address for each device.
NOTE
i Note the hardware equipment of the device and the settings for the IEC 61850 communication (IEC 61850
Edition 2 required).
1498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_change_edition, 1, en_US]
• Adapt the IP addresses of the copied devices in the project tree under Hardware and protocols.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1499
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_para_ether_portj, 1, en_US]
• Adapt the entries of the copied devices for the other transformers (device name and IEC 61850 name).
[sc_lbnametrafo, 1, en_US]
• Assign a unique transformer ID for the other transformers in the copied devices.
1500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
NOTE
i Note that in the Master-Follower method, you must configure one device as the Master device and the
additional devices as Follower devices.
[sc_par_trafo_id, 1, en_US]
Step 3
• Double-click Add new station.
• Change the IEC 61850 station name for example in parallel operation.
[sc_par_stat_iec_edi, 1, en_US]
[sc_par_assign_syscon, 1, en_US]
• Export the IEC 61850 station as an ICD file to the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1501
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_par_exp_syscon, 1, en_US]
If the following dialog appears, confirm with OK and specify a storage location for the SCD file.
[sc_para_assinged, 1, en_US]
Step 4
• Import the ICD files into the system configurator. After the export to the system configurator, the config-
urator starts automatically.
1502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[sc_para_single_line_konfig, 1, en_US]
• Create the individual bays (bays 1-3) and instantiate for each a function and subfunction.
NOTE
i If you use the specified function and subfunction names, the GOOSE application will be created without
faults.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1503
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
• Connect the LN Trafo1\VCtrl1\ATCC1 of the device to the function and the other LN
Trafo2\Ctrl_90VParallelOperation\ProxyATCC1 to the proxies according to Figure 7-142.
Step 5
• Create a new GOOSE application and subsequently perform the GOOSE later binding using the applica-
tion template. With the GOOSE application template, all the links between the devices and the proxies
are automatically connected.
• Set all the settings for GOOSE communication between the Master and the Follower devices in the
IEC 61850 System Configurator.
• If you have done all the links and settings in the IEC 61850 System Configurator, save the project and
close the IEC 61850 System Configurator.
[sc_parasyscon_goose, 1, en_US]
Step 6
• Import the SCD file generated and stored in the IEC 61850 System Configurator back to DIGSI.
[sc_para_import, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-144 Import from the IEC 61850 System Configurator into DIGSI
1504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
The function measured values V max and V min can be reset with the input indication >Reset min./max..
For the two-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → 90V V.contr.2w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.2w
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1505
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
For the parallel control, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 2w → Functional measured values → Parallel operation
Measured Values, Three-Winding Transformer
The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the three-winding transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of
the device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → 90V V.contr.3w
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control 3w → Statistics → 90V V.contr.3w
1506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
The function measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1, and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
For the grid coupling transformer, you can find the measured values under the following menu entries of the
device:
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → 90V V.contr.gc
• Main menu → Measurements → Voltage control gc → Statistics → 90V V.contr.gc
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1507
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Table 7-30 Possible Fundamental Values for the Voltage Controller Function Group
Table 7-31 Possible Power Measured Values of the Voltage Controller Function Group
7.9.4.1 General
The following application and setting notes refer to a two-winding transformer. The additional parameters for
a three-winding transformer or for a grid coupling transformer are marked correspondingly.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.
1508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformer: General
Winding 1
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV
Winding 2
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated current = 1000.00 A
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.
Tap Changer
The parameters of the tap changer inside the voltage controller correspond to those of the tap changer in
chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
For the tap changer inside the voltage controller, the parameters for the control model are copies of those
from the voltage controller. This concerns the parameters:
• Checking the switching authority
• Control model
• SBO42 Time-out
• Feedback.monitor.time
General
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:14011:1) Mode = on
With the Mode parameter, you switch the voltage controller in on, off, or in test operation.
Parameter: Operating mode
• Default setting (_:14011:101) Operating mode = Manual
With the Operating mode parameter, you specify whether the controller is operating in Auto mode or in
Manual mode.
Three-Winding Transformer only:
Parameter: Winding selection
• Default setting (_:15601:157) Winding selection = Winding 1
With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of
Winding 1 or Winding 2. With the WithMaxLoad parameter, the voltage to be controlled is selected
automatically depending on the load current. With this method, you can toggle using the parameter
Winding selection or the controllable Automatic winding selection.
If the controllable Automatic winding selection is set to Off or is not set, you can influence the
winding to be controlled using the following 2 options:
• Using the Winding selection parameter
• Using the Manual winding selection controllable
The function value Active winding shows the winding selection.
42 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is known as Select Before Operate (SBO).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1509
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
7.9.4.2 Controlling
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:107) Check switching authority = yes
With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (On-site,
Remote) is checked during an adjusting command.
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:109) Control model = SBO w. enh. security
This parameter Control model specifies the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2 that corresponds to
the behavior of the data (SBO – Select Before Operate).
You can select one of the following settings:
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 to 4) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
1510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:146) Target voltage 1 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:165) Target voltage 2 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:168) Target voltage 2 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:166) Target voltage 3 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:169) Target voltage 3 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w1
• Default setting (_:15601:167) Target voltage 4 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w2
• Default setting (_:15601:170) Target voltage 4 w2 = 110.000 V
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1511
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Note:
Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:146) Target voltage 1 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:165) Target voltage 2 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 2 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:168) Target voltage 2 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:166) Target voltage 3 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 3 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:169) Target voltage 3 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w1
• Default setting (_:16351:167) Target voltage 4 w1 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Target voltage 4 w2
• Default setting (_:16351:170) Target voltage 4 w2 = 110.000 V
Parameter: Bandwidth
• Default setting (_:113) Bandwidth = 1.0 %
With the Bandwidth parameter, you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to
occur at the Target voltage 1. If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the Target
voltage 1, no correction takes place.
Calculation of the Bandwidth:
NOTE
i When calculating the Bandwidth B, keep the maximum accepted voltage deviation in the electrical power
system and the tap voltage of the tap changer on the secondary side of the transformer in mind. Select the
bandwidths so that it is not passed through within an increment.
NOTE
1512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
On the secondary side, the increment ∆Vsec is not linear. The largest ∆Vmax,sec in an increment results with the
increment to the highest stage (smallest ratio) and with maximum power-system voltage on the primary side.
[fobdnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]
If the control deviation and the bandwidth are thus correlated, this results in a minimal bandwidth that is to be
set:
[fospnvrz-150816, 1, en_US]
Parameter: T1 characteristic
• Default setting (_:114) T1 characteristic = Linear
Parameter: T1 delay
• Default setting (_:115) T1 delay = 40 s
You can adjust the control action so that the smallest number of adjusting commands possible is necessary. To
do this, using T1 characteristic, you set the control response and, using T1 delay, you set a time
delay.
In the Linear setting (linear control response), the control response is independent of the voltage deviation.
A constant time delay applies here.
In the Inverse setting (inverse control response), the time delay is a function of the voltage deviation refer-
enced to Target voltage 1. The greater the control deviation, the faster the control response. The control
quality improves, but the switching frequency increases. The effective time delay results from:
[fovrzzet-211013, 2, en_US]
T1 – Parameter T1 delay
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]
D = Control deviation
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1513
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
[dwrglchr-160913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
1514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
With this parameter, you specify the time delay of the fast step down mode. If the actual voltage is greater
than the value of the limit for the fast step down mode (_:122), the fast step down mode is activated. A fast
step down mode is not activated if the voltage limit is exceeded for only a brief period within the time delay.
Parameter: Function monitoring
• Default setting (_:124) Function monitoring = 15 min
You can delay the pickup of the function monitor. With the setting Function monitoring = 0 min, the
function monitor is switched off.
Grid Coupling Transformer Only:
Parameter: Power-flow supervision
• Default setting (_:16351:162) Power-flow supervision = on
With the Power-flow supervision parameter, you monitor the power flow. You can switch the param-
eter on or off.
[foschlst-211013, 2, en_US]
where:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1515
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
With the following equation, you can determine the percentage of the primary load current of the line from
the rated current of the transformer k (k = 1, 2, …, 8).
[fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US]
where:
Iload Primary load current
Irated Rated current of the transformer
Example
Application example of the LDC-Z line compensation for the voltage control of 2 transformers connected in
parallel.
[dw_target_voltage_2exam, 1, en_US]
In the example, a load current of Iload = 1430 A results in a voltage drop of Vload = 500 V.
Iload(%) 100 % 50 %
1516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
NOTE
i Make sure that you configure the parameter Max load current on the voltage controller on the trans-
former T1 to 200 %, as this summation load current is used for the line compensation.
[fo-I-V-Ratio-250214, 1, en_US]
[fo-I-V-Ratio_Value-250214, 1, en_US]
If you are implementing a parallel control with the X and R compensation, then the X value is negative and
considers the voltage rising from the busbar to the transformer.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1517
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Line drop compensation
• Default setting (_:125) Line drop compensation = off
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: Target voltage rising w1
• Default setting (_:126) Target voltage rising w1 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Target voltage rising w2
• Default setting (_:147) Target voltage rising w2 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Max load current
• Default setting (_:127) Max load current = 100.0 %
For setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR, consider the following parameters:
Parameter: R line w1
• Default setting (_:153) R line w1 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: R line w2
• Default setting (_:155) R line w2 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: X line w1
• Default setting (_:154) X line w1 = 0.0 Ω
Parameter: X line w2
• Default setting (_:156) X line w2 = 0.0 Ω
7.9.4.5 Limiting Values
Parameter: Lower tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:102) Lower tap-position limit = 1
Parameter: Higher tap-position limit
• Default setting (_:14011:103) Higher tap-position limit = 1
With the parameters Lower tap-position limit and Higher tap-position limit, you can restrict
the taps available in automatic operation. For example, using the parameter Higher tap-position
limit, changes to higher taps to excessive ratios that would result in overvoltages in the event of a sudden
loss of load are blocked.
Parameter: Vmin limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:128) Vmin limiting = on
Parameter: Vmin threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:129) Vmin threshold = 105.000 V
Parameter: Vmin time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:130) Vmin time delay = 10 s
Parameter: Vmax limiting
• Default setting (_:14011:131) Vmax limiting = on
Parameter: Vmax threshold
• Default setting (_:14011:132) Vmax threshold = 115.000 V
Parameter: Vmax time delay
• Default setting (_:14011:133) Vmax time delay = 10 s
The voltage limits are necessary only for special control situations. The overvoltage limit prevents a change to
a higher tap by the voltage controller if the limiting value Vmax threshold is exceeded. The undervoltage
limit prevents a change to a lower tap by the voltage controller if the voltage drops below the limiting value
Vmin threshold.
1518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Additional Parameters for the Three-Winding Transformer and for the Grid Coupling Transformer
Parameter: Vmin threshold w1
• Default setting (_:129) Vmin threshold w1 = 105.000 V
Parameter: Vmin threshold w2
• Default setting (_:148) Vmin threshold w2 = 105.000 V
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1519
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Additional Pararmeters for Three-Winding Transformers and for Grid Coupling Transformers
Parameter: V< Threshold w1
• Default setting (_:136) V< Threshold w1 = 90.000 V
Parameter: V< Threshold w2
• Default setting (_:150) V< Threshold w2 = 90.000 V
You can find the parameter and information lists in chapter 7.9.5 Settings.
1520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
7.9.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1521
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
1522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1523
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Three-Winding Transformer
1524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1525
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
1526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1527
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
1528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1529
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
1530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
Three-Winding Transformer
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1531
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
1532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Control Functions
7.9 Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1533
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
8 Supervision Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1535
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
1536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you
from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sclastmo-141210-01, 1, en_US]
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates that
functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a
case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:
Functional Brief Description Change in Load
Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock- • Create CFC chart
ings between protection func- • Delete CFC chart
tions) • Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1537
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
1538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or state has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
• Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.
That is, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the Circuit-
breaker function group to be switched off.
• You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
If a circuit breaker is only to be modeled for control purposes, use the Circuit-breaker [state only] function
group.
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[scfpunkt-141210-01, 1, en_US]
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1539
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.
1540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
[sc-cfc-statistic, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At
this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to
configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1541
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
• Measuring-voltage failure
• Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Voltage balance
• Voltage sum
• Current sum
• Saturation detection
Trip circuits
1542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lozusamm-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1543
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.
Logic
[looppode-200812-05.tif, 2, en_US]
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is violated and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The indi-
cation Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instanta-
neous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) combined
with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked. The
device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative-sequence and positive-sequence
current. In the event of 1-pole automatic reclosing, the supervision is blocked.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, the monitoring can be delayed using the
Asym.fail. - time delay parameter.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. The monitoring seals in
and the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance
1544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
has disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults outside the protection
zone, this seal-in time prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection
functions.
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
Logic
[losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1545
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
NOTE
i If a voltage-transformer circuit breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
Logic
[lozuscha-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected
Object.
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit breaker (see chapter
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is started.
After the time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the moni-
toring is only possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection function
group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit breaker, because the circuit-breaker condition is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 8.3.2.4 3-Phase
Measuring-Voltage Failure) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1547
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
If the device incorporates the Distance protection function, this value must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.
You can find more information in chapter Distance protection 6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .
• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
NOTE
i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will
not be possible any more.
1548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.2.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1549
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwivsstr-060214-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information
routing of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed
here, for example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.
1550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules
are not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 2, en_US]
NOTE
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Superv.Grp. function block and define any
binary input within this group for supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check mark at
the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This extends
the parameterization menu by the sections Supervis. grp. start and Supervis. grp. end (see the
following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1551
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[sc_gruppe_de, 2, en_US]
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1 and 2 or 2 and 3, but no binary inputs on modules 1 and 3. The binary inputs used for super-
vision can be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Superv.Grp. function blocks within
the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Example
There are 4 input/output modules available.
Binary inputs of input/output modules 1 and 2 are already combined in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary
inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping.
In supervision group 2, only these 2 binary inputs of the input/output module 2 not used in supervision group
1 as well as further consecutive binary inputs of the input/output modules 3 and 4 can be combined.
1552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1553
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.3.5 Settings
1554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1555
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
8.3.4.5 Settings
1556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwbwsjsk-301112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
• The affected phases are marked with Broken wire suspected and the following indications are generated:
(_:301) Phs A BW suspected, (_:302) Phs B BW suspected and/or (_:303) Phs C BW
suspected and (_:307) Broken wire suspected
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
• After 10 ms of broken-wire check, a detected wire break is signaled with the following indications: (_:
304) Phase A broken wire, (_:305) Phase B broken wire and/or (_:306) Phase C
broken wire and (_:308) Broken wire confirmed
2. Broken-wire check
• Current phases suspected to have a broken wire are tested for plausibility using exclusion criteria.
• A valid exclusion criterion resets the broken-wire suspicion and cancels any existing blocking of protec-
tion functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1557
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lobwstr1-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-16 Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Example of Differential Protec-
tion
NOTE
i If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.
The detection of the local broken wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of the
device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on permanent
(line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protection).
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/I rated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken wire suspected.
1558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Resetting:
The broken wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.
Indication
If the broken-wire detection by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated.
The indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.
Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken wire suspected must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken wire
suspected is reset including any associated protection blocking.
• Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken wire suspected
• Local overcurrent, that is, for at least one phase applies Iph > 2· Irated
• Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is true for at least one phase Iph > 2· Irated
• Blocking
– Each broken wire suspected must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with “protection blocked”.
• Automatic blocking
– In addition to broken wire suspected, you can make the blocking dependent on the criterion that the
maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value Delta
value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are marked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1559
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
When using the fast measuring transducer inputs as 4 mA to 20 mA inputs, broken-wire detection is active.
With a < 2 mA current, wire breaks are detected and the wire break indication is set. The measured values
display remains unaffected.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.
8.3.5.5 Settings
1560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1561
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
1562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5 A for Irated
=5A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).
8.3.6.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1563
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrusy-300913, 2, en_US]
[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1565
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.7.5 Settings
1566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).
[dwstrcss-300913, 3, en_US]
[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1567
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Logic
[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
1568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
Parameter: Threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).
8.3.8.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1569
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.
[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lokenvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold, the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1571
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN • VN |, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions ).
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
Parameter: Threshold
8.3.9.5 Settings
1572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Logic
[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1573
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in the chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than
0.5 Irated.
8.3.10.5 Settings
1574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Logic
[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1575
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.
8.3.11.5 Settings
1576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
The Saturation detection function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current measuring
point.
The Saturat. det. block is visible in the measuring point Current 3-phase only if the I-DIFF fast 2
stage is instantiated in the Line differential protection function or if the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is instanti-
ated in the Stub-differential protection function.
where:
kCT Minimum current factor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1577
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[fo_saet n, 1, en_US]
where:
n Rated overcurrent factor
Srated Rated burden of the current transformers [VA]
Si Inherent burden of the current transformers [VA]
S' Actually connected burden (protection device + secondary lines)
The minimum current factor kCT establishes the relationship between the different classes of conventional
primary current transformers and the expected minimum current that can result in saturation of the trans-
former.
Closed iron core transformers such as X, P, PX, PS, and TPS are combined in the current-transformer class
TPX. These transformers have a large amount of remanence and a large secondary time constant.
Conventional current transformers with an anti-remanence gap such as the TPY and the PR limit the
maximum possible remanence to 10%. The minimum expected current that can result in saturation of the
transformer is greater for this current-transformer class.
Due to its linear characteristic curve, the current-transformer class of the linear transformers TPZ transforms
the alternating-current component of the primary current very well. The direct-current component of the
current is greatly reduced. Depending on the connected burden, saturation occurs just below the operational
overcurrent.
The following table shows the minimum current factor kCT for the different current-transformer classes:
8.3.12.5 Settings
1578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dwtcsueb-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dw1po2be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (activated)
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is activated)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is activated)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1579
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (“H”) or not (“L”). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault can be a disruption or
a short circuit in the trip circuit, a failure of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC or >CB aux.contact phsA to
>CB aux.contact phsC are not routed to the binary inputs of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5),
the indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input sig.n.routed are generated and the Trip-
circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lo1po2be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[dw1po1be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (activated)
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (closed if the CB is activated)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (open if the CB is activated)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the failure of the control
voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed by means of the equivalent resistance R or by means of the auxiliary contact
AuxCon1 of the closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed (L).
If the binary input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control
voltage has failed.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you set which functions act on the trip circuit that is
being supervised. While these functions are active (for example, protection tripping), the trip-circuit supervi-
sion is blocked. The closed contact of the command relay does not lead to a failure indication in this case.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip
circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC are not routed to the binary inputs
of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5), indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input
sig.n.routed are generated and the Trip-circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1581
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
[lo1po1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain picked up, Rmin results in:
[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit fail.phsA to Trip-circuit fail.phsC.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.
8.3.13.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1583
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
1584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• USB interface
• Battery voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1585
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-39 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point
routing, set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point.
1586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-41 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1587
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
Logic
[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-42 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.72 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.
1588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1589
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
Such errors are, for example:
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
1590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Such errors are, for example:
• Missing hardware module (module x)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1591
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3, you will find
the detailed description, in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also
be found there.
1592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision func-
tions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
Error Responses
Group-Warning Indication
Group Warning
Indication in
Operational Log
Indication in
Device-Diagnosis Log
Indication of
the Life Contact
Fallback Mode
Device Restart (Reset)
Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1593
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Error Responses
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During x –
the
starting
time of
the
device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Live status contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corresponding
corrective measures for each detected device error.
There is further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.1 Indications.
1594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]
Overview of Errors
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1595
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
1596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1597
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detec-
tion and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for
later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recom-
mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
43 The indications are not prerouted in the CFC chart. The indications must be added to by the user in the CFC chart!
1598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Overview of Errors
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1599
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the device
hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of the
defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
1600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.9 Group Indications
[scgrwarn-010313-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-44 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1601
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Supervision Functions
8.9 Group Indications
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This
warning indication does not result in blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the
signal (_:302) Group indication drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input
signal (_:505) >Group indication is to be set.
1602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision
of the Primary System
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1603
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions
[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Operational measured values
• Fundamental and symmetrical components
• Statistic Values
1604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function
[dwomvltg-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Minimum values/Maximum values/Average values and User-defined values can be inserted from the
library into the Line function group.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1605
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.2 Structure of the Function
[dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
n Harmonic order
φn The angle difference between the voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Power factor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1607
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.3 Operational Measured Values
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General of the respective function group, the sign of
the following measured values can be inverted (see chapter 5.1 Function-Group Type Line in the
subchapter 5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group, section on the Inversion of Output-Related Measured
and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
1608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
Fundamental Components
Symmetrical Components
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1609
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
1610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
NOTE
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1611
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 11:10:00.
1612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Operational measured values
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.
(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dwminmax-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1613
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:
Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
• Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
1614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:
[foomverg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
• Parameter Energy restore time
Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will be deactivated automatically.
In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new counter status
- Resetting the counter status to 0
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1615
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function, section on the
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active energy, output: Wp+
• Active energy, input: Wp-
The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the
project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore time is not in
effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval is
not in effect and will be deactivated automatically.
1616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.7 Energy Values
Note: When the parameter is activated, the following setting values are possible for the parameter (_:111)
Energy restore interval: 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 4 min; 5 min; 6 min; 10 min; 12 min; 15 min; 20 min;
30 min; 60 min.
You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. There, under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase.
In this tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1617
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
NOTE
i You can define additional metered values through DIGSI for user-specific applications.
Use pulse meters; then you can define the respective metered values through DIGSI and set parameters for
them analogously to the energy values. You can read out the metered values on the display of the device or
via DIGSI.
Through settings, you can individually set how each pulse-metered value is processed:
• Parameter Restore time
Hour-related point in time when the device will provide a metered value at the communication interface
for transmission. After this, the transfer takes place in accordance with the selected protocol.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval will
automatically be deactivated.
1618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
[scomvimp-010313-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The functionality Pulse-metered values is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you must
load it from the library into the respective function group.
The parameters can be set individually for every pulse counter. You will find the setting parameters in DIGSI in
the project tree under Parameter > Function group
For pulse-metered values, the following described settings and binary inputs are available.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval is not in effect
and will be deactivated automatically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1619
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time is not in effect and
will be deactivated automatically.
The factor is used for adaptation to larger units (for instance, 1000 for kWh). It is adjustable in powers of ten
(1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). The following figure shows the signals that can be arranged in the DIGSI information
matrix. Open the function group where you created the pulse-metered value, for example, Line 1. There, you
will find the function area Pulse-metered value. Here you will also find the logical signals next to the
metered value. Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.
1620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
[scimpzwe-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1621
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System
• Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
1622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a high
precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dwstrpmu-250613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time stamps
and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power frequency
change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured values. There-
fore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system, for example
network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1623
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dwstrwam-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The phasor-measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchrophasor
communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automation
technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol.
The central evaluation system, e.g. SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files, archives them
and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may also be
performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other PDCs or
to a control station is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore, the
device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.
1624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[dwgeopdc-061011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwutcphi-260112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1625
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
1626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[dwklatve-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fo_utcphi-111011-01.tif, 1, --_--]
where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1627
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1st 3-phase voltage measuring points
2nd 1-phase voltage measuring points
3rd 3-phase current measuring points
4th 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of
3 individual synchrophasors. This setting can be made via the parameter (_:10621:103) Only positive
sequence.
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which the
PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been
queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU. If
you use the method of spontaneous transmission via UDP, data output starts immediately after the device
boots without a close command to the PMU.
In addition to the phasors, the channel names of the routed measuring points and the binary information are
transferred. Per default, these are automatically generated by the respective PMU function groups.
Where applicable, you can also edit the channel names of the measuring point and assign a designation of its
own for this purpose. For more information, see chapter 9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI. The
names for the binary information carried out are however, generally automatically generated by the respec-
tive PMU function group and cannot be edited.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point U-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01
1628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point U-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID03
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission is
terminated by a corresponding trip command from the PDC or when the connection between the PDC and the
PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713
The ports must be configured on the PDC.
If you are using the UDP protocol for communication between the PMU and the PDC, you can set either
command mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode. In asynchronous
response mode, data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37.118
format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the
PMU.
Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 3 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support for
up to 12 PDCs.
You configure and parameterize the Phasor Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in a
DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as PMUs.
The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as PMUs. If
more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module assembly (expan-
sion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO ( 2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1629
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N, or P of the device, see Figure 9-10. You can view the
selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and cannot
be changed.
[sccommod-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules and
cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in
item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.
[scethern-210415, 1, en_US]
In the DIGSI properties dialog for channel 1, select the synchrophasor protocol, see the following figure.
1630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scprotoc-210415, 1, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, an advanced settings
dialog for PMU-specific configuration opens, see the following figure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1631
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scwildcard_de, 1, en_US]
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the systems administered.
Configurable placeholders are permitted for each PDC/IP address with the TCP PMU transmission protocol in
general and with UDP in the Communication mode commanded operation. These placeholders allow you
to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to
permit each individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their
hierarchy level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is elimi-
nated. You are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result, very
flexible when making changes to the configuration of the entire system, for example. The placeholder char-
acter must follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.
1632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder and
requested IP address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received is
accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and
PDC.
If you use the asynchronous data transmission method, set the PMU transfer parameter to UDP and the
Communication mode parameter to Spontaneous operation. The PMU data are then sent cyclically via
UDP to each PDC/IP address permanently configured in DIGSI. You may not configure placeholders for PDC/IP-
address ranges in this communication mode.
Data output starts immediately after the device has booted. In this way, no starting signal from the PDC is
necessary to start data transmission.
[sc_spontan_pmu, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1633
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
The configuration dataset is transmitted 1x per minute. With the Reporting Rate parameter, you set the
number of cyclic repetitions of the data packages. As UDP is a connectionless protocol, a preconfigured desti-
nation device with its PDC/IP address is not required to be physically present and/or connected. This allows
uninterrupted provision of the data without bidirectional communication.
NOTE
i If you have not configured valid PDC/IP addresses and still activate option for spontaneous data transmis-
sion, no cyclic data telegrams are sent.
NOTE
i It is possible to configure IP addresses for various PDCs that are not in the same subnetwork as the COM
module. Such configurations are considered valid and may be loaded into the device. However, if the
device transmits spontaneous data and configuration packages to these IP addresses, the PDC with the
deviating subnetwork destination address cannot be reached.
EXAMPLE
COM-Module Address Configuration
• IP address: 192.168.100.1
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 9-15 shows an example expansion of the device configuration by 2 additional input/output modules.
You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the DIGSI routing
matrix, see example in Figure 9-16.
1634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scaddios-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scroutin-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 2 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 2 x 3-phase current measuring points
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1635
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scfgconn-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-17 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
The device load, however, is dependent on:
• Number of PMUs
• Performance class (where Class M generates the greater load)
1636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scPMUnam_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-18 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive-sequence system
only to No in the functional settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1637
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scpmubif-210415, 1, en_US]
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[scparami-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 9-21). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.
1638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
[scdevpmu-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-21 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 9-22).
[sccompmu, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-22 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1639
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as protocol for the GPS clock, see the
following figure. With other settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchron-
ized.
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Parameter: Mode
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set.
1640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Parameter: Class
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
9.10.9 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1641
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
1642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
Measuring transducers with an input rated at 20 mA can be used in the devices. 4 such inputs are available as
module ANAI-CA-4EL, which can be plugged into a communication module slot (for instance, port E or F). Up
to 4 such modules can be plugged in. Typically, slowly changing process variable such as temperature or gas
pressure are recorded with such 20-mA measured values and reported to the substation automation tech-
nology.
The measuring-transducer blocks are embedded in the Analog units function group and contain input and
output channels that are configurable independently of each other.
[dwstrumu-050313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 20-mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If the parameter Range active is not activated (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of
-20 mA to +20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1643
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwklbsp1-120124-01.tif, 2, en_US]
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured value
20 mA a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus, Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100 are entered.
The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolu-
tion = 0.1.
[sctransd-210415, 1, en_US]
If a value smaller than -24 mA or larger than +24 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the meas-
ured value is marked as invalid. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2 additional parameters
Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA, for which
the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0 (Lower limit) of the calcu-
lated measurand are valid (see following figure).
1644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[dwklbsp2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. The total results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -24 mA to +24 mA. The param-
eter Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value
in the Upper limit setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if
the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
[dwklges2-120124-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1645
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
[sctrans2-210415, 1, en_US]
Each measuring transducer makes available the scaled measured value in the information matrix (these are
the temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
1646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting.
9.11.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1647
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.11 Measuring Transducers
1648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
• Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
The function offers 4 independent operating stages with different measuring methods:
• ΣIx-method stage
Sum of tripping current powers
• 2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals
[DwCBWear, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1649
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.3.1 Description
Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.
[LoCBWear, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-31 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Func-
tion
• Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.
1650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[DwCBTime, 2, en_US]
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles. Funda-
mental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1651
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.3.3 Settings
1652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.4.1 Description
[LoCBWIxS, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1653
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
[LoCBWIxF, 1, en_US]
[FoCBWIxA-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-
breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
1654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Parameter: Exponent
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
Parameter: Threshold
9.12.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1655
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.5.1 Description
[LoCBW2PS, 2, en_US]
1656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associated
values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at Ir,
Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[DwCBWOpC, 1, en_US]
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[FoCBW2P1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1657
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[DwCBWSlo, 1, en_US]
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[FoCBW2P2-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith
switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[FoCBW2P3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1659
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Parameter: Threshold
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following calcu-
lation:
[FoCBW2P4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
9.12.5.3 Settings
1660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.6.1 Description
[LoCBWI2t, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1661
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWI2T-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.
Parameter: Threshold
9.12.6.3 Settings
1662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.7.1 Description
[Lo_sup-cb-make-time, 1, en_US]
Operating Mode
The stage for the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time calculates the time between the circuit-breaker
closing command and the point in time when the current from at least one phase exceeds the
Oper.current threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the param-
eter CB make time, the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked
with the quality invalid.
If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the param-
eter Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded, the corresponding outputs Warning 1 and Warning 2 are activated for 100 ms. These
can be routed in the log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1663
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
9.12.7.3 Settings
1664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1665
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
1666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
10 Functional Tests
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1667
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes
1668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)
• Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object.
• Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line . The current-
transformer neutral point then points in the direction of the protected object (for example line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1669
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication
[scprotec, 1, en_US]
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
² Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication valid in DIGSI
5 (see Figure 10-1).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication invalid (see
Figure 10-1).
In Figure 10-2 there is no protection-data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transmission of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.
1670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.3 Functional Test Protection Communication
[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the case of protection interfaces of type 1 and type 2, the complex phasors of the voltage and current meas-
uring point are exchanged between devices of one communication topology in order to be able to carry out a
directional test during commissioning, for example. DIGSI 5 depicts this in the form of a phasor diagram. You
can only route the measuring point to the protection interface. For 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts, a measuring
point can therefore be transferred and checked optionally. You can also check and test the 2nd measuring
point by rerouting. Furthermore, communication with DIGSI 5 can take place via the protection interface to
other devices of the constellation. For this purpose, the protection-interface connection is interrupted and
DIGSI 5 uses this connection for communication with the remote device.
² After completing the remote connection by DIGSI 5, the system switches back over to protection commu-
nication.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1671
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection
• On the device, under Settings → General → Test support → (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under
test
For both test modes, all indications are marked with a test bit.
• Via the binary inputs >Test local device on and >Test local device off
The indications Ctrl:Test local device or BI: Test local device show in which way the test was
switched on. If a device test was initiated by DIGSI or via the communication interface, then the indication(_:
2311:307) Ctrl:Test local device is issued.
If the test is activated, the local differential protection function operates in test mode. This is signaled via the
indications Test local device act. as well as Behavior (I-DIFF test) and Behavior (I-DIFF fast test).
The differential protection functions in the other devices become inactive and report this state with the indica-
tions Inactive and Test remote device.
You can activate the operating mode manually in the following way:
• DIGSI: Online access → Interface → Device → Device information
• On-site operation panel: Main menu → Device functions → Line 1 → Line differential protection
1672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection
With a test switch, you can activate the binary inputs and switch over the current inputs of the protection
device to a current generator.
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs.
[loextta1-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-4 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Test local device on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Test local device off as L (active without voltage).
[loextta2-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-5 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
• Via the binary inputs >Test all devices on and >Test all devices offl:
The indications Ctrl: Test all devices or BI: Test all devices show in which way the test was
started. If the test is activated, the differential protection function in all devices operates in test mode. This is
signaled via the indications Test all devices activ and Behavior (I-DIFF test) and Behavior (I-DIFF
fast test). In this state, the differential protection may be tested.
NOTE
i The test of all devices cannot be set and will be rejected if the local differential protection functions are
already logged off.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1673
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection
You can activate the operating mode manually in the following way:
• DIGSI: Online access → Interface → Device → Device information
• On-site operation panel: Main menu → Device functions → Line 1 → Line differential protection
The following diagrams show possible variants of activation of the test-operation type through control of
binary inputs.
[loextta3-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-7 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Test all devices on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Test all devices off as L (active without voltage).
[loextta4-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-8 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
1674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of the Line Differential Protection
[dwueidif-191113-01, 1, en_US]
To ensure reliable operation of the line differential protection, the operating point must be located inside the
working area and clearly below the tripping lines.
If the differential current monitoring function is tripped or the operating point lies within the tripping area,
proceed as follows:
• Check the pickup value for stage I-DIFF.
• Check the polarity of the current transformer.
• Verify that the differential current is generated by the primary system. Did you consider the charging
current? It will be depicted as a permanent differential current.
If these were not the causes of the differential current, the differential current can be generated by asyn-
chronous communication networks. Such asynchronicity can be created by coupling larger communica-
tion networks.
Another cause of the differential current could be unbalances in the runtimes for the protection commu-
nication that have always existed but not been noticed. This means that the transmission times for the
protection data back and forth are different, as a result of which the measured values received cannot be
synchronized perfectly. Hence, a differential current that might activate the operate function during
increased current flow will be calculated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1675
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displacement Voltage
! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
² With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.
! CAUTION
If there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and simultaneously a grounding on the high-
voltage side, do not perform the test.
Material can be damaged during the test if there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
simultaneously a grounding on the high-voltage side.
² Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.
² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
² Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.
² Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).
² Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.
Example:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
² Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
² Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage
side of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.
1676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
NOTE
i Always keep in mind the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both ends before starting the
tests. Line disconnector switches and busbar disconnector switches must be open so that the circuit
breaker can be operated without risk.
General Precautions
! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
² In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.
For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.
Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:
Test Modes Explanation
Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an
external start: Supervision of the binary input signals in
the case of an external start is disabled. This setting allows
a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the
corresponding switches, because the device contacts are
also actuated in the device test mode.
CBFP function in test mode (device is NOT in test This operating mode is important for function tests in
mode) which the generated operate indications are NOT
supposed to actuate the binary outputs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1677
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
NOTE
i When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.
NOTE
i In the mode Device in test mode, the operate indications generated by the function operate the binary
outputs.
1678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection without Current Flow
² If start is possible without current flow: (see Start by trip command of the external protection).
Termination
² All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1679
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test
NOTE
i If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected, a circuit breaker that has been opened may be
permanently closed.
The following test programs are available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test. 1-pole tests are only
possible if the respective circuit breaker is capable of being opened on 1 pole.
No. Test Program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
2 1-pole open/closed cycle A
3 1-pole open/closed cycle B
4 1-pole open/closed cycle C
[dwcbch01-240217, 1, en_US]
1680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test
[dwzecbc1p2-161013, 2, en_US]
Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:
² If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports the position of the breaker pole to the device via the binary
inputs of the signal Position, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed.
² If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is
closed.
² The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed cycle or an open-only cycle (indication >Ready).
² A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.
[scCBTest3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-13 shows the chronological sequence of an open-closed cycle as an example. If you have activated
the Open only option, the close command is not executed and the dead time not taken into consideration.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted during an open-closed cycle after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101)
Dead time). If the feedback from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmis-
sion time (Dead time + 2 · Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be
failed. The proper functioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker posi-
tions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1681
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test
[dwcbch03-300913, 1, en_US]
With the Use current-flow criterion parameter, you can also specify that a circuit-breaker test is only
executed if the current flowing through the circuit breaker does not exceed a specific current threshold
(Current threshold parameter). Otherwise, the circuit-breaker test is not started.
² If the current-flow criterion is disabled, the current threshold is not evaluated. Then, the circuit-breaker
test is performed independent of the magnitude of current flowing through the circuit breaker.
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker test does not perform a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in
the protection-function groups for circuit breakers. This may cause stability problems in the system during a
3-pole interruption. Therefore, a 3-pole circuit-breaker test should be very short, or not performed at all
under load.
• Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.
[sccb_1-3pol, 1, en_US]
² Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.
1682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test
² Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the working area.
² The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the working area. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1683
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.8 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test
Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to the
current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.
1684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
² Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
² Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
² Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
CWA Process
² Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1685
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
² Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.
1 Binary Input
² Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
² Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.
1686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test
Primary Test
² Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
² Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to the
current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
² Switch the protection function on.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1687
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal
1688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
[foschzbe-130309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1689
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.13 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Checking Disturbance-Voltage Suppression in the Load Resistor with a System Ground Fault
! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
² With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.
! CAUTION
If there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and simultaneously a grounding on the high-
voltage side, do not perform the test.
Material can be damaged during the test if there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
simultaneously a grounding on the high-voltage side.
² Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.
² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
² Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.
² Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).
² Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.
EXAMPLE:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
² Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
² Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage
side of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.
1690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.14 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1691
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
1692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
[scsyn001-170510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
2. The configuration in Figure 10-16 is suitable for measuring the circuit-breaker operating time with an
external timer. Set the timer to the range 1 s or a tripping of 1 ms.
Connect the circuit breaker manually. The timer is started simultaneously by this. After the poles of the circuit
breaker close, the voltage VLine appears. The timer is then stopped.
If the timer is not stopped owing to an unfavorable closing moment, repeat the attempt.
Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts.
NOTE
i Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time. This exclusively depends in good
approximation on the binary output used for the close command. You can find the switching times for the
different binary outputs in the Technical data. Set the total time with the parameter CB make time.
Round off to the next lower adjustable value. Proceed in the same way for all other synchronization stages
used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1693
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
[dwsynae6-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
b) As secondary test
² Establish a synchronous state by applying synchronous voltage values at both measuring points.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values
for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
1694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.15 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function
² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller. You can use a synchronoscope to trigger the start at synchronism, that is, at 12 o'clock. The
duration until the close command then corresponds to a cycle with the duration 1/Δf. At a frequency
difference of 0.1 Hz, the duration is thus 10 s.
² Insofar as permissible, perform this attempt several time for oversynchronous switching and subsynchro-
nous switching.
² The switching performance can be checked with an external recorder or the integrated fault recording
function. You have to start the fault recording explicitly.
² You can repeat the blind switching attempts at the limits of the permissible voltage difference.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1695
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
10.16.1.1 General
Secondary tests can never replace the primary tests described in the following (10.16.2 Primary Tests),
because you cannot exclude connection faults.
Secondary tests are used for the following purposes:
• Checking the setting values
• Checking the correct reaction of the protection function, limits, indications, blocking, and voltage control
functions
• Checking the engineering (for example, routing of the respective logic signals, display images with meas-
ured values and CFC logics)
NOTE
i For tests with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are connected and that the
trip commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted. Otherwise, the circuit breaker may be activated.
If the tap-changer position is not updated manually during the secondary test, you must deactivate the tap-
changer supervision. Otherwise, the voltage control is blocked after every switching procedure.
NOTE
i Once you have completed the secondary test, you must activate the tap-changer supervision again.
General
For this test, the transformer must be de-energized, that is, circuit breakers and disconnectors are switched
off/opened, protected against re-energizing and the maintenance grounding switch should be closed.
1696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
During the functional test of the on-load tap changer, the most important setting parameters for the tap-
changer supervision such as Motor supervision time, Highest tap changer pos., and Maximum
output time must be checked and adjusted.
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Tap-Position Display
You can route the current tap position as a position indication on a display page or into the operating indica-
tions. If no signal is present or the function is blocked, the device reports a position error. The display then
indicates an invalid tap position with --- (Figure 10-18). You can find information on which conditions lead to
an invalid tap position in the section Adjusting-Command Supervision, Page 1458.
[sc_osop_valid_position, 1, en_US]
• BCD4
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1697
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
• BCD8
• BCD10
• BCD20
• BCD40
• BCDminus
• Sliding contact
You can find a short introduction into parameter setting and routing of the binary inputs for the tap position in
chapter 7.8.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Besides the tap-position display via BCD with prefix, the SIPROTEC 5 device offers the option to code the
tap position as follows:
• Binary
• 1-of-n
• BCD
• Table
• Gray Code
[sc_ibs_contr_func, 1, en_US]
1698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
NOTE
i Once you have completed the secondary test, you must activate the tap-changer supervision again.
[fo_ibs_regelab, 1, en_US]
where:
Vact-prim Actual voltage, primary
Vtarget-prim 90V V.contr.2w → Target voltage primary
Vrated 90V V.contr.2w → General:Rated voltage
If you set the 3-phase measuring point voltage to VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN, the
measured voltage primary Vact-prim results from the ratio of the voltage transformer parameters Rated
secondary voltage VCT-sec and Rated primary voltage VCT-prim .
[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt, 1, en_US]
This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec to be fed in depending on the control deviation D to be achieved
with the connection type VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN / 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
being:
[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_2, 1, en_US]
This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec to be fed in depending on the control deviation D to be achieved
with the connection type VT connection = 3 ph-to-ph voltages being:
[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_3, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1699
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
Parameters Value
Power system → VT 3-phase:Rated primary voltage VCT-prim 15 kV
Power system → VT 3-phase:Rated secondary voltage VCT-sec 110 kV
Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated voltage Vrated 10.5 kV
Target voltage 1 Vtarget 11 kV
This results in the secondary voltage Vact-sec with a phase-to-ground connection being:
[fo_ibs_prim_measur_volt_4, 1, en_US]
Control Deviation
• Check the measured value of the control deviation D online in DIGSI or on the on-site operation panel of
the device.
Secondary infeed values for the example:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec = 46.6 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec = 46.6 V ⋅√3 = 80.7 V
Command Outputs
• Check the output of the Lower adjusting command after the parameterizable time T1.
With a set bandwidth B of 1 %, this results in the secondary pickup value:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec > 47.1 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec > 47.1 V ⋅√3 = 81.5 V
• Check the output of the Higher adjusting command after the parameterizable time T1.
With a set bandwidth B of 1 %, this results in the secondary pickup value:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec < 46.1 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec < 46.1 V ⋅√3 = 79.8 V
• Check the output of the Lower adjusting command after the parameterized time Fast step down T
delay.
For the set parameter Fast step down limit = 6 %, the following secondary pickup values result:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec > 49.3 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec > 49.3 V ⋅√3 = 85.3 V
• Check the output of the Higher adjusting command after the parameterized time Fast step up T
delay.
For the set parameter Fast step up limit = -6 %, the following secondary pickup values result:
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground: Vact-sec < 49.3 V
Voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase: Vact-sec < 49.3 V ⋅√3 = 85.3 V
Blockings
1700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
NOTE
i The overcurrent blocking works with the maximum current of all phases, for this reason, check the phases
A, B, and C separately.
Example
Parameters Value
Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated primary current ICT-prim 7500 A
Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current ICT-sec 1A
Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated current Irated 5500 A
[fo_ibs_overcur_block, 1, en_US]
If you set the parameter I> Threshold to 150 %, this results in an infeed current secondary of Iact-sec > 1.1 A
for the example.
Line Compensation
[fo_ibs_load_current, 1, en_US]
where:
ICT-prim Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated primary current
ICT-sec Power system → CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current
Irated Voltage cont. 2w → General:Rated current
The secondary voltage to be fed in for the 100 % load case with a control deviation D [%] to be tested for the
voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground results in:
[fo_ibs_sec_volt, 1, en_US]
For the voltage-transformer connection phase-to-phase, the reference must be multiplied with the factor √3.
For a control deviation of D = 0 % to be tested and a setting value Target voltage rising of 4.8 %, in
the example, for voltage-transformer connection phase-to-ground, this results in a secondary infeed voltage
of:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1701
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
[fo_ibs_sec_volt_values, 1, en_US]
The infeed current for the 100 % load case is Iact-sec = 0.733 A.
• Check the XandR compensation.
The control deviation results from the difference of the measured voltage Vact-prim and a calculated compen-
sated target voltage Vtarget-comp.
[fo_ibs_target_comp, 1, en_US]
The calculated compensated target voltage is calculated from a numerically determined voltage Vload at the
end of the line:
Vtarget-comp = (Vact-prim - Vload) + Vtarget
This numerically determined voltage Vload at the end of the line is determined form the parameters X line, R
line, the flowing current Iact-prim, and the rotor angle φ.
The measured voltage at the voltage controller results as follows from the dependency to the numerically
determined voltage Vload and the flowing current Iact-prim:
[fo_ibs_volt_prim_calcul, 1, en_US]
[fo_ibs_input_values_LE, 1, en_US]
[fo_ibs_input_values_LL, 1, en_US]
1702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
Checking the Settings of the Voltage Controller within a Group and of the GOOSE Communication
• For the functional test of Voltage cont.2w, route the indications Health, Remote parallel mode,
Parallel-operation error, and Auto Blocking to an LED.
• Check this routing.
[sc_ibs_tap_changer_pos, 1, en_US]
If the indication Parallel-operation error is reported, the following causes are possible:
• Communication error
• Master error (number of Masters in the group ≠ 1), only with the Master-Follower method
• Measured value invalid (for example, with line compensation no current transformer assigned in the
remote voltage controller)
NOTE
i If the indication Auto Blocking is reported and if the indication Parallel Auto Blocking is
reported in the ParallelProxy, the possible cause is that the remote voltage controller is blocked or the
Follower device is in the Manual in case of the Master-Follower method.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1703
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
[sc_ibs_func_value, 1, en_US]
• On the Master device, start a Higher adjusting command for the tap changer.
The voltage controllers in Follower mode of the same group must also change to a higher tap once the new
tap-changer position is reached.
• Check the tap position of the Follower devices on the device display of the on-site operation panel.
• Repeat the test with a Lower adjusting command.
• Carry out the test items of the voltage-controller function in the chapter 10.16.1.1 General in the Master
device.
NOTE
i During this test, note that the measured control voltage Vact.m is averaged from the measured voltages
of all parallel voltage controllers and therefore the secondary voltage must be fed in for all voltage control-
lers.
1704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
[fo_ibs_load_cur_perc, 1, en_US]
[fo_ibs_prim_load_voltage, 1, en_US]
The following calculation values result from the Example, Page 1516, which is shown in the setting notes in
the chapter Z Compensation.
Parameters Transformer T1 Transformer T2
Power system → 11 kV 11 kV
VT 3-phase:Rated primary voltage VCT-prim
Power system → 110 V 100 V
VT 3-phase:Rated secondary voltage VCT-sec
Power system → 1500 A 3000 A
CT 3-phase:Rated primary current ICT-prim
Power system → 1A 5A
CT 3-phase:Rated secondary current ICT-sec
Voltage cont. 2w → 10.5 kV 10.5 kV
General:Rated voltage Vrated
Voltage cont. 2w → 26 MVA 52 MVA
General:Rated app. power transf. Srated
Voltage cont. 2w → 1430 A 2859 A
General:Rated current Irated
Target voltage Vtarget 11 kV 11 kV
Target voltage rising 4.8% 9.6%
• Based on the following table check the input currents and voltages for each voltage controller:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1705
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
Checking the Voltage-Control Function with the Method of Minimizing the Circulating Reactive Current
The following secondary test is used to check the setting values. The current is fed into one voltage controller
respectively and this current has a phase angle of -90° to the voltage.
• Check also the functional measured values for the circulating reactive current for the voltage controllers
where no current is being fed in.
The following simplification results:
The current on one voltage controller is the total load current (Iload= Ik) and therefore the measured circulating
reactive current depends on the primary load current on a transformer:
[fo_ibs_ccm_trafo, 1, en_US]
where:
The control deviation DCRCk resulting from the circulating reactive current is determined in the voltage
controller numerically according to the following formula:
[fo_regelabwdcc, 1, en_US]
The primary current to be fed in at a desired control deviation DCRCk results as follows:
[fo_ibs_regelabwd_ccm, 1, en_US]
The current to be fed in is calculated from the following ratio, with the phase angle to voltage being ∠Iact-sec =
-90°
[fo_ibs_load_cur_prim, 1, en_US]
Example
1706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
For the transformer T1, with a desired control deviation of 1 % and the parameter Reactive I control
factor = 1, the primary current is as follows:
[fo_ibs_regelabwd_ccm_values, 1, en_US]
• Check the function values in all voltage controllers according to the following table:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, Manual 1707
C53000-G5040-C011-A, Edition 07.2018
Functional Tests
10.16 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control
[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_thresh, 1, en_US]
Thus. the secondary infeed current results as follows with a phase angle to the voltage ∠Iact-sec = -90°:
[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_inp, 1, en_US]
The calculation from the values of the Table 10-2 with a pickup value of 50 % results in the following for the
transformer T1:
[fo_ibs_ccm_cur_inp_value, 1, en_US]
If secondary test equipment is connected to the device, remove it or switch the test switch to the operating
position.
• To be able to control the on-load tap changer manually, switch the voltage controller to the Manual
operating mode.
NOTE